HomeMy WebLinkAboutB14-0237 Manual �
� � � �� ���
r ,�1
� � �
� � �
� ►
.
� entur L� nk :� _��
� y
��g .
�.
,a ,
�z`���� .
` :�te:.�_ 7 - �r -��
� VAIL t,:._._ _
�' HVAC Upgrade '���� - -�
�
�
�
� 100% FOR PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION
�
�
�
�" MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL
� SPECIFICATIONS
�
�
�
March 31, 2014
�" Submitted By:
�
� . .
�Yl�-f�1P.��"1l��
� � G � � QMI�
�° 5420 Ward Road, Suite 200 �
Arvada, Colorado 80002-1838 �UL O 8 ZO1�
�" Phone(303)422-7400
� Fax(303)422-7900
TOWN OF VAIL
�°
�
� � '- a �� I �`-�����
�
�
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL HVAC UPGRADES
DIVISION 23-MECHANICAL
� 230000 Basic Mechanical Requirements
230100 Mechanical and Electrical Coordination
�" 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC
� 230513 Mechanical/Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
230529 Supports and Anchors
� 230548 Vibration Control
230553 MechanicalIdentification
230593 Testing,Adjusting and Balancing
230700 MechanicalInsulation
230800 Mechanical Commissioning
� 230900 Direct Digital Control Systems
232300 Refrigerant Piping
" 233113 Metal Ductwork
,
233119 HVAC Casings
233300 Ductwork Accessories
�. 233413 Air Handling Fans
233600 Air Tenninals
233650 Sound Attenuators
233713 Air Outlets and Inlets r c�PCO��CFj,+�
234100 Air Cleaning Devices vC���°p D.MqTS�O
� � �
� 236200 Condensing Units ;�`�' y.
237313 Air Handling Units :� �13 m:
� 'O�'• • • ` \
9��. �•
• ..
;� I 1. �.
� �
'
,
' -
,
1
� F:U2114574\SpecAVAIL MECHANICAL SPEC INDEX.doc
,
,
'
r�
,� CenturyLink VAIL ELECTRICAL UPGRADES
� DIVISION 26- ELECTRICAL
r
260500 Basic Electrical Requirements
, 260510 Electrical Remodeling Provisions
� 260519 Building Wire and Cable
� � 260526 Grounding and Bonding Pp0 L/�
, 260529 Supporting Devices and Seals Q� �`
260532 Conduit O�'�'Q��M� C�9?�F
260534 Electrical Boxes and Fittings V;o�' O�.
260553 ElectricalIdentification �801
260580 Equipment Wiring Systeins � , ��
��'•. '�a �
262416 Panelboards 0,�,�
� 262726 Wiring Devices �ss��NA�'E�6�
,. 262816 Enclosed Switches
265100 Interior Lighting �
� 265600 Exteriar Lighting
�
,� DIVISION 28—FIRE DETECTION
� 283100 Fire Detection and Alarm
i
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
�
�
F:U2114574\SpecAVAIL ELECTRICAL SPEC INDEX.doc
!n
�
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
�` 230000—BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
r
� SECTION 230000- BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
�
�.
PART1 -GENERAL
� 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
a
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including the General Conditions of the Contract
�" for Construction, AIA A201 1987 Edition, CenturyLink Cominunications General and Special
� Conditions specification sections apply to the Division 23 specifications and drawings.
�. B. Related Sections: Refer to all sections in Division 23. Refer to Division 26 specification
section and Division 26 drawings.
�
� 1.2 SUMMARY
L
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes
r requirements cominon to inore than one(1) section of Division 23. It expands and supplements
M
the requirements specified in sections of Division 23.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate and co-operate with Owner at all tiines for all new to existing
� connections, system shutdowns and restart-up, flushing and filling both new and existing
� systeins.
'' C. Provide temporary ductwork and piping services where required to maintain existing areas
� operable,as shown on the drawings.
r D. Coordinate all services shutdown with the Owner, provide temporary services as shown on the
drawings.
4�
E. Relocate existing thermostats and humidistats as shown on the drawings.
P
;, F. The Contractor shall be responsible far the maintenance operation and servicing of all new
mechanical systems which are to be used by the Owner during the time of any occupancy and
� use of any areas within the construction limitations before final completion or acceptance of the
� systeins. A written record of maintenance, operation and servicing shall be turned over to the
Owner prior to final acceptance.
m.
G. Refer to AIA Document A 201-1987,Paragraph 9.6.6,9.9 and 11.3.11.
a
�' 1.3 ACCESSIBILITY
Y.
A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance.
� Coordinate the final location of concealed equipinent and devices requiring access with final
' location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that
�'" require replacement or servicing.
�� B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location.
w
� BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 1
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
230000—BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
C. Furnish hinged steel access doors with concealed latch, whether shown on drawings or not, in �
all walls and ceilings for access to all concealed valves, shock absorbers, air vents,motors, fans,
balancing cocks, and other operating devices requiring adjustment or servicing. Refer to
Division 1 for access door specification and Division 23 for duct access door requireinents. �
D. The minimum size of any access door shall not be less than the size of the equipment to be
removed or 24-inch x 24-inch if used for service only. ,�
E. Furnish doors to trades perfonning work in which they are to be built, in ample time for '"
building-in as the work progresses. Whenever possible, group valves, cocks, etc., to pennit use
of minimum number of access doors within a given room or space. `�
�
F. Factory manufactured doors shall be of a rype coinpatible with the finish in which they are to be
installed. In lieu of these doors, shop fabricated access doors with DuroDyne hinges may be
used. �
G. Access doors in fire-rated walls and ceilings shall have equivalent UL label and fire rating. �
1.4 ROUGH-IN
�
� A. Verify final locations far rough-ins with field measureinents and with the requirements of the ,�
actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment shop drawings and manufacturer's requirements for actual provided �
equipment for rough-in requirements.
�
1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Refer to AIA Document A201 (1987) Edition, "REGULATIONS AND LAWS" and �
"GOVERNING LAW."
.r�r
B. Execute and inspect all work in accordance with all Underwriters, local and state codes, rules
and regulations applicable to the trade affected as a miniinum, but if the plans and/or �
specifications call for requirements that exceed these rules and regulations, the greater
requirement shall be followed. Follow recommendations of NFPA, SMACNA, EPA, OSHA
and ASHRAE. �
C. Comply with standards in effect at the date of these Contract Documents, except where a
standard or specific date or edition is indicated. �
D. The handling, removal and disposal of regulated refrigerants shall be in accordance with U.S.
EPA, state and local regulations.
.�
E. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held to complete all wark necessary to meet �..
these requirements without additional expense to the Owner.
�
�
�
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000-2 �
�
,
A�
� CenturyLink VAIL
230000—BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
" 1.6 REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES
�
A. Comply with rules and regulations of local utiliry companies. Include in bid the cost of all
r valves, valve boxes, meter boxes, meters and such accessory equip�nent which will be required
W
for the project.
� 1.7 PERMITS AND FEES
�
A. Refer to AIA Document A201 (1987) Edition, "TAXES," "PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES"
' and"USE OF SITE".
�
B. Contractor shall pay all tap, development,ineter,etc., fees required for connection to municipa]
,. and public utility facilities.
''� C. Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all inspections, licenses and certificates required in
r
connection with the Work.
1.8 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required offset,
�` valve, fitting,etc.
� B. Drawings and specifications are complementary. Whatever is called for in either is binding as
� though called for in both.
r C. Drawings shall not be scaled far rough-in measurements or used as shop drawings. Where
� drawings are required for these purposes or have to be inade from field measurement, take the
necessary measurements and prepare the drawings.
r
D. Before any Wark is installed,detennine that equipinent will properly fit the space; that required
'� piping grades can be maintained and that ductwark can be run as contemplated without
interferences between systems, with structural elements or with the wark of other trades.
r
v E. Coordinate the installation of inechanical materials and equipment above and below ceilings
with suspension system, light fixtures,and other building components.
�^ 1. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with all trades. In the event of conflict, install
� mechanical.and electric systems within the cavity space allocation in tbe following order
of priority.
� a. Pluinbing waste,vent piping and roof drain mains and leaders
b. Supply,return and exhaust ductwork
c. Fire sprinkler mains and leaders
d. Electrical conduit
� e. Domestic hot and cold water,medical gas piping
�, £ Pneumatic control piping
g. Fire sprinkler branch piping and sprinkler runouts
�:.
� F. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
�
� BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000- 3
�r
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
230000—BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
G. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical �
installations.
H. Coordinate the installation of reyuired supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in �
place concrete and other structural coinponents, as they are constructed.
I. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of inechanical inaterials and equipment for ,�
efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning '
prior to closing-in the building. �
J. Coardinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of ��
mechanical equipment and materials. ,�
K. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and �
overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
L. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment
components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with �
minimum of interference with other installations.
M. Coordinate connection of inechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities �
and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
N. The Contractor shall provide all labor and material necessary but not limited to the �
starting/stopping of all inechanical equipinent, opening/closing of all valves, draining/refilling
all inechanical systeins and operating/verifying the operation of all inechanical systems controls
as required to accomplish all wark necessary to meet construction document requirements. �
1.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING �
A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of inechanical equipinent, components, and �
materials to include reinoval and legal disposal of selected inaterials, coinponents, and
equipment. �
B. Refer to AIA Document A201 (1987) Edition, "CUTTING AND PATCHING".
C. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting and �
patching.
D. Arrange for repairs required to restore other wark, because of damage caused as a result of �
mechanical installations.
E. No additional compensation will be authorized far cutting and patching work that is �
necessitated by ill-timed,defective,or non-conforming installations. _
F. Perform cutting, fitting,and patching of inechanical equipment and materials required to: �
1. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work; �
2. Remove and replace defective work;
3. Remove and replace wark not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents;
�
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000-4 �
I
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
�+ 230000—BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
. " 4. Remove samples of installed wark as specified for testing;
5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures;
6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore work to provide for
Engineer observation of concealed work.
° G. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipinent, components, and inaterials
�
as indicated,including,but not limited to removal of inechanical piping,heating units, and other
� mechanical items made obsolete by the new wark.
w
` H. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated ar scheduled to
" be removed.
F�
L Provide and maintain an approved type of temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to
,. prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
1. Dust cover material to be used by the Contractor shall be:
`' Griffolyn Reef Industries, Inc.
P.O. Box 750250
Houston,TX 77275-0250
� Toll Free Number 1-800-231-6074
Griffolyn T-55 ASFR
�
J. Locate, identify, and protect mechanical and electrical services passing through reinodeling or
� demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained operational. When services
a , must be interrupted, provide temporary services for the affected areas and notify the
' Owner prior to changeover.
�
" 1.10 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Light,Heat,Power,Etc.:
1. Responsibility for providing temporary electricity, heat and other facilities shall the
responsibility of the Contractor.
k
B. Use of Permanent Building Equipment for Temporary Heating or Cooling:
� 1. Pennanent building equipment shall not be used without written permission from the
� Owner. If this equipment is used for temporary heating or cooling, it shall be adequately
maintained per manufacturer's instructions and protected with filters, strainers, controls,
��" reliefs, etc. The guarantee period shall not start until the equipment is turned over to the
j� Owner far his use.
� C. Refer to AIA Document A 201-1987, Paragraph 9.6.6, 9.9 and 11.3.11.
�w
l.l l PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
�
j� A. Materials and equipment of equivalent qualiry may be substituted for those scheduled ar
identified by name on the drawings if so reviewed by the Engineer and Owner prior to bidding.
� This may be done by submitting to tbe Engineer,at least seven (7)working days prior to the bid
r
date,a letter in triplicate requesting prior review. This submittal shall include all data necessary
for complete evaluation of the substitution and publication in written Addenda.
�
�
�+ BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 -5
`r
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
230000—BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
1.12 MECHANICAL SUBMITTALS �
A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary), Division 1 and AIA
Docuinent A201 (1987) Edition, "SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES". �
B. The inanufacturer's �r�aterial or equipinent listed in the schedule or identified by name on the
� drawings are the types to be provided for the establishment of size, capacity, grade and quality. �
If alternates are used in lieu of the scheduled names, the cost of any changes in construction
required by their use shall be borne by Contractor.
C. All eyuipment shall confonn to the State and/or Local Energy Conservation Standards. "
�
D. Subinittal of shop drawings,product data,and samples will be accepted only when subinitted by
and stamped by the Contractor. Data submitted froin subcontractors and material suppliers �
directly to the Engineer will not be processed unless prior written approval is obtained by the
Contractor.
E. Subinit all submittal items required for each Specification Division partial submittals for �
portions of the Work are indicated on approved subinittal schedule. ��
F. If more than two (2) subinittals (either for shop drawings or for as-built drawings) are made by �
the Contractor, the Owner reserves the right to charge the Contractor for subsequent reviews by �
� their consultants. Such extra fees shall be deducted froin payments by the Owner to the
Contractor. �
G. Before starting Work, prepare and submit to the Engineer all shop drawings and descriptive
equipment data required for the project. Unless each item is identified with specification
section and sufficient data to identify its compliance with the specifications and drawings, the �
item will be returned without action or "Revise and Resubmit". Continue to submit shop
drawings after each Engineer's action, until a "Reviewed" action is received. The Contractor
shall submit the total number of sets as called far in Division 23 to the Engineer for final �
distribution. Submittals shall include the following specified materials and, in addition, any �
materials not listed below but which are specified in the individual sections of Division 23
which follow. �
1. Pipe Markers
2. Process piping
3. Valves,including pressure relief and pressure regulating
4. Thermometers and pressure gauges �
5. Piping specialties,including refrigeration
6. Supports,anchors and seals
7. Expansion compensators �
8. Flexible pipe connectors
9. Insulation, including plastic pipe fitting insulation covers and manufacturer's installation
instructions ,�
10. Air conditioning equipment and specialties
11. Fans, ductwork, dampers,louvers,grilles,registers and diffusers
12. Automatic control systems
H. Wiring diagrams, control panelboards, motor test data, motors, starters and controls for �
electrically operated equipment furnished by mechanical trades.
�
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000-6 �
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
�+^ 230000—BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
�" I. Identify each itein with specification section and sufficient data to certify its compliance with
�, the specifications.
a
1.13 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
r
�w A. All "Requests far Infonnation" submitted by the Contractor shall include a proposed solutio��
� .
and an estimated cost/schedule impact. Any RFI's that do not contain this required infonnation
� d will be sent back to the Contractar unanswered.
P
1.14 MECHANICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare and submit a complete set of Fabrication Drawings showing inajor elements,
components, and systems of inechanical equipinent and inaterials in relationship with other
'° trades, sub-trades and building components as necessary or required. Prepare drawings within
the remodeled area "Model" to an accurate scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger when plotted. Indicate
�" the locations of all equipment and materials, including clearances for installing and maintaining
�, insulation, servicing and maintaining equipment, valve stem inovement, and similar
requirements. Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during
r^ construction.
`` B. Review in detail all floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to
�•
conclusively coordinate with all trades and integrate all installations. Indicate locations where
space is limited,and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the
►� efficient flow of the work,including(but not necessarily limited to) the followin�:
1. Mechanical equipment room layouts;
" 2. Specific equipment installations,including:
r a. Condensing Unit;
b. Air Handling Units;
P 3. Work in pipe spaces,chases,trenches,and tunnels;
4. Exterior wall penetrations;
� 5. Ceiling plenums which contain piping, ductwork, or equipment in congested
� arrangement;
6. Installations in mechanical riser shafts, at typical sections and crucial offsets and
� junctures;
7. Numbered valve location diagrains;
r
�
1.15 PRODUCT LISTING
r
A. Prepare listing of major mechanical equipment and materials for the project, within two (2)
� weeks of signing the Contract Docuinents and transmit to the Mechanical Engineer.
� B. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be of domestic (USA)
iw manufacture and shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in coinmercial practice.
� C. Provide all information requested.
� D. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in Division 1, "PRODUCTS
�, AND SUBSTITUTION".
�
� BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000-7
�.
1
CenturyLink VAIL �
230000—BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
E. When two (2) or more items of saine inaterial ar equipment are required (pumps, valves, air �
conditioning units, etc.) they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer
uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, pipe, tube, fittings (except flanged
and grooved types), sheet metal,wire,steel bar stock,welding rods, solder,fasteners,inotors for �
dissimilar equipment units,and similar items used in work,except as otherwise indicated.
F. Provide products which are coinpatible within systems and other connected items.
�
1.16 NAMEPLATE DATA
�
A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of inechanical equipinent, �,.
indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, efficiency rating (i.e.
EER, etc.) capaciry, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested coinpliances, and ��
similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location. �
1.17 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING �
A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model nuinbers, types, gades,
- compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately �
packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment,storage, and handling.
�
B. Store equipinent and materials at the site,unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect �
stored equipment and materials from damage,dirt,dust and moisture.
�
C. Coordinate deliveries of inechanical materials and equipinent to minimize construction site
congestion. Limit each shipment of inaterials and equipment to the iteins and quantities needed �
far the smooth and efficient flow of installations.
D. Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube, except for concrete, �
corrugated metal, hub-and-spigot, clay pipe. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage and �
handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt,debris, and moisture. �9
E. Protect stored pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof
�
wrapping. When stored inside,do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. ,r�l
F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt by inside starage and enclosure, �
or by packaging with durable,waterproof wrapping.
1.18 RECORD DOCUMENTS �
A. Keep a complete set of record document prints or electronic mark-ups in custody during entire
period of construction at the construction site. �
B. Mark drawing prints to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location both
exterior and interior; including locations of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters, �
boxes, and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations,
dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed
equipment, dunensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves
�
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 -8 �
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
�' 230000—BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
" and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items reyuiring
maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.); RFI's; change
orders; concealed control systein devices. Changes to be noted on the drawings shall include
final location of any piping or ductwork relocated more than 1'-0" from where shown on the
k drawings.
�, C. Mark Equipment Schedules on the drawings with changes to Manufacturer,Model Number,and
data based on reviewed shop drawings.
i.
D. At the completion of the project, inark all valve tag numbers on the drawings and turn these
� drawings over to the General Contractor far his submission to the Engineer. This Contract will
� not be considered completed until these record drawings have been received and reviewed by
the Engineer.
r
�` 1.19 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
� A. No later than four (4) weeks prior to the completion of the project, make-up minimum of four
v (4) electronic disk sets copies and one hard copy of Operating and Maintenance Manuals, as
specified in sections of Division 1.
r
B. The Testing and Balancing Report shall be submitted and received by the Engineer at least five
� (5)calendar days prior to the Contractor's request for final observation tiine fraine requirements.
�, Fina] Observation(s) will not proceed without T&B Report. Include in the O&M Manual after
review with "Review" or"Make Corrections Noted"has been accomplished.
�
C. In addition to the infonnation required above for inaintenance data, include the following
r
infonnation:
�, 1. Description of inechanical equipment, function, normal operating characteristics and
limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature
P and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.
�
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and
normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and einergency
r instructions; and suimner and winter operating instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;
a disasseinbly,repair,and reasseinbly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
� 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
" 5. Manufacturer's service inanuals for all mechanical equipment provided under this
� Contract.
6. Include the valve tag list.
�° 7. Name, Address and Telephone Number of party to be contacted for twenty-four(24)hour
� service for each item of equipment.
8. Starting, stoppin�, lubrication, equipment identification numbers and adjustment clearly
�, indicated for each piece of equipment.
' 9. Complete parts list.
�" 10. Mechanical warranties.
�'" D. This Contract will not be considered completed, nor will final payment be made, until all
�,� specified material, including Testing and Balancing Report, is received in this Operating and
Maintenance Report and the manual is reviewed by the Engineer.
�,
�
� BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000-9
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
230000—BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
1.20 LUBRICATION OF EQUIPMENT �
A. Contractor shall properly lubricate all mechanical pieces of equipment which he provided
before turning the building over to the Owner. He shall attach a linen tag or heavy duty "°
shipping tag on the piece of equipinent showing the date of lubrication and the type and brand �
of lubricant used.
B. Furnish the Engineer with a typewritten list in quadruplicate,of each item lubricated and type of �
lubricant used, no later than two (2) weeks before coinpletion of the project, or at tiine of
acceptance by the Owner of a portion of the building and the mechanical systems involved.
�
1.21 DEMOLITION
A. During the demolition phase of this Contract, it is the responsibility of this Contractor to �
carefully remove existing equipment, piping or ductwork and related items either as shown on
the demolition drawings as being removed, or as required for the work. These items shall be
tagged, protected from damage, and stored as directed by the Architect. A list of all items �
stored shall be turned over to the Architect. At the completion of the remodeling work or when
directed by the Architect, all stored iteins not reused or wanted by the Owner shall be removed
froin the premises. Disposition of items not reused is by the direction of the Engineer. �
B. The location of existing equipment, pipes, ductwork, etc., shown on the drawings has been
taken from existing drawings and is,therefore,only as accurate as that information. All existing �
conditions shall be verified from field measurements with necessary adjustment being inade to
the drawing information.
C. If asbestos inaterial, in any form, is discovered by this Contractor in the process of his work,he �
shall report such occurrence to the Owner iinmediately. The Owner will detennine the action to �
be taken for the asbestos removal, which is not a part of the work to be done under this
Division. «»
rr�
1.22 WARRANTIES
A. Refer to AIA Docu�nent A201 (1987) Edition, "WARRANTY", "PERFORMANCE BOND �
AND PAYMENT BOND" for procedures and subinittal requirements for warranties. Refer to
individual equipment specifications for warranry requirements. In any case, the entire '�
inechanical system shall be warranted no less than one (1) year from the time of acceptance by _
the Owner.
B. Coinpile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 23, into the Operating and �
Maintenance Manuals.
�
C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipinent to �
include date or beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty ar bond; and names,
addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty
services. �
�
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 10 �
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
�' 230000—BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
� 123 CLEANING
a
A. Refer to AIA Docuinent A201 (1987)Edition, "CLEANING UP".�
r
B. Refer to Division 23, "TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING" for requirements for
� cleaning filters, strainers,and mechanical systems prior to final acceptance.
r
v 124 SAFETY
^ A. CenturyLink Cominunications, General Conditions of Contract for Construction of Buildings,
,, 7813 (8-79), "SAFETY PRECAUTIONS". The following paragraphs supplement the
requireinents in Division 1 CenturyLink Communications.
�
� B. This Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect all persons from injury resulting
`' from the work being performed by him. Build all necessary barricades, dust proof partitions,
rubber inats and provide warning signs to the complete satisfaction of the Owner.
� C. At no tiine shall any part of the Work be left in an unsafe condition where it could fail or
otherwise cause injury to an Employee or Owner's equipment.
r
�
D. In the event this Contractor is doing any welding in an occupied area, he shall erect all
necessary barricades to prevent the flash from being seen by unprotected persons.
F�
E. Provide one (1) 10 lb. CO2 fire extinguisher at each location where welding or gas cutting is
�^ being performed. Before any welding is performed, this Contractor shall observe all conditions
set forth by Owner,including the issuing of a pennit,etc.
r
u
END OF SECTION 230000
r
�
'
,
1
'
'
�
� BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000- 1 1
r
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 230100—M&E COORDINATION HVAC UPGRADE
r
,, SECTION 230100 -M&E COORDINATION
.
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
P 1.1 SUMMARY
�
A. Carefully coordinate the interface between Division 23 (Mechanical) and Division 26
r (Electrical)before submitting any equipinent far review or commencing installation.
�' B. Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, all motor and controls for Division 23 equipment
� shall be furnished,set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule:
` COORDINATION SCHEDULE
ITEM Furnished Set in Place Power Control
� Under Under Wiring Wiring
,_ Under Under
n
Equipment Motor 23 23 26 --
�
Automatically Controlled Starters/Contactors:
Separate 23 26 26 23
�
Factory Mounted and Wired 23 23 26 23
�� Manually Controlled Starter/Contactors:
'' Separate 23 26 26 23
�� Factory Mounted and Wired 23 23 26 23
r, Special Duty Type Motor(Part Winding,etc.) 23 26 26 23
� Disconnect Switches (Note 1) 26 26 26 --
�
Variable Frequency Drives 23 26 26 23
�
Contactors 26 26 26 --
Thermal Overload Switches(Note 1) 26 26 26 --
� Manual Operating Switches(Note 2) 26 26 26 --
�`' Control Relays (Note 2) 23 23 26 23
�° Control Transformers 23 23 26 23
��� Control Circuit Outlets 26 26 26 --
�,_,
Thermostats(Note 2) 23 23 -- 23
� Push Button Stations,Pilot Lights (Note 2) 23 23 26 23
Thennostat and Controls Integral with Equipment 23 23 26 23
!� ar Directly Attached to Ducts,Pipes,etc. (Note 2)
�� Equipment in Temperature Control Panels(Note 2) 23 23 26 23
�� Standalone Control Panels (Note 2) 23 23 26 23
4�
.• M&E COORDINATION 230100- 1
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
230100—M&E COORDINATION HVAC UPGRADE
COORDINATION SCHEDULE �
ITEM Furnished Set in Place Power Control
Under Under Wiring Wiring �
Under Under
Valve Motors Damper Motors, Solenoid Valves,etc. 23 23 -- 23
(Note 2) �
EP Valves or Switches,P.E. Switches,etc. (Note 2) 23 23 26 23
Fire Alarm System 26 26 26 26 �
Smoke Detectors Including Relays for Fan Control 26 23 26 23
(Note 3)
Fire/Smoke Dainpers 23 23 26 26 �
Notes:
(1) If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, furnish and set in place under Division 23, wiring �
and connections under Division 26.
�
(2) If float switches,line thermostats,P.E, switches,tiine switches,or other controls carry the FULL
LOAD CURRENT to any inotor,they shall be furnished and set in place under Division 23,but they �`
shall be connected under Division 26. If they do not carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any
�
motor, they shall be furnished,set in place and wired under Division 23.
�
(3) Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by Division 26; all control function wiring by Division
23. Division 23 to coordinate locations with Division 26. �
C. Control Wiring: �
1. Consists of wiring in pilot circuits of contactors, starters, sensors, controllers, and relays,
and wiring for valve and damper operators.
D. Connections: ��
L Make connections to all controls directly attached to ducts, piping and inechanical ,�i
eyuipment with flexible connections.
E. Starters: �
1. Provide magnetic starters for all three phase motors and equipment complete with:
a. Control transformers. ,�
b. 120V holding coils.
c. Integral hand-off auto switch.
d. Auxiliary contacts required for systein operation plus one(1) spare.
F. Remote Switches and Pushbutton Stations: ,,
l. Provide all reinote switches and/or pushbutton stations required for manually operated
equipment (if no automatic controls have been provided) complete with pilot lights of an �
approved type lighted by current from load side of starter.
G. Special Requirement: �
�,
M&E COORDINATION 230100-2 �
�
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL
�' 230100—M&E COORDINATION HVAC UPGRADE
� 1. Motar, starters and other electrical equipment installed in moist areas or areas of special
conditions, such as explosion proof, shall be designed and approved for installation in
such areas with appropriate enclosure.
H. Identification:
� � 1. Provide identification of purpose for each switch and/or pushbutton station furnished.
„ Identification inay be either engraved plastic sign or permanent inounting to wall below
� switch, or stamping on switch cover proper. All such identification signs and/or switch
" covers in finished areas shall match other hardware in the immediate area.
� �
L Control Voltage:
1. Maximum allowable control voltage is 120V. Fully protect control circuit conductors in
accordance with National Electrical Code.
2. Fully coordinate the requirements of each division with regard to supplying a complete
DDC Control System. J-Boxes and control transformer connections shall be provided
� under Division 26. The transfonners shall be furnished and set in place under Div. 23.
w PART2 -PRODUCTS
a
� 2.1 MOTOR HORSEPOWER
,� A. In general, all motors 3/4 HP and above shall be three phase, all motors less than 3/4 HP shall
be single phase.
L
B. Voltage and phase of inotars as scheduled on the electrical drawings shall take precedence in
" the case of a conflict between the mechanical and electrical drawings or general conditions 2.1
,, A.,above.
M C. Work under Division 23 includes coordinating the electrical requirements of all inechanical
equipment with the requireinents of the work under Division 26,before ordering the equipment.
` l. If motor horsepowers are changed under the work of Division 23, without a change in
�
duty of the motor's driven device, coordination of additional electrical work (if any) and
additional payment for the work (if any) shall be provided under the section of Division
a 23 iniriaring the change. Increases or decreases in motor horsepower from that specified
shall not be made without written approval froin the Architect.
r
�.
PART 3 -EXECUTION-Not used.
�
�' END OF SECTION 230100
�
'
�
� M&E COORDINATION 230100 -3
�
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
�' 230500—COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC HVAC UPGRADE
�
SECTION 230500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PARTI -GENERAL
Y
� 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
� b
� A. Extent of Piping Specialties Wark required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules and by requirements of this section.
W
B. Types of Piping Specialties specified in this section include the following:
�,, 1. Escutcheons
2. Mechanical Sleeve Seal
�' 3. Fire and Smoke Barrier Penetration Seal
4. Drip Pan
� 5. Pipe Sleeve
� 6. Sleeve Seals
r C. Piping Specialties furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of
� equipinent assembly in other Division 23 sections.
Y
rr
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�,
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of piping specialties of
� types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
� less than five(5)years.
e. B. Codes and Standards:
1. ASME B 31.9"Building Services Piping" for materials,products, and installation.
� 2. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
3. Fabricate and stainp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME Boiler
� and Pressure Vessel Code,Section VIII,Division L
� 4. ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualification" for qualifications for welding processes and operators.
�
`` 1.3 SUBMITTALS
p
A. Product Data: Subinit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions,
� and dimensioned drawings for each type of manufactured piping specialty. Submit schedule
showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required piping
'"� specialry.
�
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabricated specialties, indicating details of fabrication, materials,
A• and method of support.
� C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of manufactured
piping specialty. Include this data,product data, and shop drawings in inaintenance inanual; in
� accordance with requirements of Divisions 23.
�
r COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500- 1
I�
�
� CenturyLink VAIL �
230500—COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC HVAC UPGRADE
PART2 -PRODUCTS �
2.1 MANUFACTURERS �
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with reyuirements, provide products by one of the
following: �
1. Pipe Escutcheons:
a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.
b. Producers Specialty&Mfg. Corp.
c. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. �
2. Mechanical Sleeve Seal: �
a. Thunderline Corp.
b. "Metraseal"by Metraflex Co. �
3. Fire and Smoke Barrier Penetration Seal:
a. Electrical Products Division/3M
b. Dow Corning
�IA
c. Flame Stop,Inc.
d. MetaCaulk -�
e. Hilti
�
�
2.2 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe �
outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter
of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, ar ceilings; and pipe
sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel ar chroine finish far occupied ��
areas,prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. �
B. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floars, and areas where water and �`
condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, �
solid or split hinged.
C. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons,solid ar split hinged. �
2.3 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS "�
A. General: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to
continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure
plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened,providing watertight seal
and electrical insulation. ""�
�
,
�
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-2 �
_
�
r
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 230500—COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC HVAC UPGRADE
� 2.4 FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER PENETRATION SEALS
r
A. General: Provide UL listed products for sealing all openings through fire or fire/sinoke rated
� walls, floars, or ceilings used as passage for mechanical piping.
c
�
r
2.5 FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES
� A. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion-resistant sheet metal with watertight
joints, and with edges turned up 2-1/2 inch, and with double sloped to drain bottoin. Reinforce
'' top, either by structural angles or by rolling top over 1/4-inch steel rod. Provide hole, gasket,
� � and flange at low point for watertight joint and 1-inch drain line connection. Provide drip pan
overflow sensars/alarms or visual overflow piping in compliance with IMC.
�
� B. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one(1)of the following:
w 1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate froin galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock
joint, welded spiral seains, ar welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following
p gauges: 3-inch and smaller,20 gauge; 4-inch to 6-inch, 16 gauge; over 6-inch, 14 gauge.
e 2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.
3. Iron Pipe: Fabricate froin cast iron or ductile iron pipe;remove burrs.
�
' C. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in
� exterior walls,of one(1)of the following:
� 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Installed between sleeve and pipe.
4.
�.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
r
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
r�
A. Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on eacb pipe penetration through floors, walls,
`' partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building.
Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with
+ adjoining surface.
r
B. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe with bolts and pressure
� plates located under each bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until
�
links have expanded to form watertight seal.
� C. Fire ar Fire/Sinoke Barrier Penetration Seals: Where pipe penetration occurs in fire or
fire/smoke rated walls,provide the following:
� 1. Fill the entire length of the opening with sealing compound. Adhere to manufacturer's
installation instructions.
�£ 2. Cracks, Voids, or Holes Up to 4-Inch Diameter: Use putty or caulking, one-piece
�, intumescent elastomer, non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets,
and capable of expanding ten(10)times when exposed to flame or heat,UL-listed.
�� 3. Openings 4-Inch or Greater: Use sealing system capable of passing three (3) hour fire
� test in accordance with ASTM E-814, consisting of wall wrap or liner,partitions,and end
caps capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350 degree F,
� UL-listed.
�
�°� COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-3
k.
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
230500—COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC HVAC UPGRADE
D. Where pipe penetrations occur in non-fire rated floors, roof slabs, or walls, the space between �
pipe insert and the sleeve shall be packed on each end with mineral wool or other non-
combustible material,posirively fastened in place.
E. Provide dielecri-ic waterways or insulating flanges, as required by pipe size, on all connections �
of dissiinilar metals.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES �
A. Drip Pans: Locate drip pans under piping as indicated. Hang from structure with rods and �
building attachments, weld rods to sides of drip pan. Brace to prevent sagging or swaying.
Connect 1-inch drain line to drain connection,and run to nearest plumbing drain or elsewhere as
indicated. �
B. Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floars,
ceilings, and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as
detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Install sleeves accurately centered �
on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insert will have free movement in sleeve,
including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than two (2) pipe sizes larger than
piping run. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish �1
flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves in rooms 3/4-inch above floor finish �;
sloped to drain and 4-inch above finished floor in all Mechanical Equipment Rooms and pipe
chases. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work „�
around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from �
entering sleeves.
1. Install sheet metal sleeves at interior partitions and ceilings other than suspended ceilings.
2. Install iron pipe sleeves at exterior penetrations; both above and below grade. �
3. Install steel pipe sleeves except as otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following: �
1. Fire and Smoke Penetration Seal: Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe
�,:
with an approved fire and smoke penetration seal inaterial on both sides.
�
END OF SECTION 230500 �
�
'
,
1
�
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 -4 �
'
�°
CenturyLink VAIL
�� 230513—MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT HVAC UPGRADE
r
�,, SECTION 230513—MECHBLEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
P
PART 1 -GENERAL
w
� 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
W
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for Electrical Components for Mechanical
f• Equipment These components include, but are not limited to, motors, starters, and disconnect
�
switches for inechanical equipment.
�, B. Wiring of field-mounted switches and siinilar mechanical-electrical devices provided for
mechanical systems,to equipment control panels.
�
C. Specific electrical requireinents (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical
" equipinent are scheduled on the Electrical Drawings. In case of conflict, Electrical Drawings
w shall take precedence. Do not purchase motors or electrical equipment until power
characteristics available at building site location have been confinned by Contractor.
�
�
D. Refer to Table in Section 230100 for Mechanical/Electrical Coordination.
" 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
a
A. Manufacturers: Finns regularly engaged in manufacture of motors, inotor starters and drives of
r types, ratings and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
� similar service for not less than five(5)years.
� B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3)years of successful installation experience
on projects utilizing electric motors,motor starters,capacitors and drives similar to that required
� for this project.
� C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 70E, "Standard for
� Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces."
� D. UL Compliance: Provide equipment and/or components which are UL-listed and labeled.
�' E. Standards:
1. NEMA Standards MG L• Motors and Generators.
� 2. NEMA Standard ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices,Controllers,and Assemblies.
�- 3. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures far Electrical Equipment.
4. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches.
5. Coinply with National Electrical Code(NFPA 70).
�.
F. Coordination with Electrical Work: Wherever possible, match elements of electrical provisions
� of Mechanical Work with similar elements of Electrical Work specified in Division 26 sections.
Comply with applicable requirements of Division 26 sections for Electrical Work of this section
r' which are not otherwise specified.
�_
v�
MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 2305]3 - 1
r
Y�.
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
230513—MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT HVAC UPGRADE
1.3 SUBMITTALS �
A. Listing, Motors of Mechanical Work: Concurrently, with submittal of inechanical products
listing, submit separate listing showing raring, power characteristics, efficiencies, power �
factors, application and general location of every motor to be provided with mechanical work.
Subinit updated infonnation promptly when and if initial data is revised.
L Include in listing of motors, notations of whether motor starter is furnished or installed �
integrally with motor or equipment containing inotor.
2. Use Mechanical/Electrical Coordination Schedule on Drawings as format for submittal.
PART2 -PRODUCTS �
2.1 MANUFACTURERS �
� A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following �
inanufacturers for each type of product:
1. Motors: +�
a. Century/MagneTek
b. Baldor �"'
c. U.S. Motor �
d. Reliance
e. Siemens-Allis �
£ General Electric
g. Louis Allis
�
2.2 MOTORS
A. The following are basic requireinents for simple or common inotors. Far special motors, more
detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications. �
1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads with
a time limit acceptable to the inotor manufacturer. Motors shall be capable of starting the �
driven equipinent while operating at 90 percent rated tenninal voltage.
2. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motar to
operate in the service factor range.
3. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 degree C envirorunent with maximum 80 degree C �
temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class B Insulation). Provide Class F
insulation for variable frequency drive inotors.
4. Starting Capability: Frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system, and ��
not less than five (5)evenly time spaced starts per hour for inanually controlled motors.
5. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
6. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design �
"B",except "C" where required for high starting torque. Design"E" shall not be used.
a. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; Use driven equipment manufacturer's
standards to suit specific application.
b. Bearings: �
1) Ball bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
2) Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally
inaccessible for regular maintenance. �
MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 230513 -2
�
1
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 230513—MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT HVAC UPGRADE
�' 3) Bearings shall be rated for minimum L-10 life of 40,000 hours.
� 4) Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce
lateral ar axial thrust in motor.
5) For fractional horsepower, light dury motors, sleeve type bearings are
� permitted.
c. Enclosure Type:
� �, 1) Open drip-proof inotors for indoor use where satisfactarily housed or
remotely located during operation.
� 2) Guarded drip-proof inotors where exposed to contact by employees or
building occupants.
� d. Noise Rating: "Quiet".
�_ e. Efficiency: "Energy Efficient" motors shall have a ininimuin efficiency as
scheduled in Table 1 in accardance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. If
r- efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average
� standard industry motors",in accordance with IEEE Standard 1 l 2,Test Method B.
Y.
" TABLE 1*
� HP 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM* MINIMLTM
EFFICIENCY EFFICIENCY EFFICIENCY POWER
� FACTOR
w 5 85.5 89.5 87.5 85.0
+� 7-1/2 86.5 91.0 89.5 85.0
a 10 87.5 91.0 90.2 85.0
A 15 89.5 91.7 91.0 85.0
� 20 90.2 92.0 91.7 85.0
25 90.2 92.5 92.4 85.0
�
* Efficiency and power factors inay vary from above values for inulti-speed
� motors and/or special hermetic motors packaged with equipment. For these
special applications, motors shall be high-efficiency type and are subject to
�" review by the Engineer.
�
f. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer,rarings,characteristics,
� construction,special features and similar information.
�, 7. Phases and Current Characteristics: Unless indicated otherwise, provide squirrel-cage
induction polyphase inotors for 3/4 HP and larger, and provide capacitor-start single-
� phase motors for 1/2 HP and smaller, except 1/6 HP and smaller may, at equipment
inanufacturer's option,be split-phase type. Coordinate current characteristics with power
�` specified in Division 26 sections. Do not purchase motors until power characteristics
available at building site have been confirmed by Contractor.
� 8. The Contractor shall be responsible for all additional electrical and other costs involved
�� to accommodate any motors which differ from the scheduled horsepower sizes or correct
any motor which does not meet the listed duty or efficiency as called for in Mechanical or
�'" Electrical Plans and Specifications.
j� 9. Motors shall be of the same manufacturer, except those that are an integral part of a
factory assembled packaged unit. These motors shall likewise meet the conditions of the
�,
��
MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 230513 -3
�.
i�.
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
230513—MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT HVAC UPGRADE
specification in this section except inotors which are part of a motar/coinpressor �
assembly are exempted from this requirement.
10. All equipment specified to operate with Variable Frequency Drives shall be provided
with invertar-duty motors specifically designed for variable speed operation with high �
efficiency at part load conditions and constructed with Class F insulation.
11. All motors which will be operated by a Variable Frequency Drive shall be warranted
against any damage or defects as a result of being used with a variable frequency drive. �
VFD driven motors shall have three(3)year warranties.
2.3 STARTERS �
A. Motor Starters: Refer to Section 230514.
2.4 DISCONNECT SWITCHES �
A. See Division 26 for requirements. �
2.5 DRIVES �
A. V-Belt Drives:
L Capacity of V-Belt Drives at rated RPM shall be not less than 150 percent of motor
nameplate horsepower rating. �
2. V-Belt Drive combinations shall be limited to A, B, C and fractiona] horsepower belts.
3V, SV and 8V belts and sheaves shall not be used.
3. All fixed pitch sheaves, including single groove fan sheaves, shall be of the bushed type. '"'�
Fixed bore sheaves will not be acceptable for adjustable pitch sheaves.
4. Unit manufacturer shall provide OSHA approved belt guard with tachometer holes.
5. For equipment serving critical systeins, all fans shall have a minimum of two (2) groove
sheaves and fan belts. �
2.6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES �
A. Refer to Section 230515.
�
2.7 EQUIPMENT FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate mechanical equipinent for secure mounting of motors and other electrical
items included in work. Provide either permanent alignment of motors with equipment, or ��'
adjustable mountings as applicable for belt drives, special couplings and similar�indirect
coupling of equipment. Provide safe, secure, durable, and removable guards for motor drives, �
arranged for lubrication and similar running-maintenance without removal of guards.
�
, �
MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 230513 -4
�
I
'
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
230513—MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT HVAC UPGRADE
F PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
!� 3.1 TEST AND TEST DATA
r
L
A. A factory load test shall be perfonned on each motor of 1,000 watt input or greater to assure
�. compliance with the energy-efficiency section of this specification.
f
� B. Typical test data on every motor to be used on this project shall be made available upon request.
P
�, 3.2 INSTALLATION
� A. Install motors on motar mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's
instructions, securely anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces inherent
� in mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with keys and Allen
set screws, except motors of 1/3 HP and less may be secured with Allen set screws on flat
� surface of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated, set motor shafts parallel with machine shafts.
G
B. Deliver starters and wiring devices which have not been factary-installed on equipment unit to
� � electrical installer far installation.
� C. Install power and control connections far inotors to comply with NEC and applicable provisions
�, of Division 26 sections. Install grounding except where non-grounded isolation of motor is
indicated.
W
� 3.3 INSTALLATION COORDINATION
k
A. Furnish equipment requiring electrical connections to operate properly and to deliver full
r capacity at electrical service available.
� B. All control wiring to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be
r
color-coded and individually numbered to facilitate checking.
� C. Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment inotors and controls shall be furnished,
set in place, and wired in accordance with the schedule contained in Division 23. The exact
�` furnishing and installation of the equipment is left to the Contractors involved. Contractor
y should note that the intent of the schedule is to have the Division 23 and 26 Contractors
responsible for coordinating all control wiring as outlined,whether or not specifically called for
�, by the Mechanical or Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Coinply with the applicable
requirements of Division 26 for all electrical work which is not otherwise specified. No extras
�` will be allowed for Contractor's failure to provide far these required items. The Contractor shall
refer to the Division 26 and Division 23 specifications and plans for all power and control
�" wiring and shall advise the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies prior to bidding.
k
� END OF SECTION 230513
�
MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 234513 -5
�
�
'
�*
CenturyLink VAIL
� 230529—SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS HVAC UPGRADE
�
�. SECTION 230529- SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
�
�
PART 1 -GENERAL
� 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
�
A. Extent of Supports and Anchors required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or
I� specified in other Division 23 sections.
� B. Types of Supparts and Anchars specified in this section include the following:
�, 1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports
2. Vertical-Piping Clamps
� 3. Hanger-Rod Attachments
4. Building Attachments �
� 5. Saddles and Shields
i, 6. Miscellaneous Materials
7. Anchors
r 8. Equipment Supports
` C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of
�, equipinent assembly in other Division 23 sections.
�
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
r
� A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and
anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
� service for not less than five (5)years.
�' B. Codes and Standards:
1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable Mechanical Codes pertaining to
" product materials and installation of supports and anchors.
�, 2. Duct Hangers: SMACNA Duct Manuals.
3. MSS Standard Compliance:
� a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture
� comply with MSS SP-58.
w,
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Y�
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions
!� for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing
�y, manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and
support.
n
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support
� and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and inethods of asseinbly of
P
components.
4
A SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529- 1
�.
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
230529—SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS HVAC UPGRADE
C. Product certificates signed by the inanufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that their �
products meet the specified requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit inaintenance data and parts]ist for each type of suppart and anchor. �
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance inanual; in accordance with
requirements of Division L ��
�
PART 2 -PRODUCTS rr
2.1 MANUFACTURERS �
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the �
following:
1. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
a. B-Line Systems Inc.
b. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. �
c. Fee& Mason Mfg. Co.; Division Figgie International
d. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
e. Elcen Metal Products Coinpany �
£ Michigan Hanger Company
g. Unistrut Metal Framing Systems
h. Hilti USA. �
i. Advanced Thennal Systems
j. Anvil
2. Saddles and Shields:
a. B-Line Systeins, Inc. �
b. Pipe Shields, Inc.
c. Insulation Pipe Supports Manufacturing
d. Insulated Saddle Shield Insert Product Inc. �II
e. Michigan Hanger Company
£ Component Products Co. �
g. Value Engineered Products,Inc. �„
h. Snappitz Pipe Inserts by Mechanical Pipe Shields, Inc. �
i. Anvil
3. Concrete Inserts and Anchors:
a. Phillips Drill Company �
b. Michigan Hanger Company
c. Elcen Metal Products Company
d. Ramset/Red Head �
e. Hilti USA.
£ Star fasteners �
g. B-Line
.i
2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers and support coinponents shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and �
manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58.
',�
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529-2 �
�
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 230529—SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS HVAC UPGRADE
�' 1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that
�,, will not have field-applied finish.
2. Pipe attachments shall have nomnetallic coating for electrolytic protection where
� attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
�" B. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1
1. Steel Pipe, size 3/8-inch thru 12-inch,B-Line B3100
� 2. Copper Pipe,size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch, B-Line B3104CT
C. Adjustable Swivel Ring: MSS Type 10
I�"' 1. Steel Pipe,size U2-inch thru 2-inch,B-Line B3170NF
� 2. Copper Pipe,size 1/2-inch thru 2-inch,B-Line B3170CT
,�e D. Standard Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 8
� 1. Steel Pipe, size 3/4-inch thru 20-inch,B-Line B3373
�' 2. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch,B-Line B3773CT
� E. Floor Stand Pipe Saddle Support: MSS Type 37
�_ 1. Steel Pipe, size 1 1/2-inch thru 12-inch, B-Line B3095
r�� F. Hanger Rods: Continuous threaded steel, sizes as specified.
i G. Pipe Alignment Guides:
� 1. Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting
� of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider bolted tight
� to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide
guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.
�'' a. Steel Pipe,B-Line B3281 through B3287
i�
H. Pipe Expansion Anchors
� 1. Steel Pipe: Metraflex Company PA-1
2. Steel Pipe: Field assembled expansion anchors require submitted shop drawings for
�` review by Mechanical and Structural Engineers.
!�
ir 2.3 UPPER ATTACHMENTS
�° A. Beam Clainps
� 1. All thread rod sized 3/8-inch and 1/2-inch: B-Line B3034
2. All thread rod sizes 5/8-inch: B-Line B3033
�. 3. All thread rod sizes 3/4-inch and up: B-Line B3055
w
2.4 CONCRETE INSERTS AND ANCHORS
�"
�, A. Inserts: Case shall be of galvanized carbon steel with square threaded concrete insert nut for
hanger rod connection; 3/4-inch lateral adjustment; top lugs for reinforcing rods, nail holes for
p� attaching to forms. Michigan Hanger Models 355 and 355N or equal Unistrut or Elcen. This
�
type of upper attachment is to be used for all areas having poured in place concrete
construction.
�°
�
r� SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529-3
�
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
230529—SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS HVAC UPGRADE
B. Anchors: Carbon steel,zinc plated. Installation shall be in holes drilled with carbide-tipped drill �
� bits or by use of self-drilling anchors.
l. Provide anchors suitable far the location of installation and designed to withstand all
forces and movements acting in the anchor. Manufacture pipe anchors in accordance
with MSS SP 58. Provide a safety factor of four(4)for the anchar installation. �
2. Powder driven fasteners subject to approval of Structural Engineer. Each fastener shall be
capable of holding a test load of 1,000 pounds whereas the actual load shall not exceed ��
50 pounds.
3. Self drilling expansion shields. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the proof
test load reyuired.
4. Machine bolt expansion anchor. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the proof "�
test load required. ,
._
2.5 SADDLES AND THERMAL SHIELD INSERTS �
A. General: Provide saddles under all insulated piping hangers and thermal shield inserts on all
piping through floors,wall and roof construction penetrations. Size saddles and shields for exact �
fit to mate with pipe insulation ar a minimum of]-inch thick for uninsulated pipe thermal shield
inserts.
�
B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching �
�
adjoining insulation. For use with roller Hangers.
1. B-Line B3160 to B3165 ,�,
C. Galvanized Steel Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to �
prevent crushing of insulation. (Considering weight,use, temperature).
D. Thennal Shield Inserts: Provide 100-psi average compressive strength, waterproof, asbestos �
free calcium silicate, encased with a sheet metal enclosure. Insert and shield shall cover the
entire circumference on vertical pipes, or the bottom half circumference of the pipe on �
horizontal mounting supports, and shall be of length recommended by the manufacturer for pipe
size and thickness of insulation or the thickness of the wall,roof or floor construction.
E. Thermal Mechanical Pipe Shields: Self-locking insulated pipe supports/shields shall be �
provided at hanger, support, and guide locations on pipe requiring insulation. The insert shall �
consist of either hydrous calciuin silicate or polyisocyanurate foain insulation (urethane)
encircling the entire circumference of the pipe. Provide with a 360 degree PVC or Galvanized �
steel jacket which coinplies with the International Mechanical Code for installation in plenum
ceilings where applicable. The length of the jacket shall be sized for pipe expansion.
�
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS `'�
A. Steel Plates, Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36. �
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly
graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts �
sand,by volume,with ininimum amount of water required far placement and hydration.
I �
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529-4 �
�
�"
CenturyLink VAIL
� 230529—SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS HVAC UPGRADE
!� C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel
�r., in accordance with AWS Standards.
� D. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel,
� consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider bolted
tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide
�, guides of length recoinmended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.
r
PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
�
3.1 1NSPECTION
�
� A. Examine areas and conditions under which supparts and anchors are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
A
4
3.2 PREPARATION
r
A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supparts and anchars only after required building
� structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct
�, inadequacies including (but not liinited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other
building structural attachinents.
�.
B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at
" Engineer's Office with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection
� and testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination with
work of this section and Architect/Engineer for purpose of reviewing material selections and
�� procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified.
�
Provide Shop Drawing showing method and support locations from structure.
p 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
r
� A. Install building attachments within concrete or on structural steel. Space attachinents within
�r maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69 and tables this section. Install additional
�.
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints,
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
� insert to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2,500 psi is indicated,
install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
�
B. Existing Construction:
�" 1. In existing concrete construction, drill into concrete slab and insert and tighten expansion
�. anchor bolt. Connect anchor bolt to hanger rod. Care must be taken in existing concrete
construction not to sever reinfarcement rods or tension wires.
�^
�
�
� SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529-5
�
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
230529—SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS HVAC UPGRADE
3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS �
A. lnstall hangers, supports, clainps and attachinents to support piping properly froin building
structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal piping to be supported together on field fabricated,heavy-duty trapeze hangers where �
possible. Install supports with maximum spacings coinplying with MSS SP-69 and tables this
� section. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers �
for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire
or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and "�
other accessories.
C. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are �^�
copper plated, ar by other recognized industry methods. �
D. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedoin
of movement between pipe anchors, to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, �
expansion bends and similar units and within 1'-0" of each horizontal elbow.
E. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and "'�11
stresses froin moveinent will not be transinitted to connected equipment.
F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not
exceeded. ''�
G. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements: �
1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting
through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31.
2. Saddles: Install Protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier �
is indicated. Fill interior voids with seginents of insulation that match adjoining pipe
insularion. � �
3. Thennal Shield Inserts: lnstall thermal shield inserts MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled �„:
water piping that has vapor barrier. Thermal shield inserts shall span an arc of 360
degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following: "�
NPS Length Thickness �
1/4 thru 3-1/2 12 0.048
4 12 0.060 �
5 and 6 18 0.060
8 thru 14 24 0.075
16 thru 24 24 0.105 ��
4. Pipes 8-inches and larger shall have wood inserts.
5. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield. �
6. Thennal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as
piping.
�
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529-6 �
i
'
r
CenturyLink VAIL
� 230529—SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS HVAC UPGRADE
�`� H. Install refrigerant, steam and hydronic piping (copper and steel) hangers with the following
�, minimum rod sizes and maximum spacin :
Type K, L, M Copper Pipe
I�
` Maximum Maximum Minimum
V.
Hanger Vertical Rod Size
� Pipe Size Spacing(ft.) Spacing(ft.) (in.)
� 1/2" 5 10 3/8
3/4" 5 10 3/8
�
1" 6 10 3/8
�
1-1/4" 6 l0 3/8
"" 1-1/2" 8 10 3/8
'` 2" 8 10 3/8
� 2-1/2" 9 10 1/2
b 3" 10 10 1/2
�
4" 10 10 1/2
�
5" 10 10 1/2
6" 10 10 5/8
" Based on MSS-69& IMC.
L
* I. Support vertical runs at each floor.
�.
J. Provide copper or copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping or provide sheet lead
� packing between hanger or support and piping.
�� K. Place a hanger within 1-foot(0.305 in) of each horizontal elbow.
�' L. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) ininimum after piping is
�,_ erected.Provide and tighten tap locking nut on each hanger.
�� M. Support vertical steel and copper piping at every story height but at not more than 15-foot
� intervals far steel and 10-feet for copper.
�°
N. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at saine elevation,provide trapeze hangers.
�w O. Where practical,support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
� P. Each pipe drop to equipment shall be adequately supported. All supporting lugs or guides shall
` be securely anchored to the building structure.
�,„ Q. Install all couplings with torque wrench, torqued to inch-pounds as specified by the
manufacturer.
i�
R. Hang all insulated pipe at the point of support in the following manner:
�` 1. Hanger: See Paragraph 2. 3 B.
�
r SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529-7
�
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
230529—SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS HVAC UPGRADE
2. All insulated pipes (>_ 2"d) shall have thennal shield insert at all support points. All �
piping shall have thennal shield inserts at each penetration through wall,floor and roof.
3. Clevis Hangers: Install 180-degree waterproof, asbestos free, calcium silicate thermal
shield insert with 180 degree galvanized steel protection shield. �
4. Trapeze Hangers Utilizing Unistrut Clamps or U-Bolts: Provide 360 degree waterproof,
asbestos free, calcium silicate thennal shield insert with 360 degree steel protection
saddle. �
5. All hangers shall be properly sized to accommodate the thennal shield insert and no
hanger shall penetrate or crush any of the insulating material.
S. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with inanufacturer's recoinmendations and the �
following:
1. In the event a self-drilling expansion shield or machine bolt expansion shield is
considered to have been installed improperly, the Contractor shall make an acceptable �
replacement or demonstrate the stability of the anchor by perfonning an on-site test under
which the anchar will be subjected to a load equal to twice the actual load.
2. Powder-driven fasteners may be used only where they will be concealed after the �
construction is complete. Where an occasiona] fastener appears to be improperly
installed, addirional fastener(s) shall be driven nearby (not closer than six (6) inches) in
undisturbed concrete. Where it is considered that many fasteners are improperly
installed, the Contractor shall test load any fifry(50) successively driven fasteners. If 10 �
percent or more of these fasteners fail, the Contractor shall utilize other fastening means
as approved and at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Hangers for piping and ducts shall be attached to cellular steel floor decks with steel �
plates and bolted rod conforming to the steel deck manufacturer's requirements. Where �
the individual hanger load exceeds the capaciry of a single floor deck attachment, steel
angles,beams or channels shall be provided to span the number of floor deck attachments �
required.
4. Welding inay be used for securing hangers to steel structural inembers. Welded
attachinents shall be designed so that the fiber stress at any point of the weld or
attachment will not exceed the fiber stress in the hanger rod. � �
rW
3.5 SHEET METAL DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS �
A. Hanger Minimum Sizes:
1. Up to 30-Inch Wide: 1-inch x 16 gauge at 10-foot spacing. �
2. 31-Inch to 48-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 16 gauge at 10-foot spacing.
3. Over 48-Inch Wide: Trapeze hangers with angle iron and 1/2-inch rods spaced not more �
than 8-foot on centers.
4. Up to 20"round: 1-inch x 20 gauge at 10-feet spacing. '""
5. Up to 60"round: I-inch 18 gauge at 10 foot spacing. �
B. Horizontal Duct on Wall Supports Miniinum Sizes: �
1. Up to 1&Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 16 gauge or 1-inch x 1-inch x 1/8 inch at 8-foot
spacing.
2. 19-Inch to 40-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/8-inch angle at 4-foot spacing.
�
C. Vertical Duct on Wall Supports Miniinum Sizes: �
1. At 10-foot spacing.
�
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529 -8 �
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 230529—SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS HVAC UPGRADE
� 2. Up to 24-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 16 gauge; 25-inch to 36-inch wide: 1-inch x 1-inch x
�, 1/8-inch angle.
3. 37-Inch to 48-Inch Wide: 1-1/4 inch x 1-1/4 inch x 1/8-inch angle.
r�
' D. Vertical Duct Floor Supports Minimum Sizes:
� l. Riveted or screwed to duct.
�, 2. Up to 60-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/8-inch angle. �
F 3. Over 60-Inch Wide: 2-inch x 1/8-inch.
4
E. Provide sway bracing on all ductwork in accordance with local codes and regulations.
�
6
3.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
�
A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipinent from structure above or support
`` equipment above floor.
" B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment.
�
C. Concrete bases for the mechanical equipment indoors ar outdoors will be provided by the
� General Contractor only if shown on the Architectural or Structural Drawings. Otherwise, all
�
bases shall be provided by this Contractor.
�, D. For Inertia Bases, see Section 230548.
� E. Housekeeping bases shall be 4-inch thick ininiinum, extended 4-inch beyond machinery
bedplates.
�
y� F. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper size and location of all bases and shall
furnish all reyuired anchor bolts and sleeves. If bases are provided by the General Contractor,
� furnish him with templates showing the bolt locations.
�` G. Equipment shall be secured to the bases with anchor bolts of ample size. Bolts shall have
bottom plates and pipe sleeves and shall be securely imbedded in the concrete. All machinery
� shall be grouted under the entire bearing surface. After grout has set, all wedges, shims and
r jack bolts shall be removed and the space filled with non-shrinking grout. This Contractor shall
provide lead washers at all equipment anchor bolts.
�
� H. Construct equipment supports mounted above floor of structural steel members or steel pipe and
fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
!�
L Provide rigid anchors for ducts and pipes immediately after vibration connections to equipment.
�° See also Section 230548.
�
�,,, 3.7 SPIRAL LOCK SEAM DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
� A. Round Duct Hangers Minimum Sizes:
� 1. At 10-foot spacings.
2. Up to 18-Inch Diameter: 1-inch x 16 gauge.
3. 19-Inch to 36-Inch Diameter: 1-inch x 12 gauge.
�"
�
� SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529-9
k
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
230529—SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS HVAC UPGRADE
4. 37-Inch to 50-Inch Diaineter: 1-1/2 inch x 12 gauge. �
5. S l-Inch to 84-Inch Diameter: Trapeze hangers with angle iron and 1/2-inch rods spaced
not more than 8-foot on center.
B. Vertical Duct Floor Supports Minimum Sizes: �
1. Rivet to duct and tie angles together with road,angles or cinch band.
2. Up to 48-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/8-inch angle. �
3. Over 48-Inch Wide: 2-inch x 2-inch x 3/16-inch angle.
C. Additional Hanger Requirements:
1. 2-Inch to 24-inch from flexible connections of fans. �
2. 2-Inch to 24-inch froin the outlets ar flexible connections of VAV control units or inixing
boxes.
3. 12-Inch to 36-inch from the main duct to the first hanger of long branch ducts. �
4. 2-Inch to 12-inch froin the ends of all branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums.
5. 2-Inch to 24-inch from fire or fire/smoke damper break-away joints.
6. Hangers at throat and heal of round or square elbows 48-inch or greater in width. �
3.8 FLASHING AND SAFING
A. Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipinent passes through weather or water-proofed �
walls, floors,and roofs per roof manufacturers instructions.
3.9 SLEEVES AND SEALS �
A. General: �
1. Encase all insulated pipes penetrating fire rated walls and floors in 360 degree metal-
shielded insulation inserts as manufactured by Pipe Shields, Inc. or equal. Extend
insulation insert on all non-potable, chilled water and refrigerant lines 1-inch beyond �
sheet metal shield.
B. Pipes: �
1. Existing Construction: For existing construction or inasonry construction, prepare pipe
opening by carefully cutting or core drilling, install sheet metal sleeve, and fill any open
space with fire stopping inaterial. Cutting of concrete or masonry shall be done after
approval of Structural Engineer. `"�
2. Sleeves in non-fire rated or non-bearing walls, floors or ceilings, new or existing
construction, shall be steel pipe or galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal
seam. Pack all annular spaces on each end with mineral wood or other non-coinbustible
material,positively fastened in place. Asbestos is not acceptable.
3. At Contractor's option, where uninsulated pipes penetrate cast-in-place concrete floors, '�
the"ProSet Systeins," Atlanta, Georgia, sleeving may be employed.
4. For pipes penetrating foundation walls, water-proofing membrane floors or other places �
where water leakage could be encountered, install Link-Seal wall sleeves by Thunderline
Corporation in manner recominended by the manufacturer.
�
C. Ducts:
1. Round Ducts: Fonn sleeves with galvanized steel.
2. Rectangular Ducts: Fonn sleeves with galvanized steel.
�
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529- 10 �
�
r
CenturyLink VAIL
w 230529—SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS HVAC UPGRADE
� 3. Construct opening large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide
�, for continuous insulation where required.
4. Where ductwork passes through fire rated floor, ceiling or wall, close off space between
r duct and construction with metal angles on both sides of wall on all four(4)surfaces.
� 5. Where ductwork passes through non-fire rated floors and walls, close off space between
duct and construction with non-combustible insulation. Asbestos is not pennitted.
�,. Provide metal angles on both sides of wall on all four(4) surfaces.
. 6. General Contractor shall provide roof curbs for duct penetrations. Mechanical Contractor
� shall be responsible for the proper size and location and shall counterflash in an approved
manner.
�
�. D. Seals:
l. General:
� a. Seal all holes or voids where mechanical systems penetrate fire rated floors and
walls with a fire stopping sealant having a fire rating equal to or greater than that
of the construction being penetrated, but not less than two (2) hours. The sealant
r shall meet the requirements of ASTM E-814, ASTM E-119 and UL-1479. It shall
be installed with strict adherence to the manufacturer's instructions and according
� to the product's UL Laboratory listing. The use of asbestos in any fonn is not
permitted.
�" 2. Types of Seals:
�, a. Intumescent (3M Company CP25 Caulk and 303 Putty)
b. Expanding Foam (Dow Corning 3-6548 Silicone RTV Foam)
�� c. Refractory Putty (SOHIO Carborundum Fire Putty)
� 3. Method of Use:
a. Intuinescent Type: For insulated pipe, install insulation through the sleeve with a �
�
continuous vapor seal if required. Install intumescent seal in the annular space
between the pipe insulation and the pipe sleeve. Refer to manufacturer's data
� sheets for maximum annular space allowable and thickness of material reyuired to
maintain the rating of the construction being penetrated in conformance with
� applicable UL Fire Stop Classification for the product.
� b. Expanding Foam: For insulated pipe, terminate the insulation on both sides of the
wall or floor being penetrated and fill the space between the construction and the
r bare pipe with the foam. For uninsulated pipe, continue pipe through the
� penetration and proceed as with insulated pipe.
c. Refractory Putty: For insulated pipe, provide a 360 degee metal-shielded calcium
�, silicate insulation insert as specified in Paragraph A. Pack and seal the entire
space between shield and sleeve with refractory putty. When sealing bare pipe,
� omit the metal-shielded insert.
�
� 3.10 METAL FABRICATION
�.
�. A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports.
Install and align fabricated anchors in indicated locations.
�
B. Fit exposed connections together to fonn hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
�" shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
�_
�
� SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529- 11
w
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
230529—SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS HVAC UPGRADE
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Dl.1 for procedures of manual shielded inetal-arc welding, �
appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting�welding work, and the
following:
l. Use materials and methods that ininimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion �
resistance of base inetals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. �
3. Remove weldin�flux iinmediately. �
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing.
3.11 ADJUSTING �
A. Hanger Adjusnnent: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe. �
B. Touch-Up Painting: Iminediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds and
abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 requirements far touch-up of field-painted surfaces. �
l. Apply by brush or spray to provide a ininimum dry filin thickness of 2.0 mils.
2. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 �
section "PAINTING" of these specifications.
C. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply �
galvanizing repair paint to coinply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 230529 �
'
'
'
'
�
'
�
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529- 12 �
'
1".
' CenturyLink VAIL
�' 230548—VIBRATION CONTROL HVAC UPGRADE
�
SECTION 230548 -VIBRATION CONTROL
PART 1 -GENERAL
r
� �
;� 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
�
� , A. Extent of Vibration Control Work required by this section is indicated on Drawings and
' Schedules,and/or specified in other Division 23 sections.
B. Types of Vibration Control Products specified in this section include the following:
1. Neoprene Pads
2. Vibration Isolation Springs
� `' 3. Neoprene Mountings
4. Spring Isolators, Free-Standing
� 5. Thrust Restraints
" ,� 6. Equipinent Rails
7. Fabricated Equipment Bases
F 8. Inertia Base Frames
r 9. Isolation Hangers
10. Flexible Pipe Connectors
�
' C. Vibration Control Products furnished as integral part of factory-fabricated equipinent, are
� specified as part of equipinent assembly in other Division 23 sections.
�" D. Refer to other Division 23 sections far equipment foundations; Hangers; Sealants; Gaskets;
�, requirements of electrical connections to equipment isolated on vibration control products;
requirements of duct connections to air handling equipment isolated on vibration control
r products.
V
� 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
W A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in inanufacture of vibration control
products, of rype, size, and capaciry required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
� similar service for not less than five(5) years.
� 1. Except as otherwise indicated, obtain Vibration Control Products from single
manufacturer.
�, 2. Engage Manufacturer to provide technical supervision of installation of support isolation
� units produced,and of associated inertia bases(if any).
�
�' 1.3 SUBMITTALS
i
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
�� each type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing size, type, deflection, and
� location for each product furnished.
L Include data for each type and size of unit, showing isolation efficiency, stiffness,natural
�„ frequency and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipinent.
�
�r VIBRATION CONTROL 230548 - 1
i�
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
230548—VIBRATION CONTROL HVAC UPGRADE
2. For spring units, show wire size, spring diaineter, free height, solid-coinpression height, �
operating height, farigue characteristics, ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness and bases
of spring-rated selection far range of loading weights.
3. Include perfonnance certifications from manufacturers. �
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions,
weights, required clearances, and method of assembly of components. Detail bases and show �
location of equipment anchoring points coordinated with equipment manufacturer's shop
drawings.
1. Shop drawings showing structural design and details of inertia bases, steel beam bases
and other custom-fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's subinitted data. �
a. Furnish teinplates, anchor bolts and sleeve for equipment bases, foundations and
other support systems for coordination of vibration isolation units with other work.
2. Submit shop drawings indicating scope of vibration isolation work and locations of units �
and flexible connections. Include support isolation points for piping and ductwork
including risers,air housings and inertia bases.
a. Include schedule of units, showing size or manufacturer's part number, and weight �
supported and resulting deflection of each unit. �
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of vibration control product. Include
this data, product data and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with �
requirements of Division 1.
PART 2-PRODUCTS ��'.
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS �
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
� following: �
1. Vibration Control Products: �
a. Mason Industries,Inc.
b. Kinetics Noise Control. �
c. Vibration Eliininator
d. Senior Flexonics
e. Amber Booth
�
2.2 VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS
A. Neoprene Pads: Oil-resistant neoprene sheets of manufacturer's standard hardness and cross-
ribbed or waffled pattern. "`�
1. Mason Industries Type W
B. Vibration Isolation Springs: Wound-steel compression springs, of high-strength, heat-treated, �
spring alloy steel with outside diameter not less than 0.8 rimes operating height; with lateral
stiffness not less than vertical stiffness and designed to reach solid height before exceeding "'�
rated fatigue point of steel.
1. Color coated springs far ease of identification.
2. Spring shall have a minimum of 50 percent additional travel to solid.
�.r
VIBRATION CONTROL 230548 -2 �
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 230548—VIBRATION CONTROL HVAC UPGRADE
" 3. Mason Industries Type SLF
C. Neoprene Mountings: Provide neoprene inountings consisting of neoprene element bonded
between two (2) steel plates that are neoprene-covered to prevent corrosion. Provide minimmn
rated deflection of 0.35-inch. Provide threaded hole in upper plate and two (2) holes in base
� `` plate for securing to equipment and to substrate.
,, 1. Mason Industries Type ND
i
� �� D. Spring Isolatars, Free-Standing: Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration isolation
spring Type C between top and bottom loading plates, and with pad-type Type B isolator
"' bonded to bottom of bottom loading plate. Include studs or cups to ensure centering of spring
� on plafes. Include leveling bolt with lock nuts and washers, centered in top plate, arranged for
leveling and anchoring supported equipment as indicated.
* 1. Include holes in bottom plate for bolting unit to substrate as indicated.
�
2. Mason Industries Type SLFH
E. Thrust Restraints: Provide horizontal thrust restraints consisting of spring elements in series
� with neoprene pad. Select spring deflection same as for equipment loading. Design so thrust
�. restraints can be pre-set and adjusted in field. Attach horizontal restraints at centerline of thrust
and symmetrically on either side of unit.
�" 1. Provide same deflection as isolated equipinent.
� 2. Select load to provide 1/4-inch maximum displacement under full systein operating
pressure.
,. 3. Mason Industries Type WBI/WBD
�`�� F. Equipment Rails: Where rails or beains are indicated for use with isolator units to support
equipment, provide steel beams complying with ASTM A36, with ininimum depth of 6-inch or
� 0.10 x span of beain between isolators (whichever is greater). Provide welded bracket at each
� end of beams, and anchor each end to spring isolator unit. Provide bolt holes in beams
matching anchor bolt holes in equipment. Provide beams of section modules indicated ar,if not
�' indicated,selected for normal-weight equipment loading to limit static load stress to 16,000 PSI.
� 1. Beam depth need not exceed 14-inch provided that deflection and misalignment is kept
within manufacturer's acceptable lunits.
,, 2. Mason Industries Type ICS
�'� G. Fabricated Equipment Bases: Where supplementary bases are indicated for use with isolator
units to support equipment (base not integral with equipment),provide welded rectangular unit,
" fabricated of structural steel shapes, plates and bars complying with ASTM A36. Provide
�, welded support brackets and anchor base to spring isolator units. Except as otherwise indicated
arrange brackets to result in lowest possible mounting height for equipment, but provide
� minimuin of 1-inch. Provide bolt holes in base matching anchor bolt holes in equipinent.
� 1. Provide for auxiliary inotor slide base under motor or inotor slide rails for adjusting belt
tension. Design primary base for bolting of rails or slide base in position.
� 2. Where sizes of base framing members are not indicated, fabricate base with depth of
structure not less than 0.10 x longest span of base, rigidly braced to support equipment
without deflections or distortions which would be detrimental to equipment or isolator
performance.
�""` 3. Beam depth need not exceed 14-inch provided that deflection and misalignment is kept
�_ within manufacturer's limits.
4. Mason Industries Type WF
�"
�
� VIBRATION CONTROL 230548 - 3
�
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
230548—VIBRATION CONTROL HVAC UPGRADE
H. Inertia Base Frames: Where inertia bases are indicated for use with isolation units to support �
eyuipment, provide rectangular structural beam channel, or complete sheet metal box concrete
fonns for floating foundations, with materials complying with ASTM A36. Frame unit as
shown ar, if not shown, with minimum depth of 0.08 x longest dimension of base, but not less �
than 6-inch deep. Size frame as shown or, if not shown, so that weight of fraine plus concrete
fill will be greater than operating weight of equipment supported. Provide steel reinforcing both
ways with both ends of reinforcing buttwelded to base framing. ,�
1. Provide welded support brackets and anchor base frame to spring isolator units.
2. Provide anchor bolts, located as required for equipment anchorage and supported for
casting of concrete. Locate bolts as indicated or, if not indicated, locate bolts so that
operating weight of equipment will be centered both ways on inertia base.
3. Provide adjustable bolts in pipe sleeves. �rl
4. Provide mounting bracket to provide 1-inch floor clearance.
5. Provide sufficient mass to allow 1/4-inch inaxiinuin displacement under starting and �
norinal conditions.
6. Mason Industries Type KSL
�
I. Isolation Hangers: Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's standard
compression isolators of type indicated. Design brackets for five (5) tiines rated loading of
units. Fabricate units to accept misaligmnent of 15 degree off center in any direction before
contacting hanger box, and for use with either rod or strap type members, and including
acoustical washers to prevent metal-to-metal contacts. �
1. Provide vibration isolation spring Type C with cap in lower pad-type isolator rubber
hanger eleinent in bottom, securely retained in unit. �
2. Provide neoprene element, with minimum deflection of 0.35-inch, securely retained in
hanger box.
3. Mason Industries Type 30N �
J. Flexible Pipe Connectors: ��
1. For Non-Ferrous Piping,provide bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid with copper
tube ends or bronze flanged ends,braze-welded to hose. "�
a. Mason Industries Type BBF ,,,�
2. For Ferrous Piping, provide stainless steel hose covered with stainless steel wire braid
with NPT steel nipples or 150 PSI ANSI flanges,welded to hose. �
a. Mason Industries Type BSS
PART 3 -EXECUTION �
3.1 INSPECTION �
A. Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to �
Owner or his representative.
3.2 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS �
A. GeneraL• Coinply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, for selection
and application of vibration isolarion materials and units as indicated. �
VIBRATION CONTROL 230548 -4 �
S
�.
�� CenturyLink VAIL
�► 230548—VIBRATION CONTROL HVAC UPGRADE
� "� B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's
recoinmendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units to
achieve miniinum static deflection and displacement requirements.
'' 3.3 APPLICATIONS
..
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, select vibration control products in accordance with
� ASHRAE Handbook, 2011 HVAC Applications Volume, Chapter 48 "Sound and Vibration
Control",Table 47.
� B. Piping: For piping connected to equipinent mounted on vibrarion control products, install
isolation hangers Type N, as indicated, and for first three (3) points of support for pipe sizes
4-inch and less, for first four (4) points of support for pipe sizes 6-inch through 8-inch, and for
first six(6)points of support for pipe sizes 10-inch and over.
' C. Fan Sets: All fan sets should have thrust restraints when operating over 2-inch W.C. S.P. unless
w they are mounted on a concrete inertia base, in which case the inertia base will not allow fan
,, �novement. The fan position at operating and stop positions should not move more than
1/4-inch displacement at these two(2) conditions.
�
W 3.4 INSTALLATION
�
� A. General: Except as otherwise indicated,comply with inanufacturer's instructions for installation
W and load application to vibration isolation inaterials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do not
exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by
* other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and snnilar devices (if any) intended for
� temporary protection against overloading during installation.
� B. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent
displacement by normal forces.
r
C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as
� required where substrate is not level.
r.
D. Install inertia base frames on isolator units so that minimum of 1-inch clearance below base will
� result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been installed and loaded
� for operation.
�,,, E. For air handling equipment, install thrust restraints as indicated, and also wherever thrust
:, exceeds 10 percent of equipment weight.
�
F. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible.
�,
�, G. Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement froin loading and
operations.
�
H. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipinent side of shutoff valves,horizontally and parallel
�" to equipment shafts wherever possible.
�
IY
r VIBRATION CONTROL 230548 -5
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL ��
230548—VIBRATION CONTROL HVAC UPGRADE
3.5 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK �
A. Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe installation of other work related to vibration
isolation wark, including work connected to vibration isolation wark; and, after completion of �
other related work (but before equipment start-up), shall furnish written report to Engineer
listing observed inadequacies for proper operation and perfonnance of vibration isolation work.
Report shall cover,but not necessarily be limited to the following: „�
1. Equipment installations (performed as work of other sections)on vibration isolators. �
2. Piping connections,including flexible connections. ���
3. Ductwork connections, including provisions for flexible connections.
4. Passage of piping and ductwork,which is to be isolated through walls and floors. '
�
B. Do not start-up equipinent until inadequacies have been corrected in manner acceptable to
vibration isolation installer. �
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
�II
A. Clean each vibration control unit,and verify that each is working freely,and that there is no dirt �
or debris in immediate viciniry of unit that could possibly short-circuit unit isolation.
�
�
3.7 DEFLECTION MEASUREMENTS
A. Upon completion of vibration isolation work, prepare report showing measured equipment �
deflections theoretical floor deflection and isolation efficiency for each major item of
equipment.
�
�
END OF SECTION 230548
�:
�
'
�
1
i
�
�
VIBRATION CONTROL 230548 -6 �
�
A�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 230553—MECHANICAL IDENTffICATION HVAC UPGRADE
�
�, SECTION 230553 -MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
A
PART 1 -GENERAL
r
!"� 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
�
A. Extent of Mechanical Identification Wark required by this section is indicated on drawings
� and/or specified in other Division 23 sections.
� B. Types of Identification Devices specified in this section include the following:
�
1. Plastic Pipe Markers
2. Plastic Tape
� 3. Valve Tags
4. Valve Schedule Frames
" 5. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs
� 6. Plasticized Tags
7. Lettering and Graphics
�
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ldentification Requireinents at Central-Station
� Mechanical Control Center; not work of this section.
� D. Refer to Division 26 sections for ldentification Requirements of Electrical Work; not work of
i� this section.
�
� 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�, A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Finns regularly engaged in manufacturer of identification
devices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
� service for not less than five(5)years.
'' B. Codes and Standards:
k 1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field,
colors,and viewing angles of identification devices.
� 2. Existing Building Standards: Comply with the existing lettering size, length of color
� field, colors and identification method as presently exists in the existing building unless
otherwise indicated.
�
� 1.3 SUBMITTALS
� A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
� each identification material and device required.
�, B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-
1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown
�" on tag), location of valve (room or space), size of valve, and variations for identification
(if any). Only tag valves which are intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses,
�" such as valve to isolate individual system risers, individual floor branches or building system
Y
� MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 1
Yw
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
230553—MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION HVAC UPGRADE
shut-off valves. In addition to inounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals � �
as specified in Division l.
PART2 -PRODUCTS �
2.1 MANUFACTURERS �
�
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following: �
1. Brady(W.H.) Co.; Sigmnark Division � �
2. Brimar Industries, Inc.
3. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. �
4. Seton Name Plate Corp.
5. Holbi.
�
� 2.2 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS I�I1
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each s
application as referenced in other Division 23 sections. Where more than single type is �
specified far application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each
product category.
�
2.3 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS
�
A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, colar-coded
pipe markers,complying with ANSI A13.1.
B. Insulation: Furnish 1-inch thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe
marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatwes of 125 degree F (52 "'�
degree C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2-inch beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.
C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6-inch(including insulation if any),provide full- �
band pipe inarkers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one (1) of
the following methods: �
1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
2. Taped to pipe (ar insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4-
inch wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker,tape lapped 1-1/2 inch. �
D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6 inch and larger (including insulation if any), provide
either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than three (3) times letter height
(and of required length),fastened by one(1) of the following methods: �
1. Steel spring or non-metallic fasteners.
2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with colar-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2 �
inch wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker,tape lapped 3-inches. �
3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's
standard stainless steel bands.
�
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 -2 �
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 230553—MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION HVAC UPGRADE
�' E. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled, shown, or to
�, match existing building lettering nomenclature system and abbreviate only as necessary for each
application length.
p
F. Arrows: Print each pipe inarker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with
�`" piping system service lettering(to accommodate both direcrions),ar as separate unit of plastic.
P
� 2.4 PLASTIC TAPE
� A. General: Provide inanufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl
� tape,not less than 3 mils thick.
�, B. Width: Provide 1-1/2 inch wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including
insulation,if any) of less than 6-inch,2-1/2 inch wide tape for larger pipes.
4.
C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1,except where another color selection is indicated.
r
r
2.5 VALVE TAGS
w
A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gauge polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping
� system abbreviation in 1/4-inch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2-inch high, valve
normal position 1/4-inch high letters,and with 5/32-inch hole for fastener.
� 1. Provide 1-1/2 inch diameter tags,except as otherwise indicated.
r 2. Fill tag engraving with Black enainel.
+� B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded
� type), and solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and
manufactured specifically for that purpose.
� C. Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/16-inch thick engraved plastic
laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed
valve. Include 1/8-inch center hole to allow attachment.
�
r
2.6 VALVE SCHEDULE
r
A. Valve Schedule shall be printed on coinpany letterhead and shall include the following
�
columns:
1. ValveTagNumber (example: HWS-1)
� 2. Service (example: ISOLATE AHU-1 HEATING COIL)
� 3. Room Number (location of valve)
4. Size of Valve
i� 5. Type of Valve
� 6. Nonnal Position of the Valve (open or closed) �
�„ B. Frame: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for
removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded
�' aluminum,with non-glare type plexiglass.
�
+�
� MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 -3
w
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
230553—MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION HVAC UPGRADE
2.7 ENGRAVED PLASTIGLAMINATE SIGNS �
A. General: Provide engraving stock inelamine plastic laininate, complying with FS L-P-387, in
the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes �
and wording indicated, Black with White core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated,
punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive inounting is necessary because of
substrate. �
B. Thickness: 1/8-Inch,except as otherwise indicated.
C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type pennanent adhesive where �
screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.
2.8 PLASTICIZED TAGS �
A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags,
of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable far writing, approximately 3-1/4 inch x 5-5/8 '�
inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording
including large-size primary wording (As examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT
OPERATE). ��
�
2.9 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS �
A. General: Coordmate names, abbreviarions and other des�gnations used m mechanical
identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified, scheduled and approved
by the Owner/Engineer. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated and approved by �
the Owner/Engineer for proper identification and operation/maintenance of inechanical systems
and equipment.
�
B. Multiple Systeins: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, �
provide identification which indicates individual system number as designated on the drawings
or schedule as well as service.
�
PART 3 -EXECUTION
"�
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, �
painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install �
identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to
installarion of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. "'�
�
3.2 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION �
A. Access Doors: Provide duct inarkers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwark and
housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment), other maintenance and operating
instructions,and appropriate safety and procedural information. �
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 -4 �
i
� CenturyLink VAIL
�� 230553—MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION HVAC UPGRADE
� B. Concealed Doors: Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar
�, concealment, plasticized tags may be installed for identification in lieu of specified signs, at
Installer's option.
�
�` 3.3 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
� A. General: Install pipe markers of the following type on each system indicated to receive
� identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. Existing building
identification shall match the existing method which exists in the building.
�
� B. Plastic pipe markers,with application system as indicated under"MATERIALS" in this section.
Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.
r �
C. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied
'" spaces, machine rooins, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior
�
non-concealed locations.
�, D. Near each valve and control device.
r E. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and tenninal units; mark each pipe at
� branch,where there could be question of flow pattern.
� F. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible
enclosures.
�
G. At access doors,manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.
�
� H. Near major equipinent items and other points of origination and termination.
�_ I. Spaced intermediately at maxiinum spacing of 25-foot along each piping run, except reduce
� spacing to 15-foot in congested areas of piping and equipment.
v
r
J. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings.
�
3.4 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
�
A. General: Provide valve tag on valves in each piping system. List each tagged valve in valve
�� schedule for each i m s stem.
PP g Y
� 1. Building services main shutoff valves.
2. Each individual system main shutoff valves.
'� 3. Each individual system riser shutoff valves.
4. Each individual system floor shutoff valves.
5. Each individual system major branch shutoff valves.
�<;
B. Provide the following columns and information for each valve:
� 1. Valve Tag Number (example: HWS-1)
2. Service (example: ISOLATE AHU-1 HEATING COIL)
�`'� 3. Room Number (location of valve)
�
4. Size of Valve
w
r MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 -5
�r
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
230553—MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION HVAC UPGRADE
5. Type of Valve �
6. Normal Position of the Valve (open or closed)
C. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in mechanical equipment rooms where directed by �
Architect/Owner/Engineer.
D. Where more than one (1) major mechanical equipment room is shown for project, install ,�
inounted valve schedule in each major mechanical equipment room, and repeat only main
valves which are to be operated in conjunction with operations of more than single mechanical
equipment room.
�
3.5 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. GeneraL• Install minimum 2-inch x 4-inch engraved plastic laminate equipment marker on each �
individual items of inechanical equipinent. Provide signs far the following general categories of
equipment. �
1. Main building systeins control and operating valves, including safery devices and
hazardous units such as gas outlets. �-
2. Room thermostats,except gun tag labels are acceptable for room thermostats.
3. Fuel-burning units including boilers,furnaces,heaters,stills and absorption chillers. �"`�
4. Puinps,coinpressors, chillers, condensers and similar inotor-driven units. ,,,�
5. Heat exchangers,cooling towers,heat recovery units and similar equipment.
6. Fans and blowers. �
7. HVAC units.
8. Tanks and pressure vessels.
9. Water trearinent systems and similar equipinent. �
B. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch high lettering for naine of unit. r�
C. Text of Signs: In addition to the identified unit, inform operator of operational requirements, �"
indicate safety and emergency precautions,and warn of hazards and improper operations. �
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING �
A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical idenrification device which has become visually blocked
by work of this division or other divisions. '�
B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts.
END OF SECTION 230553 ""�
�
'
�
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 -6 �
�
w
CenturyLink VAIL
� 230593—TESTING,ADJUSTING&BALANCING HVAC UPGRADE
�.
,, SECTION 230593 -TESTING,ADJUSTING& BALANCING
�
�
PART 1 -GENERAL
;
F 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
� �
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
� � and Divisions 1 and 23 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
,a_ 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
� � A. This section covers Testing and Balancing of Environmental Systeins including but not limited
to air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems, and the equipment and apparatus
connected thereto. The testing and balancing of all environmental systeins shall be the
� responsibiliry of one(1)testing,balancing and adjusting firm. �
L Test,Adjust, and Balance all of the following mechanical systems:
r a. Supply Air Systems;
b. Return Air Systems;
� c. Exhaust Air Systems;
� d. Refrigeration Equipinent;
e. Temperature Control System;
4 2. Report any systems for excessive sound and vibration levels.
.�
� 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR
a A. Procure the services of an independent testing and balancing Agency specializing in the testing,
adjusting and balancing of environmental systems to perform the above mentioned work. An
� independent agency is defined as an organization that is not engaged in engineering design or is
not a division of a mechanical contractor entity that installs mechanical systems. It shall be an
� agency certified by NEBB or TABB. Testing and balancing work shall be directly supervised
w by a NEBB certified Supervisor or Professional Engineer on the Testing and Balancing
Agency's staf£ The Supervisor shall represent the Testing and Balancing Agency in progress
+� meetings as requested, and shall be available for interpreting all material found in the Balance
� Report.
1. All field work shall be performed by qualified technicians who are currently certified by
� either NEBB or TABB Test and Balance Certification Agencies.
�° B. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience in
testing and balancing mechanical systems.
A�'
i�
1.4 CONTRACTORS
�
A. Acceptable TAB Agencies are:
�`` 1. TAB Services
�
�
� TESTING,ADJUSTING &BALANCING 230593 - 1
�.
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
230593—TESTING,ADJUSTING&BALANCING HVAC UPGRADE
1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS �
A. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook 2011, Applications Voluine, Chapter 36, Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing. �
�
B. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Enviromnental
Systems." �
1.6 SUBMITTALS
�r
A. Upon award of the Contract, the Contractor shall subinit the name of the Test and Balance
Agency who will be perfonning the work. The submittal shall include a complete list of all
technicians who will be performing the field wark and include a photocopy of their current
certification by either NEBB ar TABB Certification Agencies.
�ri
B. Only those technicians included in the submittal shall perform the work. Any personnel or staff
used to perform the work who are not included in the subinittal shall be grounds for rejecting �
the Test and Balance Report and the Project in whole.
�
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
�
A. Air and water testing and balancing shall not begin until the systein has been completed and is �
in full working arder.
�
B. Put all hearing, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipinent into full operation and
continue operation of same during each warking day of testing and balancing. Preliminary �
Testing and Balancing requirements shall be ascertained priar to the coinmencement of work
through a review of the project plans and specifications. In addition, visual observations at the
site during construction shall be made to determine the location of required balancing devices, �
that they are being installed properly, and in an accessible location for the need. Report in �
writing any deficiencies to the Contractor and Mechanical Engineer immediately. �"��
C. Before any air balance wark is done, the system shall be checked for duct leakage, assure filters �
are installed, see that filters are changed if they are dirty, check for correct fan rotation, �
equipment vibration, and check automatic dampers for proper operation. All volume control
dainpers and outlets shall be wide open at this time. �
D. Before any hydronic balancing work is done, the systein shall be checked for plugged strainers,
proper pump rotation, proper control valve installation and operation, air locks, proper system .,�
static pressure to assure a full system, proper flow meter and check valve installation. All �
throttling devices and control valves shall be open at this time.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING �
A. Coordinate scheduling of Work with the Contractor. �
1. Schedule TABB work to coincide with testing and verification of the teinperature control
systems where practical.
�
TESTING,ADJUSTING&BALANCING 230593 -2 �
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 230593—TESTING,ADJUSTING&BALANCING HVAC UPGRADE
� 2. Coordinate systein start-up and perfonnance verification with the Engineer as TABB
��, work is in progress.
� B. Provide written notification to the Project Manager five (5) warking days prior to coimnencing
w
TABB and a schedule for coinpleting the work.
� C. Provide written notification to the Contractor within twenry-four (24) hours of an equipinent
failure preventing TABB work from proceeding.
�
� ° PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUMENTS
� '� A. Calibration and maintenance of instruments shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
standards and recommendations and requirements of NEBB.
i ,, B. Calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination.
� C. Use a true RMS ainp and hannonic distortion electrical test meter, FLUKE Model 41 or equal
to test and record operating and performance measurements for all motors operating with
�' variable frequency drives.
�
� PART 3 -EXECUTION
r
3.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
M
r A. Operate all temperature control systems with the Temperature Control Contractor's
representative for proper sequence of operation and calibration. Report in writing any
� deficiencies to the Engineer immediately.
r
�, 3.2 REQUIREMENTS OF WORK
�„: A. Provide all necessary fan belts and sheaves to balance all fans to the specified air delivery for
� the actual field conditions.
1. Test and Balance Agency shall provide motor sheave replaceinent and fan belt and
sheave replacement necessary for final balance condition for specified air quantity when
�� the VFD is operating at design conditions. Motor sheaves shall be replaced so motors
� operate at rated rpm at 60HZ, then fan sheaves shall be replaced to meet design
requirements at 60HZ,without placing the motor over its nameplate amp rating.
� 2. The Test and Balance report shall include voltage readings, both into the VFD, with
concurrent motor ainp readings. _
�,� B. Balance all air and water flows at terminals within +5 percent to -5 percent of design flow
quantities for individual terminals. And +5 percent to —10 percent of individual air outlets or
�' inlets. Measure and record the following data:
� C. Air Balance:
�
r- TESTING,ADJUSTING& BALANCING 230593 -3
i�
r
CenturyLink VAIL �
230593—TESTING,ADJUSTING&BALANCING HVAC UPGRADE
1. Air supply, return and exhaust systems with air quantities for each air device; air �
handling units including supply, return, mixed, and outside temperatures and fan data
including CFM, static pressure, fan RPM, voltage, rated inotor ainperage, motor running
amperage before and after final balance, listed motor power factor and �notar running �
power factor reading. Air diffusion patterns shall be set to miniinize objectionable drafts
and noise.
� 2. The supply, return and exhaust fan static pressure shall be set by the balancing firm and q�
the Control Contractor if the systems have fan volume control. The duct static shall be �
confinned both through the instrumentation installed on the job and by the Balancing
Agency. The system shall be tested in all operating modes (including miniinum outside
air with full return air, full outside air, modulated dainper position, and full cooling with �
the design diversity). System static pressure and fan motor amperages shall be recorded
in all inodes. The fan speed resulting in satisfactory system perfonnance shall be
detennined at full design delivery, inlet or outlet fan. Volume control dampers shall be in �
the wide open position and variable frequency drive is at 100 percent of design RPM and
one (1) path presenting the greatest resistance to flow shall be fully open and
unobstructed. �
3. Provide full pitot traverse and CFM measurements at each fan in addition to tenninal
device measurements. "
4. Air volume and air temperature rise or drop across each coil, filter, dampers, etc., of air
handling section. "�
5. Measure, adjust, set, balance and record outside air, return air and exhaust/relief air r�
� quantities for all air handling systems and supply fans.
Air quantities shall be determined by direct airflow measuring procedures wherever �
possible, where duct/inlet conditions do not allow for accurate direct measureinent of
outside air the following method shall be used: �
Outside Air CFM = Supply Fan Total CFM
-Return Fan Total CFM
In addition to the direct measuring of airflow quantities, measure and record outside air, „�
return air and mixed air temperatures, determine thermal/mass energy balance and
provide calculations to verify measured airflow quantities. Adjusting and setting the �
outside air quantity as a percentage of damper position will not be acceptable.
D. Final adjustments shall include but not be limited to the following: �
ITEM ADJUSTMENT �,
Fan: Belt Drive RPM. Include sheave and belt exchange to deliver air flow
within limits of installed motor horsepower and mechanical ��
stress limits of the fan. Determine the limiting fan tip speed
before increasing RPM. Final fan speed setting shall allow �
for predicted filter loading and shall establish proper duct
pressures for operation of zone CFM regulators.
�
Fan: Direct Drive RPM with speed taps. Set fan speed on tap which most
closely approaches design CFM. Report tap setting on
equipment data sheet as high,medium or low.
�
TESTING,ADJUSTING &BALANCING 230593 -4 �
i
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 230593—TESTING,ADJUSTING&BALANCING HVAC UPGRADE
��
ITEM ADJUSTMENT
RPM with speed control rheostat. Set output of fan at design
CFM by adjusting the SCR. After adjustinent, check fans
* ability to re-start after powering down. lncrease setting if
.�
required for proper starting.
,, CFM with variable pitch blades. Variable fixed pitch fan
blades and variable in motion pitch fan blades shall be
� adjusted by the manufacturer at pitch required to provide
� design output. Pitch angle adjustinent shall not exceed
� recommended maximum to prevent"stall."
� Terminal Boxes VAV and Constant Voluine Boxes with Reheat. Set
'� regulators to provide design maximum, ininiinum, heating
and cooling CFM.
�
�, VAV Boxes: Set voluine at 100 percent inaximum and 15
percent minimum of design CFM. Check control sequence
M operation to assure proper sequencing. Reset PE switches as
�-
required when furnished with terminal box.
r
� Air Devices All diffusers and registers shall be ineasured and balanced.
P
� Motor Starter Division 23 Furnished Magnetic and Manual Starters.
Thermal Heaters Furnish and exchange thermals as required for proper inotor
r protection.
�s
Division 26 Furnished Motor Control Center Magnetic
�, Starters. Check for correct sizing. Notify Electrical
Contractor of discrepancies.
�
Existing Magnetic and Manual Starters. Furnish and
'" exchange thermals as required for motor protection.
�
Variable Frequency Test, measure and record true RMS amperage, THD for
� Drives voltage and amperage for each variable frequency drive at
� both the input power to the drive and the output power to
the inotor in both the drive mode and through the across the
�„ line by-pass mode.
� E. Electric Heat:
1. Full load amperage and voltage of all electric heating elements.
�"�� 2. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall check staging of heating devices and reset if
w required for proper operation.
�
,� TESTING,ADJUSTING& BALANCiNG 230593 -5
�,�.
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
230593—TESTING,ADNSTING&BALANCING HVAC UPGRADE
F. When necessary as detennined by the Mechanical Engineer, the Test and Balance Agency shall �
provide additiona] testing and measurements as required by the Mechanical Engineer including,
but not limited to,the following:
1. Static pressure gradient profiles throughout ductwork and/ar piping systems. �
2. Temperature gradient profiles throughout ductwork and/or piping system.
3. Miscellaneous electrica] measurements.
4. Smoke tests of room pressure relationships. �
This wark shall be done immediately upon request with complete cooperation and in an
expedient schedule at no additional cost to any other party.
G. All smoke control systems for life safety shall be tested, certified, conducted and reported in �
accordance with and as required by the Local Building Code Authority and Fire Department
who have jurisdiction including, but not limited to, smoke tests, pressurization tests and
pressure measureinents,door closing forces, system demonstration and systein activation,etc. �
3.3 REPORT OF WORK
�
A. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall submit six (6) bound copies of the final Testing and
Balancing Report at least five (5) calendar days priar to the Contractor's request for final
inspection. All data shall be recorded on applicable reporting forms. The report shall include
all operating data as listed in Paragraph 3.2 above, a list of all equipment used in the testing and �
balancing work, and shall be signed by the Supervising Registered Professional Engineer and
affixed with their registration stamp, signed and dated in accordance with State Law. Final �
acceptance of this project will not take place until a satisfactory report is received.
B. When deemed necessary by the Mechanical Consulting Engineer, the Testing and Balancing
Agency shall run temperature and/or humidity recordings and shall read any of the report �
quantities in the presence of the Engineer for verification purposes. �,
C. When all air balancing is done and all dampers are set, all test holes shall be plugged and all +�'
dampers shall be marked with paint. The following information shall be recorded for each fan �
system in the final report: Design fan and air device inlet or outlet size, actual inlet or outlet
size, design and actual CFM and velociry through the orifice, for each terminal in the systein. �
The pitot tube traverse method used and location of pitot tube traverse for determining CFM
shall be recorded.
D. After all balancing is complete and all coordination with the Contractor and the Engineer is "'�'
complete, the balancing finn shall furnish aforeinentioned bound report which shall contain the ,,,.
following infonnation:
1. RPM, drive sheave information (as installed and as changed), fan nameplate infonnation, �
motor nameplate information, motor amperage, motor voltage and power factor to all �
motors(in all operating modes).
2. Static pressure across all coinponents of the system. ,�
3. Required and final balanced CFM at each system terminal. Include the tenninal size,
reading orifice size,and velocities read to attain the CFM.
4. Pump and motor nameplate information, amperage and voltage to all motors, pressure
drop across all system tenninals,pressure rise across the puinp in PSI and feet of head. '"�
5. Thermal protection for all motors shall be recorded; also power factor for all motors ..
drawing 1,000 watts or more. Starter brand, model, enclosure type, installed thermal
heaters and the rating of the heaters,required thermal heaters and the rating of the heaters �
�
TESTING,ADJUSTING& BALANCING 230593 -6 �
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
IM 230593—TESTING,ADJUSTING&BALANCING HVAC UPGRADE
� if different than installed shall be recarded. Starter heaters shall be changed to the correct
size and so noted in the report. If the starters were furnished by the Division 26, the
correct heater sizes shall be noted in the report and the Contractor shall be advised.
� 6. The report shall include a sheet which shall report the inethod of balance,project altitude,
and any correction factors.
7. A complete reduced set of the Black-line Mechanical Contract Drawings which shall be
included in the report with all equipment, flow measuring devices, terminals (VAV
� boxes, outlets, inlets, coils, unit heaters, fintube loops, radiant panel loops, schedules,
� etc.) clearly inarked and all equipinent designated.
8. Include in the report all variable frequency drive electrical performance test
� " characteristics for each motor as described in this specification section. Include
photocopies of all meter chart recorded<ineasured data>and/or coinputer printed output.
E. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall respond and correct all deficiencies within seven
(7)days of receiving the Engineer's written review of the Balancing Report. Failure to comply
`� will result in holding retainage of the final payment until all items have been corrected to the
�
satisfaction of the Engineer.
i.
3.4 GUARANTEE OF WORK
�
A. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall guarantee the accuracy of the tests and balance for a
`' period of ninety(90)days from date of final acceptance of the Test and Balance Report. During
r this period, the Testing and Balancing Agency shall make personnel available at no cost to the
Owner to correct deficiencies that may become apparent in the system balance.
�
�" 3.5 COMPLETION SERVICES
�
A. Final Check: Make final checks and do any rebalancing as directed.
r
B. Report: Submit Balancing Report as specified above, to the Owner. Submit preliminary copy
� of report to Engineer for spot-checking as described below.
� C. Acceptance: Notify Engineer and Owner that wark is complete and submit preliininary copy of
Balancing Report. Schedule rime to ineet the Owner and Engineer at the site to perform spot-
checking and verification as directed. Test and Balance Agency shall furnish personnel and
equipment and spot check:
1. The TAB representative shall be a meinber of the saine teain used during the original
�� testing.
�, � 2. Equipment used during the random testing shall be tbe same equipment used during tbe
�� original testing.
�" 3. The system or equipment being verified shall be in the same operating mode as during
the original TAB test.
'� 4. Up to 10 percent of the air readings shall be re-tested. Ninety percent (90%) of the re-
�, tested readings must be within tolerances of the specifications.
5. Up to 20 percent of the balanced hydronic component readings shall be re-tested. Ninety
�^ percent(90%)of the re-tested readings must be within tolerances of the specifications.
�
�
�. TESTING,ADJUSTING & BALANCING 230593 -7
i�
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
230593—TESTING,ADJUSTING&BALANCING HVAC UPGRADE
6. Whenever system verifications do not ineet specifications, the entire system shall be re- �
balanced and rechecked.
END OF SECTION 230593 �
,
. ,
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
,
,
'
�
TESTING,ADJUSTING& BALANCING 230593 - 8 �
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
1�- 230700—MECHANICAL INSULATION HVAC UPGRADE
�
�, SECTION 230700-MECHANICAL INSULATION
r
PART 1 -GENERAL
ti
'" 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
�
A. This Section includes:
� 1. Piping Insulation,Jackets and Accessories
� � 2. Ductwork Insulation and Jackets �
�
� B. Refer to other Division 23 sections for Shields,Inserts,and Mechanical Idenrification.
r
� C. Insulation thickness based on ASHRAE 90.1 recoinmendations. Ductwork insulation thickness
is based on Table 6.2.4.2B, Envelope Criteria Table 5-16 through 5-19 for Exterior, Unvented
� Attic With Roof Insulation, Unconditioned Space and Indirectly Conditioned Spaces. Piping
4 insulation thickness is based on Table 6.2.4.5.
�
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
r
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of inechanical
° insulation products, of types and sizes required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in
�,. similar service far not less than three(3)years.
�►� B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least five (5) years successful installation experience on
� projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project.
�
� C. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics
� and insulating cements.
ir
� 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Subinit manufacturer's installation instructions and schedule listing materials,
� thickness,K-value,density,and furnished accessories far each service or equipment specified.
��
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
�
� A. Deliver insularion, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with
manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products, name of
� manufacturer,and brand.
�` B. Protect insulation against dirt,water,cheinical,and mechanical damage.
�
�
p MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - l
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
230700—MECHANICAL INSULATION HVAC UPGRADE
PART2- PRODUCTS �
2.1 MANUFACTURERS �
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requireinents, provide product by one of the
following:
1. Insulation: �
a. Annstrong World Industries, Inc. (flexible elastomeric)
b. Johns-Manville Products Corp. (fiberglass,calcium silicate)
c. Knauf Fiber Glass(fiberglass) �
d. Manson Insulation Co. (fiberglass,calcium silicate)
e. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. (fiberglass)
£ Rubatex Corp. (flexible elastomeric) �
g. Aeroflex(flexible elastomeric)
2. Jacketing,Coatings, Adhesives, Sealants and Covering Products:
a. Childers
b. Foster �
c. Ceel-Co. �
d. Johns-Manville Products Corp.
e. Knauf Fiber Glass �"
£ Venture Tape Corporation ,�
g. Design Polymetrics
2.2 PIPING INSULATION �
A. Glass Fiber: ASTM C 547, Type 1, rigid molded, noncombustible, 0.23 "K" value at 75 degree '�
F mean temperature, inaxiinum service temperature 850 degree F, moisture sorption less than
02% by volume. Composite 25/50-flame spread/smoke developed rating (ASTM E 84, UL
723,and NFPA 255). �
l. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASTM C 1136,451bs/in tensile strength(ASTM D 828),or beach �
puncture 50 oz in/in tear ininimum (ASTM D 78l). White Kraft paper reinforced with
glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum foil, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps �
and butt strips.
2. Connections: Tacks,pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape,Penna-Weld adhesive.
B. Field Applied Fittings and Jackets: '"�
1. PVC Plastic:
a. One-piece, gloss white, molded fitting covers with factory installed fiberglass
insulation inserts. �
b. 20 Mil (30 mil for exterior applications) cut and curled gloss white jacketing �
material. Composite 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed rating(ASTM E84, UL
723 and NFPA 90A). �
c. Connect with tacks and pressure sensitive colar matching vinyl tape.
2. Aluminum: 0.016Inch thick sheet with factory applied inoisture barrier, with
� longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch laps,die shaped fitting covers.
�
�
MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 -2 �
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 230700—MECHANICAL INSULATION HVAC UPGRADE
�` 2.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION
�
A. Flexible Fiberglass Blanket: ASTM C 553, Type II, 3/4 lb/cu ft density, 1-1/2 inch thickness,
�,� 0.27 "K" value at 75 degree F mean temperature at compressed thickness, maximum service
temperature 250 degree F, inoisture sorption less than 0.2% by volume, aluminum foil facing
�� reinforced with fiberglass scrim laminated to UL rated Kraft paper. Composite 25/50-flame
spread/sinoke developed rating(ASTM E 84,UL 40,and NFPA 90A).
� 1. Secure with UL Listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinched expanded staples
ti and vapor barrier mastic as needed.
" B. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles
� � and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
P C. Ductwork Insulation Coating, Mastics,Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Vapor Barrier Coating (Store and apply between 40°F and 100°F, protect from freezing
�" until dry): Used on below ambient piping/duct to prevent moisture ingress. Comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II and QPD listed. Permeance shall be 0.013 perms or less at
�� 43 mils dry per ASTM E 96,Procedure B.
L a. Foster 30-80
b. Childers CP-38
�` c. Vimasco 749
�� 2. Fiberglass Adhesive (Store and apply between 40° F and 100° F, protect from freezing
until dry): Comply with LEED for Schools 2009 IEQ Credit 4.1, meet California Dept.
�,_ of Public Health (DDPH) Standard Method Ver. 1.1, 2010 Sinall Scale Environmental
� Chamber Test for VOC's for CA Specification 01350. Comply witll ASTM C916, Type
� II.
a. Foster 85-60
b. Childers CP-127
c. Vimasco 795
�- D. Round Ducts and Concealed Rectangular Ducts: Adhere flexible insulation to ductwork with
� adhesive applied in 6-inch wide strips on 16-inch centers. Butt insulation and sea] joints and
breaks with 2-inch lap of foil adhered over joint.
�
� PART 3 -EXECUTION
�"
� 3.1 INSPECTION
�, A. Examine areas and conditions where mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
�
�" 3.2 HVAC PIPING INSULATION (Based 2009 IECC and ASHRAE 90.1-2010)
�
A. Refrigerant Piping:
� 1. Applications:
� a. Suction
2. Insulation:
�'
a. Flexible Elastoineric: 1 1/2-Inch thickness.
�
. MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700-3
�
!
CenturyLink VAIL �
230700—MECHANICAL INSULATION HVAC UPGRADE
3.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION '�
A. Flexible Fiberglass Blanket:
1. Concealed supply ductwark without liner: 1-1/2 Inch thickness. (IECC RS inin)
2. Return ductwork in unconditioned spaces without liner: 1-1/2 Inch thickness. �
(IECC RS min)
3. � Exhaust ductwork within 10 ft. of exterior opening without liner: 1-1/2 Inch thickness. ��
4. Unit housings that are not factory insulated: 1-1/2 Inch thickness.
B. Rigid Fiberglass Board:
1. Outside air ductwork and plenums: 1-1/2 Inch thickness. �
2. Combustion air ductwork and plenums: 1-1/2 Inch thickness. �„�;
3. Mixed air ductwork and plenums: 1-1/2 Inch thickness.
4. Supply and return ducts exposed to the outdoors: 2-Inch thickness. (2006 International �
Energy Code� R:8; 2-inch Rigid=R:8.7) �
5. Exhaust ducts between the air-handling unit and the exterior opening: 1-1/2 Inch
thickness.
�
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION
�
A. Install insulation after piping system tests have been completed.
B. Clean piping to remove foreign substances and moisture prior to applying insulation. �
C. Install insulation products according to manufacturer's written instructions, building codes, and ""'�
recognized industry standards.
D. Omit insulation on air chambers,unions,balance cocks, flow regulators,buried piping, and pre- �
insulated equipment.
�
E. Omit insulation on hot piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinets; on cold piping within
unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan; on heating piping beyond control valve,
located within heated space; on condensate piping between steam trap and union; and on
unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections,and expansion joints.
.r
F. Secure longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips according to manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Firmly rub lap and butt strips to pressurize seam and ensure positive closure. �
H. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece
to coinplete run. Do not use scraps. �
�rl
I. Apply insulation to piping with all joints tightly fitted to eliminate voids.
J. Apply insulation on cold surfaces with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal. Hangers, supports, �
and anchars that are secured directly to cold surfaces must be adequately insulated and vapor
sealed to prevent condensation. Seal pipe tenninations in chilled water or glycol systems every ��
four(4)pipe sections with vapar barrier coating.
K. Extend surface finishes to protect all surfaces,end,and raw edges of insulation.
�
MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 -4 �
i
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
230700—MECHANICAL 1NSULATION HVAC UPGRADE
L. Protect vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation from puncture or other damage. Avoid the use
of staples on vapor barrier jackets. Seal vapor barrier penetrations with vapar barrier coating.
� M. Cover valves, fittings and similar items with eyuivalent thickness and composition of insulation
� as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded or job fabricated covers (at Installer's
�" option). Coat all below ambient valves, fittings and similar items with vapor barrier coating and
�•
reinforcing inesh before application of PVC covers. � �
I� N. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping
penetrations,except where fire-stopping materials are required.
� O. Provide thermal shield inserts on all pipe (Refer to 230529). Far� piping below ambient
temperature, apply vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal with 3-inch wide vapor
�, barrier tape.
� 1. Minimum insulation insert lengths:
a. 1-1/2—2-1/2 Inch Pipe: 10-Inches
b. 3 —6-Inch Pipe: ]2-Inches
c. 8— 10-Inch Pipe: 16-Inches
., d. 12-Inch and Larger Pipe: 22-Inches
^ P. Apply galvanized metal shields between hangers or supports and pipe insulation. Fonn shields
� to fit the insulation and extend up to the centerline of the pipe. The shield length shall be 4-
inches less than the associated insulation hanger insert to allow for vapar retarding butt joints on
„ each side of the shields.
� Q. Apply adhesives, mastics and coatings at manufacturer's recommended minimum coverage per
�
gallon.
� R. Replace all damaged insulation in whole; Repair of damaged insulation will not be accepted.
� S. Insulate fittings and valves with PVC insulated fitting covers and insulation inserts per
inanufacturer's recommendations.
v
T. Install aluminum jacket on exterior piping.
� 1. Install metal jackets by overlapping seams 2-inches and securing with metal bands on 24-
r� inch centers. Caulk all seains with 1/8" Bead of inetal jacketing sealant. Locate
longitudinal seams at the bottom of piping. Finish elbows and tees with matching metal
" fitting covers. Finish other fittings with conventional weather insulation inaterials with
� aluminum finish.
v
3.5 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION
�
A. Install insulation products according to manufacturer's written instructions, building codes, and
� recognized industry standards.
r;
B. Clean ductwork to reinove foreign substances and moisture prior to applying insulation.
�
�..,.
C. Apply insulation to ductwark with all joints tightly fitted to eliminate voids
�.
r
r MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700- 5
r
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
230700—MECHANICAL INSULATION HVAC UPGRADE
D. Seal all vapor retardant jacket seams and penetrations with UL listed tapes or vapor retardant �
adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Coat all seams, breaks, tape patches and
penetrations with vapor barrier coating.
E. Secure insulation to the underside of duct 24-inches or greater with mechanical fasteners or �
speed clips spaced 18-inches on center. Cut off protruding ends of fasteners after speed clips
are installed and seal penetration of vapor barrier. r
F. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar penetrations, �
except where fire-stopping materials are required.
G. Install corner angles on all external corners of insulation in exposed finished spaces before �
covering with jacketing.
H. Adhere flexible elastoineric sheets to ductwork by compression fit and full coverage of �
adhesive. Seal butt joints with same adhesive. Apply the same sheet thickness on standing
metal duct seains as installed on the duct surface.
�
3.6 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR
A. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation, both previously damaged or �
damaged during this construction period.
END OF SECTION 230700 �
�
'
'
1
'
'
�
�
�rr
MECHANICAL 1NSULATION 230700-6 �
.�
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
230800—MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING HVAC UPGRADE
P"
� SECTION 230800 -MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING
�
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
" 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
d
A. Purpose:
� 1. Verify operation and functional performance of Central Mechanical HVAC Systems,
Controls and Electrical Systems for coinpliance with "Design Intent", as defined by the
Contract Documents.
2. Document Mechanical and Electrical System test and inspections.
3. Verify application of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, As-Built (Record)
� Docuinents, spare parts lighting, special tools, controls and other iteins as may be
specified herein for support of Mechanical and Electrical Systeins and Equipinent.
" 4. Provide indirect support of the training of personnel for operation and inaintenance of
� Mechanical and Electrical Equipment and Systems.
� B. General:
1. Furnish labor and material to accomplish coinplete Mechanical and Electrica] System
� Commissioning as specified herein.
�, 2. G.C., M.C., E.C., T.C., and Balancing Contractar shall work jointly to accoinplish the
' Commissioning tasks identified in this section. This team shall be considered the
W Commissioning Contractor/Authority.
�" C. Job Conditions: The Coinmissioning Contractor shall become familiar with the contract
k documents, all addenda, and change orders issued for this project prior to commencing the
commissioning work.
r
�'° 1.2 DOCUMENTATION
�� A. The Commissioning Authority shall obtain the following:
i, l. Project Plans and Specification (Contract Docu�nents), Authorized Revisions, Shop
Drawings and Submittals (approved), Test and Balance Report, Equipment Start-Up and
a� Certification Reports,Operation and Maintenance Manuals,etc.
� 2. Records of required Code Authority Inspections, Contractar Test Inspections,
Documentation Sign-Offs, etc.
�
� 1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES OF OTHERS: Applicable specification sections outline trade
responsibilities during the coinmissioning process.
�
�„ A. General Contractor:
1. General Contractor shall verify completeness of the building envelope, perimeter and
� interior items which effect proper operation and control of HVAC equipment and
� systems.
�
�= MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING 230800- 1
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
230800—MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING HVAC UPGRADE
2. The General Contractor will assure participation and cooperation of specialty contractors �
(Mechanical, TAB, Building Automation System, etc.) under his jurisdiction as reyuired �
for the commissioning process.
�
B. Contractors Specialty: �
� 1. Individual Mechanical and Electrical Sub-Contractors will be responsible for providing
labor,material, equipment,etc.,required within the scope of this specialry to facilitate the �
commissioning process. The listed Sub-Contractor will perform tests and verification
procedures required by the commissioning process when requested by the
Cominissioning Authority and directed by the General Contractor.
"�
C. Owner/Operator:
1. Owner/Operator may schedule personnel to participate in commissioning process.
2. Owner/Operator will advise the Commissioning Authority regarding changes in building �
occupancy,usage,or functional requirements. �
PART 2-PRODUCTS �
2.1 IN STRUMENTATION �
A. Instrumentation will be provided by agency performing prior tests. Instruments will be operated
by individual agency requested by the Commissioning Authoriry,as specified elsewhere herein. �
PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
3.1 GENERAL
A. Commissioning Authority will participate in the Final Construction Phase of the Project to �
assure coinpliance with specific Cominissioning Requirements.
3.2 PROCEDURE �
A. Attend Construction Meeting and establish reyuirements for the Commissioning Process �
throughout Construction Phase.
B. Prepare and submit to the Owner's representative BCER En�ineering, Inc. after contract �
award,a Commissioning Plan which shall outline:
1. Responsibility of each trade affected by Commissioning as required by appropriate �
section of this specification.
2. Requirement for documentation as listed elsewhere herein. �
3. Requirements for documentation of tests and inspections required by Code Authorities.
4. Requirements for the Commissioning Program during specified operational seasons, part
and full loads as further delineated in PART 3.3. �
. �
MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING 230800 -2 �
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 230800—MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING HVAC UPGRADE
�" 3.3 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
�
A. Mechanical System Commissioning shall begin after HVAC equipinent and systeins,along with
� related equipment,systems, structures and areas are complete.
�' B. Verify TAB Readings, such as:
� 1. Supply and Return Air CFM Quantities
. 2. Fan Performance
� 3. Branch Duct Readings
4. Refrigeration Side Performance
r
� C. Verify calibration of thermostats and related controls,such as:
1. Reheat coils
r 2. Valve Positions
� 3. Damper Position
�
D. Verify readings of reinote data and control systems, such as:
� 1. Temperature
�. 2. Air Flow
3. Damper Positions
�'� 4. Equipment Status
` 5. Schedules
,, E. Verify operation of system modes, such as economy cycle, smoke removal and in specific:
l. Damper and Fan Operation
` 2. Smoke Detector Response
3. Zone Response
r
� F. Verify that total HVAC System is performing to provide conditions as outlined in the Contract
Documents,including seasonal,part and full load conditions.
�•
r COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
� The following Commissioning Checklists are provided to illustrate the minimum infonnation which
should be included in the Commissioning Checklist Final Report.
Y
,� COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST-DUCTWORK
� 1. Prior to Functional Performance Test: �
a. Ductwork complete, as-built shop drawings submitted, duct pressure and leakage test
�- complete.
b. Duct Static Pressure Sensor installed, calibrated and transmitting 4-20 MA signal to fan
�" speed controller.
c. Smoke/Fire Dampers installed as required with access; verify status as to open/closed
� position.
I� d. Test and Balance Operation is complete.
� 2. Personnel present during demonstration:
a. General Contractor and Mechanical, Controls and Balancing Contractor
� b. Owner's Representative
3. Demonstrate operation of dampers.
My
�
M MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING 230800-3
�
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
230800—MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING HVAC UPGRADE
4. Results: �
a. The Coinmissioning Authority shall report results obtained in Item 3. above.
b. If specified equipment perfonnance is not verified, the Commissioning Authority shall
report remedial action required and re-schedule Functional Performance Test. �
5. Reports:
a. Submit reports of Functional Performance Test in Item 3. above to Engineer.
COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST-AIR HANDLING UNITS �
1. Priar to Functional Perfonnance Test:
a. Verify unit is properly installed, securely fastened to floar with vibration isolators, access �
� doors are operable and sealed, dampers and casing undainaged, insulation, drain pan and
interior are not damaged. Check and verify condensate drainage is unobstructed.
� b. Verify power available to unit disconnect and control panel. �
c. Verify DX piping is connected to cooling coils,pressure tested, and cleaned.
d. Verify control valves and damper actuators are installed, control power is energized and
valves/dampers operable. �
e. Verify variable speed supply fan controller is energized with control power source
available. �
£ Verify shipping blocks on supply fan isolation rails are reinoved, fan drive and inotor
adjusted,check rotation. �
ig. Verify return fan drive and inotor adjusted, check rotation. �
� h. Verify construction start-up T & B filters removed and replaced with new filters. During
testing, completely blanket filters with filter media to simulate 0.5 in W.C. pressure drop �
(1/2 dirty filters).
i. Test and Balance Report submitted.
2. Personnel present during demonstration: �
a. General Contractor and Mechanical, Balancing,and Controls Contractor
b. Owner's Representative �
3. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of air handling unit (AHU), as "`�
per specification,including the following: �
a. Activate AHU's using control system command.
b. The following Sequence of Control shall be verified: �
Start-Up:
1) Minimuin and economizer outside air damper closed.
2) Return air damper open. �
3) Relief air damper closed.
4) Low temperature cut-out allows start of fan if temperature inside unit is above
45 degree F.
c. Nonnal Day-Tiine Operation - Ambient temperature above specified economizer ""
changeover. �
1) Minimuin outside air damper open.
2) Economizer outside air damper closed. �
3) Return air damper open.
4) Relief air damper closed.
� d. Economizer Cycle outside air temperature less than specified economizer changeover. �
1) Miniinuin outside air damper open.
2) Economizer outside air damper modulated to maintain 60 adj degree F supply air.
3) Relief air damper modulates to relief economizer supply air.
4) Air cooled condensing unit off.
�
MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING 230800 -4 �
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
230800—MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING HVAC UPGRADE
�' e. Verify VAV fan inlet vain controller calibration and inaintenance of duct static pressure
� 1.5 in W.C.+02 in during 20 percent to 100 percent of design air flow.
£ Verify air flow balance,outside air/return air,during variable unit air flow conditions.
� 4. Results:
�, a. The Commissioning Authority shall report results obtained in Item 3 above.
b. If specified equipment perfonnance is not verified, Commissioning Authority shall report
� remedial action required and re-schedule Functional Performance Test.
+� 5. Reports:
a. Submit reports of Functional Performance Test in Item 3. above to Engineer.
r�
� COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST-BAS CONTROLS SYSTEM
1. Prior to Functional Perfonnance Test:
" a. All control devices are in place, operable, calibrated, and communicating with local
� control panels and operatar interface tenninal coimnunicating witb local control panels
and operator interface terminal(CRT).
r b. Test and verify power supplies, wiring, low voltage transformers, allowable voltage
� drops, and related interlocks are available and meet specifications. Continuity has been
checked.
c. Verify that control software programs have been loaded, edited and operational.
� d. Controlled devices, mechanical equipment, actuators, and sensors are complete and
� operable.
e. Interrupt building power supply for thirty (30) ininutes, re-energize, verify software
" packages and programming remained intact and operable after interruption.
�" 2. Personnel present during demonstration:
a. General,Mechanical, Electrical,and Controls Contractor
� b. Owner's Representative
�" 3. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of the controls system, as per
� specification,and the following:
a. Sensing Element: Verify wall mounted sensing eleinents are located per plans, securely
� mounted on wall with protective cover. Furnish plans, securely mounted on wall with
protective cover. Furnish calibrated digital thennometer 40-105 degree F + 0.5 degree F
�`�� accuracy to verify reporting temperature of each sensing element. At each sensing
�,, element, compare temperature sensed vs. actual temperature. Query each sensing
element from local control panel and CRT; allowable variance is 0.5 degree F froin
� digital thermometer.
b. Follow procedure described in Item a. above for all temperature-sensing devices.
� c. Air Handling Unit: Refer to demonstration procedure in applicable section. At CRT,
� reset leaving air teinperature setpoint, log response of AHU's zone control valves, space
temperatures, and system flow in system.
� d. For all controls Functional Perfonnance Test,prepare report in fonnat as follows:
�n Binary Points (per specified points list):
�„ 1) Verify YES NO
Command Issued
�, Command Accepted _ _
Command Executed
�'` Controlled Device Responded
� Feedback Verified Response _ _
r.
p� MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING 230800-5
IW
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
230800–MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING HVAC UPGRADE
Analog Points (per specified points list): �
INITIAL* FINAL*
2) Verify YES NO STATUS STATUS
Coinmand Issued — — �
Command Accepted
Command Executed
Controlled Device Responded
Feedback Verified Response _ _ �
*Status/Readings to be reported as follows:
Control Signal �
�Actual System Effect: Air flow,temperature,pr�essure,etc.
For interlocked devices,positioners,multiple points of control for each coinmand, list
_ effect and response on all devices. �
4. Results:
a. The Commissioning Authority shall report results obtained in Item 3 above.
b. If specified equipment performance is not verified, Commissioning Authoriry shall report �
remedial action required and re-scheduled Functional Performance Test.
5. Reparts:
a. Submit reports of Functional Perfonnance Test in Item 3. above to Engineer. �
�
COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST–AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS �
1. Priar to Functional Perfonnance Test.
a. Verify unit is properly installed, clearances have been maintained, unit is securely
fastened to curb with vibration isolators, access doars are operable, unit is not damaged �+�I
and hail/vandalism guards are in place. Construction debris has been removed. Tighten
set screws and fans turn freely.
b. Verify power is available to unit disconnect and control panel.
1) Wiring complies with applicable codes and ordinances.
2) Verify that nameplate electrical data is compatible with power supply. "'�
3) Verify phase voltage in-balance is no great than 10%.
4) Verify proper rotation. �
c. Verify Dx piping is complete,pressure tested and charged.
1) Verify piping is properly insulated and coinplete.
2) Verify that traps have been provided at the base of each major riser. �"�1
d. Verify expansion valve, sight glass, and filter/dryer is installed per manufacturer's �
instructions.
e. Verify liquid and suction line service valves are open.
£ Verify oil is visible in compressor sight glass.
g. Verify crankcase heaters are firmly attached to compressors, and have been on for a min. ""�
of 24 hours.
2. Personnel present during demonstration: �
a. General Contractor and Mechanical,Controls, and Balancing Contractars.
b. Owner's representative.
3. Functional Performance Test: There should be adequate building load, Contractor shall verify �
operation of air cooled condensing unit(ACCU) as per specification,including the following.
a. Activate ACCU using contro] system command.
b. The following sequence of control shall be verified.
�
MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING 230800 -6 }�
rr
'
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 230800—MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING HVAC UPGRADE
� c. Startup: Record all operating parameters on approved fonns.
1) Verify stage one fan starts and rotation is correct.
2) Verify stage one compressor ramps up to full capacity.
� 3) Verify stage two fan starts and rotation is correct.
4) Verify stage two compressor ramps up to full capaciry.
5) Allow control system to control space temperature, unit shall cycle on stage one
� and stage two as needed to ineet space temp setpoint. �
6) Verify oil pressure.
�' 7) Verify suction and discharge pressures.
8) Verify liquid line sight glass is clear and dry.
� 9) Verify operation of hot gass bypass solenoid/valve.
10) Unit shall be enabled by a signal from the control panel.
11) The unit shall stage up to inaintain space temp setpoint. First stage of coinpressor
�' shall cycle on within 3 min. of call for cooling.
� 12) ACCU shall control fan stages to maintain proper head pressure.
13) Liquid line solenoid valve shall be energized anytime a compressor is operating.
� 14) If stage one compressor should fail to start, stage two compressor shall energize
and operate to inaintain space teinp setpoint. �
r
`' END OF SECTION 230800
�
'
,
'
'
,
'
'
'
�
� MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING 230800-7
�
'
P
CenturyLink VAIL
e 230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
r
�, SECTION 230900-DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet)
F
PART1 -GENERAL
�
� l.l DESCRIPTION OF WORK
F
L
A. Provide a direct-digital control (DDC) system per the project documents, point list, interoperability
,.
tables, drawings and specifications. Include all engineering, programming, controls and installation
materials,installation labor,commissioning,start-up,training final project documentation and warranty.
� 1. The DDC system shal I consist of high-speed BACnetIP,peer-to-peer network of DDC controllers,
a dedicated server,a Personal Computer Operator Workstation(OWS)and printer.Provide remote
� access using a standard client server web browser to access the control system graphics,
parameters and change adjustable set points with password protection.
2. The direct-digital control system shall be native BACnet. All new work stations, controllers,
devices and components shall be listed by BACnet Testing Laboratories(BTL) with accessibility
� using a Web browser interface, and shall communicate exclusively using the ASHRAE Standard
� 135 BACnet communications protocol without the use of gateways, unless otherwise allowed by
this Section of the technical specifications and specifically shown on the design drawings.
�
a. If used,gateways shall support the ASHRAE Standard 135 BACnet communications
4 protocol.
r 3. Contractor shall be responsible for connecting the new Direct Digital Contro] (DDC)
�
system to a Century Link secure VPN connection for remote access to the system.
Contractor shall coordinate with Century Link personnel to identify an owner provided
�, static IP address that will not accept system wide updates("pushes").
w 4. The work administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall include all labor,
materials, special tools, equipment, enclosures, power supplies, software, software licenses,
r project specific software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring tubing,
installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, submittals, testing, verification,
'" commissioning training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling
administration, supervision, management, insurance, warranty, specified services and items
" required far complete and fully functional controls systems.
4.
5. The control systems shall be designed such that each mechanical system shall operate under stand-
� alone mode. The contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall
provide controllers for each mechanical system. In the event of a network communication failure,
W- or the loss of any field controller, the control system shall continue to operate independently.
Failure of the operator work station(s) (OWS) shall have no effect on the field controllers,
� including those involved with global strategies.
�"' 6. The control system shall accommodate no less than two (2) operator work stations, the control
system shall also accommodate web-based users simultaneously, and access to the system should
!" be limited only by operator password.
�
7. The control system will provide for future expansion to include monitoring of card access, fire
*, alarm,energy management and lighting control systems.
� B. The Contractor shall become aware of the Commissioning requirements outlined in Specification Section
230800.Change orders shall not be considered for time associated with these requirements.
�,<
�
�r DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900- 1
1r.
,
CenturyLink VAiL �
230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
C. The Contractor shall become aware of the Method of Procedure requirements outlined in Division 1. �
Change orders will not be considered for time associated with Method of Procedure requirements.
D. General: The Control System Contractor sha11 provide a complete new control system using new control �
devices to replace existing devices to operate as specified. The Contractar shall inspect the existing
conditions prior to submitting a proposal. The existing temperature control system devices, dampers,
operators, wiring, conduit, air piping, valves, etc., not being modified and which are no longer utilized,
shall be removed,and not abandoned in place. �
1r1(
E. The Control System for this project wi11 be referred to as a Building Automation System(BAS).
F. Total quantity and type of control points shall consist of specifications, drawings and as required to �
complete the Sequence of Operation as specified. Additional points shall be provided as required to meet � +I�
all operational functions, safeties, monitoring and reporting requirements. The Drawings and
Specifications are not intended to show all details necessary to make the system complete and operable. �
G. The BAS shall include all control devices,valves,interlocks, field devices, hardware, software,automatic
dampers, piping, fittings, wire, conduit, etc., as specified, required and connected so as to perfonn all
functions and operate according to the specified sequences. �
H. The Contractor shall leave operable existing controls in operation until the BAS is tested and proven �
operative. At that point, and with concurrence from the Owner and the Engineer,the Contractar shall be
�
responsible for reinoving existing controls which are no longer necessary. Start-up of the BAS system,
and any installation work that requires the interruption of the normal operation of any piece of equipment, �
shall be scheduled with the Owner.If the interruption of the normal operation of any piece of equipment
during normal working hours is unacceptable to the Owner, then it shall be scheduled during after hours �
(night or weekend).
1. The premium labor costs associated with off-hour work shall be included as part of the contract.
Change orders for off-hour work will not be considered.
�
I. This installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the
Owner or Engineer in writing. Unless approved otherwise, all products (including firmware revisions)
used in this installation shall have been used in at least twelve(12)projects prior to this installation. The
previous sites may be located anywhere in the U.S.A. This requirement is not intended to restrict the
Contractor to the use of any outdated equipment. Therefore, all products used in this installation shall ++�
also be currently under manufacture and have available, for at least ten (10)years after completion of the
contract, including spare parts, board repairs and software revisions. If the above requirements are �
mutually exclusive,the Contractor shall include a specific statement to this effect in the Bid.
J. Refer to other Division 23 sections for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies and dampers in
mechanical systems. �
K. Provide electrical work as required, complying with requirements of Division 26 sections including, but
not limited to raceways, wires, cables, electrical identification, supporting devices and electrical
connections for equipment. Work includes,but is not limited to,the following: �
l. Interlock and control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices and unit control
panels.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all additional electrical and other costs involved to ��
accommodate the temperature control system panel,motors and electrical devices requiring power
which differs from the power requirements shown on the Electrical Drawings.
3. The Contractor shall procure the services of a CenturyLink Pre-Approved Electrical
Contractor to complete any Division 26 work associated with the Temperature Control �
scope.
� �
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-2 �
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
�' 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�
A. Contractor's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in installation, commissioning and servicing of
� digital control equipment, of types and sizes required, whose firm has been in business in similar service
for not less than five(5)years.Contractor shall have an established warking relationship with the Control
� System Manufacturer of not less than,three(3)years.
" B. Only those Contractors who are certified to install DDC systems from specified manufacturers are
allowed to bid temperature controls. All bidders shall make available, upon the Owner's request, open
�' book unit pricing of all materials and labor.
�
� C. The system shall be installed by competent mechanics, regularly employed by the Temperature Control
� � Contractor.
D. No Field Devices shall be multiplexed to a single I/O point unless specified. Each device or sensing point
shall be terminated at a unique location on the Control Panel, Dedicated Controller or Slave and be
e associated with a unique software point on the BAS.
" E. Codes and Standards:
� 1. All equipment and the installation shall comply with the requirements of all applicable local and
national codes including but not limited to the currently enforced edition of the International
,, Building Code,Fire Code,Electrical Code,and all applicable codes of the National Fire Protection
Association including the National Electrical Code.
� 2. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested,listed and labeled by UL
and comply with NEMA Standards.
� 3. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and devices for
electric control systems.
�' 4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control sequences.
�
� F. The Temperature Control Contractor shall cooperate with other contractars performing work on this
project necessary to achieve a complete and neat installation. To that end, each contractar shall consult
� the drawings and specifications for all trades to determine the nature and extent of others work.
� G. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to work in cooperation with the Owner and with all other
contractors and employees rendering such assistance and so arrange his work such that the entire project
�� will be delivered complete in the best possible condition and in the shortest time. �
b.
�
13 PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
� A. Project Documentation: All custom software, passwords, programs, code, databases, graphic files and
drawings (whether hard copy or electronic files)prepared for this system shall be the exclusive property
�• of the Owner and shall not be reproduced or distributed without prior written permission from the Owner.
1�
1.4 SUBMITTALS
�
�, A. Submit in accardance with Division 1 and 23 submittal requirements.
� B. In addition to the requirements set forth in Paragraph A above,the following shall be included in the shop
�� drawing submittals including,but not limited to:
� 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data sheets for each control device
furnished, each data sheet shall be labeled indicating its' control drawing descriptor. When
+r manufacturers data sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data that is
�
�' DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-3
�
i �
CenturyLink VAIL �
230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BAGnet) HVAC UPGRADE
specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. �
Submittals shall include the following:
a. Indicating dimensions;
b. Capacities; �
c. Performance characteristics;
d. Electrical characteristics,
e. Finishes of materials;
f. Installation,start-up,test and verification instructions. �
2. Control system drawings containing pertinent data to provide a functional operating system and a
sequence of operation.
3. Detailed wiring diagrams.
4. A floor plan of each area with a detailed new conduit/wiring layout shall be included. The plan �
shall indicate all conduit locations within +/- 2-feet of actual installed location. All walls, doors
and temperature control devices shall be accurately shown.
5. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and all control �
devices. Identify all control points with labeling.
6. Label each control device with set point or adjustable range of control. Provide a bill of materials
with manufacturer's part number.
7. Indicate all required point-to-point electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of �
wiring that are existing and portions to be field-installed.
8. Provide details of faces of control panels,including controls,instruments,and labeling.
9. Include verbal description of sequence of operation and reference each device described by
schematic symbol used.
10. Provide a detailed listing of all software program code written for each system. �
11. Provide a point list with database input information to include a point name, address, base and
span,action and other required information. �
12. Provide a detailed test plan and procedure for each HVAC system and for each type of terminal
unit control including valves. The test plans shall fully define reporting methods, procedure,
equipment utilized, milestones for the tests, identifying the simulation programs, and personnel.
The test procedures shall be developed from the test plans and shall consist of instructions for test �
execution and evaluation. A test report form shall be developed for each point and sequence of
operation. Commissioning procedures shall be provided for each HVAC system and for each type ��
of terminal unit control system. The procedure shall include set point, prop. band, integral,
�
derivative,mode constraints input,output settings,tuning procedures.,etc.
�rlll
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Submittal Data and Shop Drawings shall be prepared and submitted in the following formats: �
l. All drawings prepared for the project shall be developed using the AutoCad CADD progra�n Rev.
14.0 or most current version, (or a CADD package capable of producing AutoCad "DXF"
compatible format files). ''�A
2. All submittals data shall be the same size for any group of information and shall be in a three (3)
screw and post binder. (NO EXCEPTIONS). All the information shall be indexed and tabbed
with reference to the specific section of these specifications.
3. The format for different groups of submittal information are as follows:
a. Control drawings, building plans (including complete floar plans), schematics and system ,,�
configurations shall be CADD prepared drawing, bound and indexed. Drawings that
cannot represent the total information on an individual ANSI size B (11" x 17") drawing, �
i.e., a building plan, shall be noted with appropriate match lines, cross references and key
plans.
b. Technical data, sequence of operations, materia] list, point lists, program listings, UO
schedules, operatar's and programmer's manuals, etc., shall be type written, original '�
product data sheets or CADD prepared drawings,ANSI Size A or ANSI Size B.
4. Upon completion of the project and acceptance of systems, the Contractor shall provide to the
Owner two (2) hard copies and one(1) electronic copy(CD or DVD) of Record (As-Built) Shop �
Drawings.
err
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-4 �
'
A
CenturyLink VAIL
'• 230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
" E. Shop drawings shall include riser diagram depicting locations of all controllers and workstations, with
associated network wiring. Also included shall be individual schematics of each mechanical system
showing all connected points with reference to their associated controller, written operational sequences
and testing and commissioning reports and checklists.
�• F. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for approval priar to final completion. When the Architect/Engineer
requires, the Contractor will resubmit with the corrected ar additional submittal data. This procedure
"� shall be repeated until all corrections are made to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the submittals are
� fully reviewed.
�
G. Contractor agrees that shop drawing submittals processed by the Architect/Engineer are not change
� orders, that the purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the
,n Architect/Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his
understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install, and by
� detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. The Contractor shall be responsible
for space requirements, configuration, performance, changes in bases, supports, structural members and
� openings in structure,and other apparatus that may be affected by their use.
" H. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals
�,
and the contract documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior
to or after shop drawing submittals are processed by the Architect/Engineer, the design drawings and
�
specifications shall control and shall be followed. If alternates do not meet these requirements,it shall be
this Contractor's responsibility to remove them and install material originally specified, at no cost to the
� Owner.
.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
�
A. Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain cartons
" through shipping,storage and handling as required to prevent any equipment damage,and to eliminate all
a dirt and moisture from equipment. Store all equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.
.�
PART2-PRODUCTS
w
" 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTiJRERS AND CONTRACTORS
�
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, install a direct digital control system from one (1) of the
following manufacturers/system integrators:
A 1. Andover
` 2. Alerton
3. Automated Logic
�� 4. Delta Controls
5. Siemens
�' 6. JCI
�" B. All BAS components shall be by one of the above manufacture's, except when "controls provided with
� the unit," "factory-mounted controls," "unit manufacturer provided controls," etc, are referenced by this
specification, `BAS Components" includes BAS Panels/Routers/controllers, and operator interface,
�„
color-graphics interface, control and programming software. Valves, actuators, sensors, conventional
thermostats and other stand-alone controls and other field devices need not be by the same manufacturer
�
�
�� DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-5
iF
i �'
CenturyLink VAIL �
230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
2.2 GENERAL PRODUCTS DESCRIPTION �
A. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be capable of integrating multiple building functions
including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy management, historical data �
collection and archiving, maintenance support, custom processes and manual override monitoring. All
products and materials installed shall be suitable for the intended application requirements including but
not limited to:
1. Accuracy �
2. Rangeability
3. Temperature and pressure ranges
4. Shutoff pressures
5. Differential pressures �
6. Repeatability
7. Materials of construction suitable with the environment and/or media in which they are in contact
with �
8. Code compliance
9. Velocities
B. The BAS shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality '�
through the addition of sensors,actuators,controllers,and operator devices.The system architecture shall
support a minimmn spare capacity of 20%for all types of DDC devices and all point types included in the
initial installation.The BAS shal]consist of the following:
1. BACnetIP Architecture �
2. Operator Work Station �
3. Portable Operators Warkstation
4. Building Controllers �
5. Application Specific Controllers
6. Point Expansion Modules
7. Building Routers
8. Auxiliary Control Devices �
9. Valves
rr�
10. Dampers
11. Actuators
12. Power Supplies and Line Filtering �
13. Wiring and Raceways �
14. Sensors/Transmitters
C. BAS architecture shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control �
execution. Each DDC controller shall operate independently by performing its' own specified control,
alarm management, operator UO, and historical data collection. The failure of any single component or
network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices. '"'�
D. Each DDC controller shall continue to execute its control software, sample input points, and update
output points without connection to the DDC panel network,Controller network or an operator interface.
E. All DDC controllers shall be able to access data from, or send control commands and alarm reports .+
directly to, any other DDC controller or combination of controllers on the network without dependence
upon a central processing device.All DDC controllers shall also be able to send alarm reports to multiple �
operator workstations without dependence upon a central processing device.
F. The BAS shall allow third party software to operate on a personal computer operator workstation without
any degradation to the controls operating normally. �
G. Remote Communications: The BAS shall be remotely accessible via an Internet connection provided by
others. Inherent in the system's design shall be the ability to expand or modify the network via the local �
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-6 �
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� �. 230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
�
'` area network, or auto-dial telephone line modem connections, or via a combination of the two (2)
networking schemes.
k
H. All DDC controllers and application-specific controllers shall be connected to DDC routers via
� "Controller Network(s)" (BACnet MS/TP). A sufficient number of DDC routers shall be provided to
� support the number of controllers and application-specific controllers required.
r I. A sufficient number of DDC routers/panels/controllers shall be provided to meet the memory needs of the
BAS programming alarming and trending(24 samples far each point alone,not including that needed for
�' Measurement and Verification(M&V)along with 25%spare capacity for future use.
�" J. A sufficient number of DDC routers/panels/controllers and application-specific controllers (here after
� referred to in general as "DDC device(s)") and point expansion modules shall be provided to meet the
point needs of the project.Point termination types shall include:
1. Analog Input(AI)—Thermistor,0-10 VDC or 4-20 mADC
� 2. Binary Input (BI) — Monitoring of dry contacts, including contact closure "pulses" up to 10 per
� second.
3. Analog Output(AO)—0-10 VDC,0-20 VDC or 4-20 mADC
� 4. Binary Output(BO)—Two state DC voltage signal ar magnetically held dry contact closure.
�' K. An application-specific controller shall not be used for systems/equipment that re�uire custom application
programming to meet the Sequence of Operation (i.e., if an application-specific controller is used, the
`' factory-provided control software and program must be able to perform the Sequence of Operation
� without"upper level"control from a DDC panel,etc.).
,, L. Digital Communications to Third-party Controls
� 1. The BAS is required to send/receive information via digital communication technologies(e.g.
u Ethernet/IP, EIA-485); application protocols (e.g., BACnet, Modbus) to specified Third-Party
controls provided under this or other sections of the specification (e.g. chillers, VFDs, BTU
r meters,electrical submeters,lighting controls,etc.).
� 2. See the Specification sections of the equipment involved, for the type of communications
technology/interface (e.g. the data link layer protocol), and application protocol used by each of
the Third-Party controls,and for the list of data to be shared with these controls.
�"`"� 3. Communications not requiring a gateway (i.e., BACnet): Design the BAS to include the DDC
� device models (with optional modules if necessary) that provide the necessary data link layer
interfaces.
�'
M. Hardware Override Monitoring: The BAS shall monitor the status or position of all overrides, and
� include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has been
inhibited. The BAS shall also collect override activity information for daily and monthly reports.
r
N. Power Fail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all
� standalone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile
memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery back-up shall be
�� � provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of seventy-two(72)hours.
�,, 1. Upon restoration of narmal power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full operation
without manual intervention.
�, 2. Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading
the DDC panel via the local area network and Internet connection.
i�
I""" 2.3 OPERATOR WORK STATION
Y�
A. Operator Interface Software—The software shall include the following capabilities:
A'
�
,� DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-7
�r
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
1. Graphic screens display of custom graphic screens with dynamic point information and the ability �
to show animation by shifting image properties based on the status of the point.
a. The terms "graphic screens" and "graphic(s)" in this specification refers to graphical
i�nages viewed via a PC running operatar interface software ar a PC viewing graphical �
images on web pages via a web browser.
b. Graphic Generation: Graphic files shall be created with the use of a graphics generation
package furnished with the system. The graphics generation package shall also provide the
capability of capturing or converting graphics from other programs such as AutoCAD. �
c. Graphics Library: Furnish a library of standard HVAC system/equipment graphics screens
such as chillers,boilers,air handlers,terminals,fan coils,unit ventilators,etc.;and standard
symbols for HVAC components including fans, pumps, coils valves, piping, dampers,
ductwork,etc. �
2. System Applications—Provide the following:
a. System Databases Save and Restore: Automatic (when changes occur) and/or manual
backup of the system database(e.g., a DDC panel point database and/or control program). �
The operator shall also be able to manually initiate a download of a specified database to
any DDC device in the BAS.
b. System Configuration: Provide application for BAS configuration (DDC device
communications addressing,point definition,etc.). �
c. Help: Provide a context sensitive help system to assist the operator in operation of the
BAS. "�
d. Security: Each operator shall be required to log on to the BAS with a unique name and
password in order to view edit, or delete data. System security level shall be configurable �""
for each operator via the site administrator login. �
e. System Diagnostics: the System shall automatically monitor the operation of all DDC
devices including network communications and provide an alarm when a failure occurs. �
f. Standard BAS Operating Features:
1) Point/Data Overrides/Modifications: Output points and system data(i.e., set points)
shall be modifiable (i.e., auto vs. manual and overridden value) via a link to each
item's graphic screen image. �
2) Alarm Processing: An alarm log with acknowledgement and alarm clearing
functions,the ability to configure alarm limits,and system reactions(e.g., an alarm �"
message,communications method,etc.).
3) Alarm Logs: The ability to define a custom historical trend log for any data in the �'
system.The data can be displayed tabular or graphical. �
4) Scheduling: A graphical method for scheduling equipment operation including
normal,holiday and exception scheduling. �
5) Utilize real time 3-D graphics for building control and visualization.
6) The system is to utilize a Windows based object-oriented navigation system.
7) System must be capable of paging, printing, texting and emailing alarm
notifications. �
8) System must be able to analyze/display no fewer than eight trend logs in a real-time
graph.
3. Control Software Editors: The software shall allow for Operator editing of all control applications
including the following: �
a. Application Specific Controller: A full screen graphical editor for each type of application
that allows the operator to view and change the configuration, name control parameters,
and set points for all controllers.
b. Custom Control Programming: A graphic for creating modifying, and debugging the �
custom control programming for all routers/panels controllers.
c. Graphic Design Software: Software for generating new real-time 3-D graphics for use in
the operator work station. �
4. Web Server: This shall, as a minimum allow PC's running web browser software to perform all
the capabilities described above except Graphic Generation, System Database and Restore, System
Configuration,and Control Software Editors.
a. The software shall support an unlimited amount of client users. �
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-8 �
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
� b. Point/Data Overrides/Modifications: Output points and system data (i.e., set points) shall
� be modifiable(i.e., auto vs. manual and overridden value)via a link to each item's graphic
screen image.
P c. Alarm Processing: An alarm log with acknowledgement and alarm clearing functions: and
the ability to configure alarm limits, and system reactions (e.g., an alarm message,
d communications method,etc.).
d. Trend Logs: The ability to define a custom historical trend log for any data in the system.
� The time stamp data can be displayed tabular or graphical.
i e. Scheduling: a graphical method for scheduling equipment operation including normal,
�' holiday and exception scheduling.
£ Utilize real time 3-D graphics for building control and visualization.
� g. The system is to utilize a Windows based object-oriented navigation system.
� h. The system shall allo�v tenant access to view and�adjust local set point as well as view
equipment in their space.
�, i. System must be capable of paging,printing and emailing alarm notifications.
j. System must analyze no fewer than eight trend logs in a real-time graph.
�. 5. Historical Data Management: Record extended periods of data from the DDC system which shall
be integrated and viewable within the operator work station. The historical system should
r automatically restart following a power failure and will automatiCally determine the optimal time
` to back up data from the controllers to minimize data loss. The data should be stored in a SQL
�' database to allow for access from third-party tools.
6. Other Requirements:
"' a. Third-Party Software:Provide any other software needed for the operation of the operator
� interface software,such as Microsoft SQL or NET, .AWN,Excel,etc.
B. Hardware—Provide the following:
� 1. GeneraL• The specifications for the equipment below shall be the miniinum provided. Expanded
L hardware capabilities(e.g., faster processor, larger hard drive, etc.)shall be provided based on the
BAS manufacturer's operator interface requirements and which are needed to meet the BAS needs
r for data storage including that for M&V(along with 25%spare capacity).
2. Operator Work Station and Web Server
� a. Operator Work station PC: Microsoft Windows-based desktop PC including Windows
Professional operating system, MS Internet Explorer 8, MS Excel 2007, Intel I7 series
� processor with 2.SGHz speed minimum, 4GB RAM, 256 MB graphics card, one 16x
� CD/DVD +/-RW drive, 7200 rpm dual RAID 1TB hard disk drive, 10/100/1000 MHz
Ethernet card,a 19"LCD color monitor,PS/2 standard keyboard,two button optical mouse
�, and a laser printer with cable.
1) Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) — For backup power to all Operator Work
k station Components: APC Smart 750VA USB and serial 120 VAC, APC art
#SUA750,or equivalent.
�• 2) All operator interface software functions listed above(except the Web Server)shall
� be accessible from this PC (as a Client to the Web Server and/or with the operator
interface software installed on this PC).
3) A separate PC shall be provided if the operator interface software architecture does
!"° not allow the Web Server software capability to be operated on the same PC as that
�, required for the other operator Interface software capabilities.
b. Portable Operator's TerminaL• MS Windows-based notebook-style PC including RAM
�„, memory of sufficient capacity to meet the requirements of the operator interface software,
color screen(but not ]0"),one CD/DVD drive ,one 720rpm 160 GB minimum hard disk,
�� integral pointing device, and an Ethernet port. This terminal shall be configured for
interface with any DDC device in the BAS: furnish all required serial and/or network
� communication ports,and all cables for proper BAS operation.
c. Number of PCs Supported: The operator interface software provided for the above
hardware (except for the Web Server capability) shall be fully functional for two (2)
simultaneous PCs(i.e., so that the software can be used simultaneously on both the Work
� station and Portable PCs).
Y,.
a DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-9
►.
�
CenturyLinl� VAIL 1
230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE �ri
2.4 BUILDING CONTROLLERS �
� �A. Building Controller is BTL-listed BACnet B-BC device as defined below with non-volatile memory for
operating system software; 72-hour battery-backed read/write memory for custom programming; �
communications support for operator interface and the Controller Network.
B. Building Controller Network-Provide 76.8kps BACnet MS/TP communications(as a master).
C. Point Termination-building controllers shall provide direct point termination throu�h integral point �
connections,point expansion and/or point expansion modules.
1. Point expansion shall communicate with the Building Control Panel via the Panel's
microprocessor bus(i.e., they shall not use EIA-232/485 and/or any type of LAN technology like �
MS/TP).
2. A "point Expansion Module"as defined below shall be installed within the same enclosure as the
associated Building Control Panel. �
2.5 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS
�
A. An application Specific Controller is a BTL- listed BACnet B-AAC or B-ASC device dedicated for use �
with specific equipment and applications. It shall be provided with the no volatile memory far operating
system software; read/write memory far all other purposes; factory-provided control software; and �,
communications support for operator Interface,and the Controller network.
�
B. Application Specific Controllers shall only be used for terminal/zone equipment such as VAV terminal
units, constant-volume terminal units, fan coil units, and heat pumps (i.e., when the factory-provided �
control software meets the Sequence of Operation) or wl�ere explicitly allowed by the Sequence of
Operation.
1. ASC's for pressure-independent VAV-terminal-unit control shall have an integral differential
pressure sensor for air flow measurement and an optionally integral damper actuator. �
.�
C. Each ASC shall have a 76.8Kbps BAC net MS/TP Controller Netwark connection(as an MS/TP Master).
�
2.6 APPLICATION CONTROLLERS �
A. A DDC panel is a BTL-listed BACnet B-BC or B-AAC device with the BACnet options specified below, �
non-volatile memory for operating system software: 72-hour battery-backed read/write memory for
custom control programming, trending, and alarming; real time clock; integra] point or point expansion
terminations;and communications support to other DDC routers/panels. �
B. DDC Router/panel Network: Provide 100baseT Ethernet minimum communications with BACnet/IP
support for interconnection to other DDC routers/panels, operator interfaces, and to an Internet/intranet
connection,if specified.
C. Point Termination-DDC panels shall provide direct point termination through integral point connections, ""�
point expansion and/or point expansion modules.
l. Point expansion shall communicate with the DDC panel via the Pane]'s microprocessor bus (i.e., �
they shall not use EIA-232/485 and/or any type of LAN technology like MS/TP).
2. A "point Expansion Module"as defined below shall be installed within the same enclosure as the
associated DDC panel.
�
�
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900- 10 �
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL
�•� 230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
�' 2.7 POINT EXPANSION MODULE
i
A. A point expansion module provides slaved control(i.e.,it does not execute its own control software)via a
r serial or multi-drop communications connection(e.g.,EIA-485,MS/TP,etc.)froin a DDC device.
i� B. A point expansion module cannot be used as a DDC router/panel/controller or Application specific
Controller,and shall be mounted within the same enclosure as the DDC router/panel/controller is serves.
r
�` 2.8 BUILDING ROUTER
� A. A Building Panel is BTL-listed BACnet B-BC or B-AAC device with the BACnet options specified
a below, non-volatile memory for operating system software; 72-hour battery-backed read/write memory
for custom control programming, trending, and alarming; real time clock; integral point or expansion
,, terminations;and communications support to other DDC routers/panels.
� B. Building Router/Panel Network: Provide 100base T Ethernet minimum communications using the
BACnet/IP data link layer for interconnection to other DDC routers/panels, operator interfaces, and to an
" Internet/Intranet connection,if specified.
�
C. Routing: Provide BACnet Clause 6 Routing (between the specified DDC router and controller network
� technologies)and BAC/IP Broadcast Management(BBMD).
� D. Controller Network: A building router shall be a Master to one or more 76.8kps BACnet MS/TP data
link layer communications connections for DDC controllers and application-specific controllers.
r
� E. Point Termination-Building routers may not be utilized for direct point termination through integral point
�' connections,point expansion and/ar point expansion modules.
�,,�
i
i�
2.9 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES—ELECTRONIC
r
A. Control relays: Plug-in type with dust cover and LED "energized" indicator. Contact rating,
� configuration,and coil voltage suitable for the application.
�" B. Low-Temperature Detection Switches (Freezetats): Provide DPDT low temperature-protection
thermostats of manual-reset type,with sensing elements of the proper length,but in no case less than 20'-
�`� 0" in length. Provide thermostat designed to operate in response to coldest 1'-0" length of sensing
element, regardless of temperature at other parts of element. Support element properly to cover entire
� duct width. Provide separate thermostats for each on 25 sf of coil face area ar fraction thereof. The set
ti„ point shall be 42°F unless otherwise specified on the plans or sequence of operations.
�» C. Current Sensing Switches: Use for all motor-status BI point unless otherwise noted; shall be self-
� powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current. The switch shall be selected to match the current of the
�' application and input requirements of the BAS.
�'" D. Differential Pressure Switches: Used only for duct pressure safety cut—offs unless otherwise noted.
� Adjustable trip pressure with range suitable for the application.
�„ E. On—Off thermostats: Provide thermostats of bi-metal actuated open contact, bellows-actuated enclosed
� snap-switch type, or equivalent. Provide solid-state type with electrical rating to meet the application.
�. Provide with surface mounted ventilated enclosure.
�
w DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900- 11
�,
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
F. Provide duct smoke detectors in HVAC ducts in accordance with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A, except as �
indicated otherwise. Provide UL listed or FM approved detectors, designed specifically for duct
installation. Smoke detectars are to be single pull/double throw to allow for simultaneous fan shut off and
fire alarm detection.
2.10 VALVES
�
A. Control Valves:Provide factory fabricated control valves of appropriate pressure class for the scheduled
service.Provide size-modulating valves for a pressure drop of 3 to 5 PSI for water service and 80%of the �
supply pressure far steam service,unless otherwise noted.Two-position valves shall be line size.
1. Water Service Values: Equal percentage characteristics with range ability of 50 to 1,and �
maximum full flow pressure drop of 5 psig.
2. Steam Service Valves: Linear characteristics with rangeability of 30 to 1,and maximwn fWl flow �
pressure drop of 80 percent of inlet pressure for low pressure systems,and 42 percent for high �
pressure systems
�
3. Single Seated Valves: Cage type trim,providing seating and guiding surfaces for plug on"top and
bottom"guided plugs. �
4. Double Seated Valves: Balanced plug type,with cage trim providing seating and guiding surfaces
on"top and bottom"guided plugs. �
5. Valve Trim and Stems: Polished stainless steel.
6. Packing: Spring-loaded Teflon,self-adjusting. �
7. Terminal Unit Control Valves:Provide control valves for control of terminal units including, but
not necessarily limited to,convectors,finned tube radiation,and fan-coil units that are of integral �
motor type.Provide 2 position or modulating type valves.
�
8. Select valves to fail safe in normally open or closed position as dictated by freeze,humidity, fire
or temperature protection. �ew
9. Valves: 1/2"through 2": Valves shall be constructed with a cast-brass body and screwed ends. �
For 1-1/2"and 2"special duty,valves may be selected by the control manufacturer to have either
bronze ar cast iron bodies with screwed or flanged connections. �
10.Valves:2 1/2"and above: Valves shall be constructed with a cast-iron body and have flanged
connecrions.
^�
B. Butterfly Valves: high performance valves with stainless steel disc and PTFE steel ring shall be used.Body -
shall be carbon-steel body, 150 lb full ANSI rated bi-directional,lug style butterfly type,bi-directional
dead end pressure rating of 285 psi,and temperature rating of-20 to 300 degrees F.Construction features '"""
to include 316 SS electroless nickel plated eccentric rotating disc,dynamic sealed,PTFE seal ring 17-4 Ph �
(ASTM A 564 Cind.H1075 or H1100)stainless steel shaft,TFE chevron stem packing SS/DU TFE
removal of downstream piping and shall be factory pressure tested to 110%of pressure rating.Valves shall
be installed by use of cap screws;threaded rod not acceptable.Tyco Kingston Figure 312 or equal. ��
2.11 DAMPERS ,,,,�
A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design as indicated; 0.108-inch minimum thick, ""
galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting;
�.
wi
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900- 12 ��
'
�°
� CenturyLinl� VAIL
�� 230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
"� damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8
�, inches and length of 48 inches.
1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch diameter,zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware,with nylon blade
r bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-
stainless-steel blade bearings,and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
� 2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
3. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and
� spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper
� area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x Ibf; when
tested according to AMCA 5000.
�
� 2.12 ACTUATORS
�.- A. Electronic
1. Design for direct mounting on the device and attachment to the driving shaft (damper actuator
� only);adjustable angle of rotation or range of actuation;and built in overload protection. Size each
motor for 150% of the application requirement and with sufficient reserve power to provide
� smooth action.
� 2. Modulating actuators shall use a 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mAD signal input to match DDC device AO
signal output, and 24 VAC power. Three-wire, bi-directional motor actuators controlled by BO
point pairs are acceptable on terminal valve boxes,terminal heating/reheat coils, and fan coil units
� only.
3. Two-position actuators shall be a 120 VAC, two-wire, spring return. Spring actuation return
actuation time shall be less than 30 seconds.
� 4. Damper Actuators - 95° rotation maxiinum, with built-in adjustable mechanical stop to limit
rotation to that of the damper and/or to meet TAB requirements.
5. End switches-Provide actuator with integral, adjustable-position indicarion end switches(one for
each fully actuated position)when the actuated device is specified with an end switch binary input
I►" point(s).
W,
B. Provide valve actuators capable of close-off against a pressure greater than the respective pump system
shut-off head.
�"
�,,, C. Failsafe: Provide spring-return failsafe upon loss of power or control signal to the positions as follows:
1. OA dampers-N.C.
� 2. Mixed-air dampers-N.O.
` 3. Relief-and exhaust-air dampers-N.O.
�' 4. HW coil valves-no failsafe required.
�
�wx 2.13 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING
� A. Control transformers shall be UL Listed. Furnish Class 2 current limiting type, or furnish over-current
protection in both primary and secondary circuits far Class 2 service per NEC requirements. Limit
�� connected loads to 80%of rated capacity.
1. DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Unit shall be full-
� wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. Regulation shall be
1.0% line and load combined, with 100 microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit
�` shall have built in over-voltage and over-current protection,and sha11 be able to withstand a 150%
current overload for at least 3 seconds without trip-out or failure.
�" a. Unit shall operate between 0°C and 50°C [32°F and 120°F]. EM/RF shall meet FCC Class
� B and VDE 0871 for Class B,and MIL-STD 810C for shock and vibration.
b. Line voltage units shall be iJL Recognized and CSA Approved.
�'
�
� DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900- 13
6
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
B. Power line filtering: �
1. DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Unit shall be full-
wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. Regulation shall be
� 1.0% line and load combined, with ]00 microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit �
shall have built in over-voltage and over-current protection, and shall be able to withstand a 150%
current overload for at least 3 seconds without trip-out or failure.
a. Dielectric strength of 1,000 volts minimum.
b. Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less. �
c. Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater.
d. Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or better at 40 Hz to ]00 HZ.
2.14 WIRING AND RACEWAYS ,�
A. General: Provide copper wiring, plenum cable, and raceways as specified in the applicable sections of �
Division 26.
B. All insulated wire to be copper conductors,LTL labeled far 90C minimum service.
�
C. All exposed wiring shall be installed in conduit. �
D. Conduits shall not exceed 40 percent maximum fill for single conductar and jacketed cables. �
�
2.15 SENSORS/TRANSMITTERS
A. All input accuracies required by this section shall be end-to-end (from sensing point to BAS display). �
End-to-end accuracy includes all errors due to the sensor, transmitter, wiring and BAS signal
measurement and A/D conversion.
�
B. Thermistors or solid state sensors shall be provided for temperature sensing applications except where
accuracies ar ranges required cannot be met by these devices,RTD's shall be used. The sensors shall be
powered by the BAS Panel or Dedicated Controller. The solid state sensors shall be accurate to within
+/-0.5 degree F over the following ranges and meet the following requirements:
l. Room Type Instruments: 50 degree F to 100 degree F. Sensor shall be surface mounted with a +�
ventilated cover,insulated baseplate and vandalproof screws.
a. Each thermostat have the following features: �
1) Temperture indication,setpoint adjustment,occupied/unoccupied override button.
2. Duct and Plenum Applications: -30 degree F to 240 degree F. Supply, return, exhaust or mixed
air averaging type, which shall have an extended element of sufficient length to cover the entire
duct cross-section with a minimum of three (3) passes. If a single averaging thermistor of '�
sufficient length to meet the preceding are not available, then two (2) or more sensors and AIs
shall be used and averaged in software.
C. Where RTD's are required,they shall be 1,000 OHM platinum type and be supplied with a 4-20 mA DC �
transmitter. The sensor and transmitter shall be a single unit. They shall be accurate to within +/- 1.0
degree F over the range of 32 degree F to 600 degree F.
D. Where thermocouples are required,they shall be Type J and be supplied with a 4-20 mA DC transmitter. �
They shall be accurate to within+/-2.0 degree F over the range of 32 degree F to 1,300 degree F.
E. Provide matched temperature sensors for applications which require both inlet and outlet temperatures of �
any device. Where a"Matched Temperature Sensor Pair" is shown/specified, the sensors shall be tested
and documented by the sensor manufacturer as being accurate to within 0.1°F of each other.
�
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900- 14 �
'
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
�" F. Outdoor Air Temperature and Humidity Transmitter:
� 1. Provide Vaisala HMT 130 relative humidity and temperature probe with installation kit and
radiation shield DTR502B. Probe shall have a temperature measuring range of-40 degree C to
�, +80 degree C with an accuracy of+/- .4 degree C at 68 over the range of the sensor and relative
� � humidity measuring range of 0 to 100 percent RH with an accuracy of 3 percent, 0 to 90 percent
� RH with a repeatability better than 1 percent RH per year. RH and temperature probe shall be
capable of a continuous temperature operating range of-40 degree F to +120 degree F. Provide
• necessary transmitter for output signals.
� ` G. Humidity Transmitter:
L Wall Mounted Humidity Transmitter: Wall mounted humidity transmitter shall be Vaisala Model
"� HMW80. Transmitter shall measure relative humidity from 0 to 100 percent RH, +/- 3 percent
�,,,, accuracy, wall mounted ABS plastic box, with a long range RH stability better than 1 percent
RH/year and temperature compensated over the entire range.
� H. Pressure Sensors,Transmitters and Differential Switches:
1. Air Differential Pressure Transmitters shall be Modus Model T30 or T40 (as required) with an ,
accuracy of+/- 1 percent of range(including non-linearity and hysteresis),solid state circuitry,no
� moving parts, capacitance principle capable of sensing positive, negative and differential
pressures. Transmitter shall have 4-20 mA output signal and be powered by the control system or
� dedicated controller and capable of withstanding momentary overpressure of eight (8) times the
pressure range.
� 2. Differential air pressure switches for filter or proof of airflow status shall be Dwyer Series 1910,
,, with automatic reset,SPDT.
� I. Air and Vacuum Pressure Transmitter: Kele and Associates Model P100GTE, solid state, 4-20 mA
� signal,with a full scale accuracy of 1 percent
i
J. Flow Elements/Transducers:
� 1. VAV terminal Unit: Provide differential-pressure transducer integral to the application-specific
� controller. Connect to pitot-tube element provided with terminal unit.
2. Water Flow:Provide Onicon F-1200 series dual turbine insertion flow meter.
�
K. Differential Pressure Sensors: Differential pressure sensors (air or water) shall be temperature
�, compensated with an accuracy of+/-1%of range and hysteresis of 0.5%of range.
1. Air: Sensor shall be able to withstand a maximum port pressure of lOpsig.
�� 2. Water: Wetted parts shall be stainless steel; sensor shall be able to withstand a maxiinum port
pressure of 250psig and a maximum differential pressure of 150psi or 300% of the rated range,
�' whichever is greater.
'" L. Carbon Monoxide(CO)Controllers
� L Combination controller/sensor or separate controller with multiple remote-mounted sensors.
Design shall be for room (not duct) applications. ACI A/CO-R controller/sensor, Honeywell
� Vulcain 301C controller with 201T sensors,or equivalent.
2. Each controller shall have an integral LCD,dry contact alarm relay,and buzzer.
I� 3. Provide one controller per parking level minimum (applicable to controller with separate remote-
mounted sensors only).
� 4. Provide a sufficient number of controller/sensors ar sensors based on the manufacturer coverage
� data.
5. Set the unit to close the alarm relay based on the manufacturer-recommended time-based set
points needed to meet all applicable codes/standards.
�
� M. Wall/Duct Mount CO�Transmitter:
1. Description; Measure and transmit CO, levels ranging from 0 to 2,000 parts per million ppm.
�, Silicone-based CARBOCAPOO sensor delivers high accuracy and long-term measurement stability
i
�^ DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900- 15
yr.
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
� (±100 ppm)over a five-year period without calibration. It shall consist of an infrared (IR) source, �
� a sample cell, and IR detector, and a tunable interference filter that enables measurements at two
wave lengths.Reference measurements made using a tunable interference filter.
2. Model; �
a. Wall Model;CD-Wxx-00-0 Wall Mount CO� transmitter.
b. Duct Model; CD-Pxx-00-0 Series Duct Mount COz transmitter.
3. Specifications; �
a. Measuring Range:0 to-2000ppm COz. �
b. Accuracy at 77°: <+ 30m ppm+ 2.0% of reading, includes manufacturing deviation and
drift.
c. Non-Linearity:<0.5%of Full Scale.
d. Temperature Dependence of Output:<0.056%of Full Scale/F°. �
e. Response Time(0 to 63%): 1 Minute.
£ Operating Temperature Range: 23 to 113°F
g. Humidity Range:0 to 85%RH(non-condensing) �
h. Power Supply Range: 20 to 30 VAC(18 to 30 VDC),Class 2.
i. Power Consumption:<2.5 W Average,4.1 VA.
j. Air Flow Range:0 to 7,500 ft/minute
k. Duct Probe Material: Duct probe meets plenum rating requirements of UL 1995, Heating �
and Cooling Equipment.
l. Agency Listings:UL Listed,CCN XAPX
2.16 AIR MEASURING STATIONS �
A. Provide on the indicated fans, airflow traverse probes mounted in the outside air duct capable of ��
continuously measuring the air handling capacity(air volume)of the respective centrifugal fan(s).
B. The outside airflow traverse probes shall contain multiple total and static pressure sensors placed at
concentric area centers along the exteriar surface of the cylindrical probe and internally connected to their �
respective averaging manifolds. Sensors shall not protrude beyond the surface of the probe, nor be
adversely affected by particle contamination normally present in building system airflows. ��
��
C. The outside airflow traverse probes shall not induce a measurable pressure drop,nor shall the sound level
within the system be amplified by its presence. The probes shall be capable of producing steady, non- r1Y
pulsating signals of standard total and static pressure, without need for flow corrections or factors, with
an accuracy of 3 percent of actual flow over a fan operating range of 6 to 1 capacity turndown. �
D. Provide electronic flow (air volume, velocity) indicating transmitter capable of receiving signals of total
and static pressures from the air measuring station, amplifying, extracting the square root and scaling to
produce a dual 4-20 milliamp DC, output signal linear and scaled air volume or velocity. The flow �
indicating transmitter shall contain an integral digital display capable of continuous indication of air
volume and velocity,percent of span,electronic signal units within the following performance application
criteria:
1. Calibrated Spans: �
0 to 400 FPM up to 8010 FPM
Ten(10)adjustable spans
Operating static pressures up to negative 10-inch S.P.W.C. �
Integral 4-digit, .5-inch high LED display
2. Response Time: .5 second for 98 percent span step.
3. The indicating transmitter output shall not be affected by overpressure up to 200 times greater than
span and shall be furnished with a factory calibrated span and automatic zeroing circuit. �
Transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure with RFI shielding and separate power and
output signal connection ports.
4. Acceptable Manufacturer: �
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900- 16 e�
r�
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
w 230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
" a. Air Monitor Corporation
b. Ultratech Industries
E. Output Devices:
1. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for the application, with a minimum of two
o (2)sets of Form C contacts enclosed in a dustproof enclosure.Relays shall be rated for a minimum
life of one million (1,000,000) operations. Operating time shall be 20 milliseconds or less, with
,. release time of 10 milliseconds or less. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression
devices to limit transients to 150 percent of rated coil voltage. Provide with LED to indicate
�' status.
2. Analog output transducers shall be of positioning type with position feedback and control internal
'" to the transducer. As an option,position feedback may also be input to the BAS.
3. Analog output transducers shall meet the following requirements:
a. 4-20 mA DC output.
b. Two-pipe electro-mechanical design or microprocessor-based design.
c. 3-15 psi output range adjustable to a 0-20 psi range minimum.
� d. Linearity,repeatability and hysteresis no greater than 2 percent of full scale.
e. Air capacity of 1,000 SCIM minimum.
� f. Air consumption of no more than 100 SCIM.
g. Pressure gauges shall be installed on the branch and supply lines.
�'' h. Acceptable transducers are the Bellofram T1000,Fairchild T5700,Johnson N6810,Mamac
EP-310 or an equivalent.
�'� 4. Electronic analog output transducers shall output a signal to match the controlled device. The
� Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the required signals for all controlled devices.
Transducers shall be completely solid-state with no mechanical parts.
� 5. Time Delay Relays: Time delay relay contacts shall be rated for the application with a minimum
of two (2) sets of Form C contacts enclosed in a dustproof enclosure. Relays shall be rated for a
W� minimum life of one million (1,000,000) operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient
suppression, devices to limit transients to I50 percent of rated coil voltage. Delayed contact
� openings or closing shall be adjustable from one (1) to sixty (60) seconds with a minimum
� accuracy of+/-2 percent of setting.
6. L.atching Relays: Latching Relay contacts shall be rated for the application with a minimum of
two (2) sets of Form C contacts enclosed in a dustproof enclosure. Relays shall be rated for a
minimum life of one million (1,000,000) operations. Operating time shall be 20 milliseconds or
� less, with release time of 10 milliseconds of less. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient
suppression devices to limit transients to 150 percent of rated coil voltage.
�,.
� 2.17 POWER MONITORING
�^ A. General: Provide current switches, current transducers, voltage transducers, current transformers as
� required to meet the specified Sequence of Operation and indicated below.
B. Current Operated Switches: AC current switch,Neilsen - Kuljian Model PDSOAC, or PD75, solid state,
�" five (5) year warranty, three (3) selectable ranges for optimum adjustability and resolution. Provide
� external current transformer where required.
�, C. Current Transducers: AC current to DC current output, +/- .5 percent accuracy, 4-20 mA output signal,
Kele and Associates Model 4CMA. Provide external current transformer where required.
w
D. Voltage Transducers Kele and Associates Model PVM or LVM as required for each application,+/- 1/2
�' percent accuracy,4-20 mA DC output.
�
�
M DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900- 17
�w
'
CenturyLink VAIL i
230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE '�
2.18 TEMPERATi_lRE CONTROL CABINETS �
A. General: All controllers and field interface devices shall be installed in control panel cabinet/enclosure as
described below. �
B. Cabinets shall be UL listed, 14 gauge furniture grade steel, finished with baked enamel painted finish
inside and out,cabinet doars shall have piano hinge and standard key cylinder locking latch.
C. All devices installed in or on the control cabinet shall be labeled with a fixed mounted, color contrasted, �
engraved laminated plastic tags, including describing the function of the device, similar to the following
example:
�
4P
TRANSMITTER �
DEVICE
Label
DSP-1,AHU-1 SUPPLY �
DUCT STATIC
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER �
D. All electrical devices within the panel shall be prewired to terminal strips with all inter-device wiring
within the panel completed priar to installation of the system. �
E. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration free walls or free standing steel angle �
supports ar"Unistrut"support stand.
�
�
2.19 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
�
A. Variable frequency drives shall be arranged so they can be operated in an open circuit mode,
disconnected from the motors,for start-up adjustments and trouble shooting. +�
B. Automatic operation shall be from a 4-20 milliamp signal follower, which shall follow a transducer �
signal. The signal follower shall contain the following design features.
1. Shall accept a transducer output signal and condition it to produce a speed reference signal for the
invertor.
2. Minimum speed adjustment(Zero(0)to Maximum RPM). � "�
C. Wire all safeties to operate both in hand and auto positions as well as drive and by-pass sections. �
�
D. Provide communication cabling and interface necessary to forward VFD computer communication
information to and from the BAS/VFD. See Division 23. �
2.20 END SWITCHES �
A. All end switches shall be NEMA rated contacts and NEMA 4X enclosure, either SPDT, DPDT DPST as .,�
required to meet the Sequence of Operation, complete the Points List and necessary interlocks or safeties �
control wiring. End switches shall be as manufactured by Cutler-Hammer or Allen-Bradley.
dr
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900- 18 �
'
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
" B. All end switches shall be designed and configured to provide positive indication of a control device(i.e.
� damper or valve)position for the service intended.
�
�� PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
!r" 3.1 INSTALLATION
� A. The Contractor shall install all equipment, control air piping/tubing, conduit and wiring parallel to
�
building lines.
� B. All automatic control valves and control dampers furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor shall
be installed under his supervision by the Mechanical Contractor.
�
C. Install Air Measuring Stations per the manufacturer's requirements.
�
D. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
1. Spare conductor capacity, equal to a minimum of two (2) additional sensors shall be provided to
� each underfloor sensor and pendant type sensors.
2. Horizontal runs of conduit, trays, tubing or wiring shall be hung from structural members using
� new supports, or where feasible, utilizing existing temperature control conduit and piping. The
Contractor shall verify adequacy of existing systems and warrant these systems as if they were
� new. Single runs of conduit, tubing or wire shall be by clevis ring and all thread rod. Multiple
runs shall be by "Trapeze" or "Unistrut° supports. "Plumber's Strap" shall not be allowed.
� Maximum distance between supports shall be per the NEC. Existing supports shall only be used
upon written concurrence by the Architect,Engineer or Owner.
� 3. All vertical runs of conduit or tubing shall be through new core drills. Existing core drills may be
used if approved by the Owner. The installation shall be supported above each floor penetration
�' using clamps to"Unistrut".
� 4. All wire that enters or leaves a building structure shall be installed with lightning protection per
NEC.
� 5. All wire terminations shall be with compression type round hole spade lugs under a pan head
� screw landing; Stay-Kon ar equivalent. All wire splices shall be with compression type insulated
�w splice connectors or properly sized "wire-nut" connectors. Hand twisted, soldered and/or taped
terminations or splices are not acceptable.
�r 6. Where tubing,wiring or conduit penetrate floors or walls, sleeves with bushings shall be provided
for tubing and wires. The conduit or sleeve opening shall be sealed with fire proof packing so the
�' smoke and fire rating of the wall or floor is maintained.
7. Under no circumstances shall wire, tubing, tray, J-boxes or any BAS equipment be run in,
�""" mounted on, or suspended from any of the telephone system's equipment, cable trays or support
� structure(Grey Iron).
8. All the material installed under this contract must be mounted on, or supported from the building
� structure or supports furnished by this Contractor.
II�� E. Control Wiring:
1. Run wiring in metallic conduit,tubing or raceways. Exceptions are as follows:
�u� a. NEC Class 2 low voltage wiring where not exposed to view such as above suspended
` ceilings,in shafts,etc.,may be run in cable(when approved by Code Authority).
�� � b. Wiring enclosed in temperature control panels.
2. Where conduit is used,provide steel fittings.
!"" 3. Low Voltage Conductors: 18 Gauge minimum, except 19 gauge may be used for home runs to
� central panels and 22 gauge minimum for resistance or thermistor sensing element connections.
4. Wire control interlocks and control panels,except one(1) 120V power circuit to each temperature
¢, control panel shown on drawings and schedules shall be provided under Division 1.
Yo
r DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900- 19
r
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
230900—DIRECT DIGTTAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
5. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of Local and National Electrical Codes. �
6. Do not interlock alarms with starter switching to bypass alarm when equipment is manually
disconnected.
7. All costs of controls, wiring conduit and associated labor shall be included in the Temperature �.
Control Bid. The control wiring shall be installed under the supervision of this Contractor.
�ril
3.2 ENCLOSURES �
A. The tubing and wiring within all enclosures shall be run in plastic trays. Tubing and wiring within BAS
panels may be run using adhesive-backed tie wraps.
�
� B. All plastic tubing shall be connected to enclosures through conduit. All copper tubing shall be connected
to enclosures through bulkhead fittings.
��
C. Mount all enclosures, including those which house BAS Panels, Slaves and Field Device Panels, so that
the top of the enclosure does not exceed six feet, six inches (6'-6"); and the center of any keypad/LCD '�'
combination does not exceed five foot, six inches (5'-6") from the floor or is less than four feet, zero
inches(4'-0")from the floor. �
D. Field Device Panels contain related Field Devices such as relays, control power (24V) transformers,
output transducers,etc.,that are outboard of the BAS Panels or Dedicated Controllers. Each Field Device �
shall be mounted within an enclosure. The enclosures shall be provided with lockable latches that will
accept a single key common to all Field Device Panels,BAS Panels and Slaves.
3.3 EXISTING CONTROLS �
A. Remove all existing control devices including controllers,receiver/controllers,thermostats,sensars,field
devices, gauges, etc. and all associated wiring,piping and mounting hardware whose functions are being ��
replaced by the BAS.
1. When existing equipment is removed, coordinate with a detailed Method of Procedure (MOP).
Do not remove until Owner reviews. �
2. Refer to General Conditions.
3.4 INSTALLATION PRACTICES �
A. The Contractor shall install and calibrate all Field Devices, Sensors and Transducers necessary for the
complete operation of the UO Points described herein. �
B. Sensors shall be removable without shutting down the system in which they are installed.
C. All immersion sensors shall be installed in new,welded thermowells supplied by the Contractor. Existing
thermowells may be reused with concurrence from the Owner. Coordinate any required shutdown with
Owner. `"'r
D. Thermistor wire leads shall be permanently terminated at panels or controllers with wire clamps. �
E. Where none exist, furnish and install pressure/temperature gauges adjacent to each immersion type
sensor.
"�
F. Sensors shall be installed with the use of a wet or hot tap without draining the system if required. 'r'r
I �
, �
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-20 �
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
� 3.5 IDENTIFICATION
�u
A. All control air piping/tubing,J-boxes,conduit and wiring shall be labeled.
� B. Electrical devices,wiring,conduit and J-boxes shall be labeled and identified as required by Division 26.
� 1. As a minimum regardless of Division 26 requirements, all temperature control J-box covers shall
be painted Blue in color on both sides of cover.
�
iC. Main supply control air piping and tubing shall be labeled with Brady or equivalent markers or pre-
printed identification sleeves at each end and junction point,and protected. Identification scheme shall be
consistent with the drawings.
r
�, D. Identification shall be provided for all enclosures, panels, junction boxes, controllers or field devices.
Laminated,bakelite nameplates shall be used. The nameplates shall be 1/16-inch thick and a minimum of
r 1-inch by 2-inches. The lettering shall be White on a Blue background with minimum 1/4-inch high
engraved letters. The nameplates shall be installed with pop rivets.
� I. All new devices will be tagged. Color code to differentiate between new devices.
�`` E. Thoroughly clean the surface to which the label shall be applied with a solvent before applying the
� identification. Use an epoxy to affix the identification in addition to any adhesive backing on the
identification.
� F. The Plan Code Designation shown on all shop drawing identification shall be consistent with the Contract
Documents.
� G. All UO Field Devices that are not mounted within Field Device Panel enclosures shall be identified with
engraved plastic laminated nameplates installed so that they are visible from ground level.
H. The identification shall show the designation used on the Record Documents and identify the function
�"` such as"Mixed Air Temperature Sensor" and"Fan Status DP Switch".
��
I. Calibration settings shall be marked with paint or indelible ink.
P"
� 3.6 LOCATIONS
�""" A. All sensing devices and locations shall be located by the Contractor as shown on the submittal shop
�tl drawings with final review by the Engineer.
B. Wall mount space sensors shall be mounted 54" above finished floor. Pendant mowit space sensors shall
� be mounted 8-feet above finished floor.
�:
C. Enclosures housing Field Devices shall be located immediately adjacent horizontally to the BAS Panels
�•• or Slaves which are being interfaced to.
�
3.7 TEMPERATURE SENSORS
�
w A. Temperature controls trades shall verify all wall mounted temperature sensors locations with the
Architect/Engineer/Owner in order to avoid interference with wall mounted and space furnishings.
�,, 1. Where interferences require moving the temperature sensor more than two (2) feet, consult with
the Architect/Engineer for relocation.
a,
B. Temperature sensors shall be mounted on suitable insulated base and secured to the wall in such a way as
� to be easily removed from wall without damage to the sensor.
..
+ DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-21
a
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
C. Check and verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details �
before installation. Locate thermostats 54"above floor.
3.8 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND COORDINATION �
A. Where existing walls are penetrated with conduit or piping, provide a fire stop assembly which meets or
exceeds the original rating of the assembly. Refer to Division 23. �
B. Extreme care must be exercised while working in existing facilities and around operating equipment,
particularly sensitive telephone switching and computer equipment. Close coordination with the Owner *
is required for the protection.of this operating equipment from dust, dirt and construction material while ��
inaintaining the operational environment for the equipment. Under no circumstances shall the power or ��:�
environmental requirements of the operating equipment be interrupted durin�the installation and check-
out without submitting to the Architect,Owner and Engineer for approval. �
C. A detailed Method of Procedure(MOP)stating the steps to be taken,time schedule and impacted systems "�
for the service interruption shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to beginning work.
Refer to Division 1 and Division 26 for requirements. �
39 CLEANUP
�
A. At the completion of the work, all equipment pertinent to this contract shall be checked and thoroughly
cleaned and all other areas shall be cleaned around equipment provided under this contract. Clean the
exposed surfaces of tubing, hangers, and other exposed metal of all grease,plaster, dust, or other foreign �
materials.
■
B. Upon final completion of work in an area, vacuum and/or damp wipe all finished room surfaces and
furnishings. Use extreme care in cleaning around telephone switching and computer equipment and �
under no circumstances shall water or solvents be used around this equipment.
C. At the completion of the Work and at the end of each work day,remove from the building,the premises, a„�
and surrounding streets, etc., all rubbish and debris resulting from the operations and leave all eyuipment
spaces absolutely clean and ready for use. .�
r�
3.10 SOFTWARE,DATABASE AND GRAPHICS �
A. Software Installation: The Contractor shall provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up and
debug all system software as described in this section. This includes any operating system software or �
other third party software necessary for successful operation of the system.
B. Database Configuration: The Contractor will provide all labor to configure those portions of the database 6�
that are required by the Points List and Sequence of Operation.
C. Color Graphics: Unless otherwise directed by the Owner, the Contractor will provide color graphic
displays for all systems which are specified with a Sequence of Operation, depicted in the Mechanical �"�
Drawings far each system and floor plan. For each system or floor plan, the display shall contain the �
associated points identified in the Point List and allow for set point changes as required by the Owner.
�
�
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-22 �
,
r
� CenturyLink VAIL
d 230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
� 3.11 TEMPERATiJRE CONTROL DRAWINGS
�
A. Upon completion of project and after record drawings of the temperature controls have been prepared and
� reviewed, the Contractor shall provide one (1) complete set of Te�nperature Controls Drawings at each
Temperature Control Panel. Each set of drawings shall be laminated in a plastic coating. The drawings
� shall consist of only those control functions associated with the specific control panel and any relevant or
pertinent netwark interface information.
� 1. The laminated drawings shall have a gommet connection attached to a metal cable or chain which
r
is mechanically fastened to the Temperature Control Cabinet.
� 3.12 START-UP AND TESTING
4
A. Prior to Beneficial Use of the BAS, the Contractor shall supply to Architect/Engineer two (2) debugged
� printouts of all software entered into the BAS. Also supply all user's programming and engineering
� manuals required to interpret the software. Included in the printouts, though not limited to, shall be the
� following:
l. Point data base.
�" 2. All custom control programs written in the BAS control language.
� 3. All parameters required for proper operation of BAS control and utility firmware such as start-stop
routines,etc.
4. Printouts or plotted detailed copies of the complete interactive system graphics.
�'"
�„ B. The software printout shall be fully documented for ease of interpretation by the Architect/Engineer and
Owner, without assistance from the Contractor. En�lish language descriptions shall be either integrated
� with ar attached to the BAS printout. Specifically,the following shall be documented:
� 1. All point(I/O and virtual)names.
2. All BAS Programming Language commands,functions,syntax,operators,and reserved variables.
3. Use of all BAS firmware.
� � 4. The intended actions, decisions, and calculations of each line or logical group of lines in the
custom control program(s). Sequences of operation are not acceptable for use in this
documentation requirement.
5. Complete descriptions of and theories explaining all software and firmware algorithms. The
� algorithms to be described include, but are not limited to, PID, optimum start/stop, demand
�„ limiting,etc.
�. C. Documentation that was supplied as part of the submittals need not be submitted at this time.
�' D. Upon review of software, a Point-To-Point Test of the BAS installation shall commence. The Contractor
shall provide two(2)men equipped with two-way communication and shall test actual field operation of
�" each control and sensing point. This procedure shall occur during off-hour periods. The purpose is to
� test the calibration,response, and action of every point. Any test equipment required to prove the proper
operation of the BAS shall be provided by and operated by the Contractor. The Engineer and Owner will
�p be present to oversee, observe, and review the test. Demonstrate compliance that system functions per
' the Sequence of Operation.
i�, 1. Upon review of the Point-To-Point demonstration,the Contractar shall start up the BAS by putting
all controlled equipment in automatic and enabling software. Contractor shall commence final
� software and overall BAS hardware/software debugging.
2. The Point-To-Point demonstration shall include any existing BAS equipment if it affects the
�"° operation of the equipment included under this contract.
3. As a minimum,existing condirions shall be maintained during system changeover.
�'
� E. Final acceptance of the BAS is contingent upon a hardware/software system test. All groups of points
that yield a system of control shall be tested for compliance with the sequences of operation. Included in
�, the test,but not limited to, shall be:
Y�
� DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-23
�
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
1. BAS Loop Response. The Contractar shall supply a trend data output in graphical form showing �
the step response of each BAS loop. The test shall show the loop's response to a change in set �
point which represents a change in the actuator position of at least 25 percent of its full range. The
sampling rate of the trend shall be from one(])to three(3)minutes depending on the speed of the �
loop. The trend data shall show far each sample the set point, actuator position, and controlled
variable values. Any loop that does not yield temperature control of+ 0.2 degree F or humidity �
control of+3 percent RH shall require further tuning by the Contractor.
2. Interlocks and other sequences. �
3. BAS Control under HVAC equipment failure.
4. HVAC Operation under BAS equipment failure.
5. Battery backup.
6. BAS Control under power failurehestart. �
7. Reset schedules.
8. BAS Alarm reporting capability.
F. A detailed test report as defined under Submittals shall be provided indicating its completion and proper
system operation. �
G. The BAS will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Beneficial Use until all tests described in �
this section have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Architect/Engineer and Owner. Any tests
that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor shall be exempt from
the Beneficial Use requirements if requested in writing by the Contractor and concurred by the Owner
and Architect/Engineer. Such tests shall be performed as part of the BAS Warranty. "�
1. A typed written document stating that the system has been fully checked out on a point by point
basis shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer. All documentation associated with the check
out shall be included. d.
�
3.13 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for updating all existing Project Record Documents associated with �
the Scope of Work outlined in the Drawings and Specifications.
B. Prior to final completion of the installation, prepare a complete set of Record Drawings on a clear and �
legible set of ANSI size 'B' (11" x 17") reproducible prints. The content, format and procedure of the �..�
submittal shall be as described by the General Conditions.
�
C. Provide one(1) laminated and framed set of Control Drawings for each new BAS Control Panel and one
(1)for the Facility Control Room, locate as directed by the Engineer. °''�
D. Prior to final completion of the installation,prepare two(2)hard copies and one(1)electronic copy(GD �
or DVD) of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The information is to be ar provided in a tabbed
and index,three(3)screw and post binder. The information shall include:
1. Operator's Manual with step-by-step procedures for logging On/Off, interrogating the system,
producing reports, acknowledging alarms, overriding computer control, and changing firmware �
parameters.
2. Programmer's manual with complete descriprion of the custom control language and associated
editor, including sample written programs. Provide complete sets of all programming forms, �
applications memorandums, and addenda to the programmer's manual. All software or firmware
algorithms shall be completely described and documented.
3. Maintenance,Installation,and Engineering Manual(s)that clearly explains how to debug hardware
problems, how to repair or replace hardware, preventive maintenance guidelines and schedules, �
calibration procedures,and how to engineer and install new points,panels,and operator interfaces.
�
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-24 �
I
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
�� 230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
�" 4. Documentation of all software. List separately all software parameters that will need updating by
` the Owner such as, though not limited to, holiday, seasonal and start/stop schedules, comfort and
duty cycling schedules.
�, 5. All programs, passwords, code, databases, gaphic files, CADD drawings and symbol libraries
generated for operation of the system shall be included as a part of the system documentation.
� This information shall be submitted both in hard copy bound format and magnetic media format.
� 6. Input/Output schedules, data sheets, and all other items required under Submittals. Describe all
r� regular maintenance that will need to be performed on the BAS hardware. List replacement parts
with part numbers.
�' 7. Complete original issue documentation and software diskettes far all third party software
furnished and installed as a part of the system or required for the operation of the system including
" text editors, control language program and compiler, database managers, graphics and CADD
� packages,operating systems and communications software. �
8. Complete original issue documentation, installation and operational manuals and supporting
�, software for all third party hardware furnished and installed as a part of the system or required for
� � the operation of the system including remote tenninals, user's computer workstation, monitors,
� graphics and memory boards,printers and modems.
9. During the warranty period,all copies of the drawings and manuals shall be updated to include all
� hardware and software changes.
� A. All of the above documentation shall record the equipment installed under this contract and the
exact termination to all other existing control or BAS equipment.
B. The Record Drawings shall document the complete existing control system. This includes all
� mechanica]eyuipment in work area which has automatic control.
i�
� 3.14 WARRANTY
�" A. The Warranty period shall begin on the date of Beneficial Use Completion as authorized by the
Architect/Engineer and Owner in writing. Beneficial use shall not occur before the Contractor has
�' performed the tests required. With these requirements met, beneficial use shall not occur until, in the
� opinion of the Architect/Engineer, the BAS is sufficiently complete to be utilized for the purposes for
which it is intended.
�„ 1. The warranty start date shall not begin until all phases of the Project are complete,i.e.,the Project
shall have a single warranty start date.
a
B. The BAS System shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in material and workmanship and in
� software design and operation for the period of the warranty after completion of the contract. The
Contractor shall provide the necessary skills, labor, and parts to assure the proper operation of, and to
�� provide all required current and preventive maintenance. This warranty shall become effective starting
the date of Beneficial Use completion.
'� 1. The hardware warranty shall include all eyuipment which has been purchased by the Contractor.
� The existing hardware is not subject to the warranty requirements.
2. All software work completed by the Contractar, associated with existing hardware, is subject to
�,, the warranty requirements outlined herein.
3. The Contractor shall respond to all calls during the warranty period for all problems or questions
� experienced in the operation of the installed equipment and shall take steps to correct any
deficiencies that may exist.
�� 4. The response time to any problems shall be four (4) hours maximum (twenty-four) 24-hours per
day, seven (7) days per week. Corrective action, temporary or permanent, shall be made within
�`� one(1)business day.
� C. The Contractar shall maintain on site a backup of all BAS software installed in the system. The backup
q shall be updated monthly or whenever a change to the software is made. A reload of backup software
into the system shall be performed by the Contractor immediately upon notification by the Owner. The
�
�
F� DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-25
�
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
230900—DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM(BACnet) HVAC UPGRADE
reload shall be free of charge unless it is due to a power failure of a duration longer than the battery �
backup.
D. The Contractor shall optimize all control software to assure acceptable operating and space conditions, �
and peak energy efficiency.
3.15 TRAINING �
A. The Contractor shall provide two 2 hours of training for the Owner's Representative. The training
sessions shall be broken into one 1 2-hour session. The training session shall be made available to the �
Owner prior to the end of the warranty period, but after final completion of the contract. The session
shall be given at the Owner's facility. Scheduling shall be approved by the Owner. The training shall
focus on general design, operation, and maintenance procedures of the products installed, though not
necessarily the specific system designed,and shall cover: �
1. Hardware configuration including PC boards, switches, communication and point wiring, and
� location and installation of all sensors and control devices. �"
2. Hardware maintenance,calibration,troubleshooting,diagnostics,and repair instructions.
3. Operation of man-machine interface including logging On/Off, interrogating the system, �
producing reports, acknowledging alarms, overriding computer control, and changing ,�
firmware/software parameters.
4. Programming the BAS using the editor and the design of custom control software. �
5. Recovery procedures from both BAS and HVAC failures.
B. The Instructor far the above session shall be an employee of the Contractor, who is qualified to provide
customer training and applications support. �
END OF SECTION 230900
�
.
�
'
,
'
'
�
'
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 230900-26 �
,
�°
CenturyLink VAIL
`- 232300—REFRIGERANT PII'ING HVAC UPGRADE
r
a SECTION 232300- REFRIGERANT PIPING
<<
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
� 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
�.
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
+� Conditions and Division O1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
L2 SUMMARY
� A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
.-
ti
1.3 SUBMITTALS
,, A. Product Data: For each rype of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include
pressure drop,based on manufacturer's test data,far the following:
�
1. Thermostatic expansion valves.
'' 2. Solenoid valves.
,, 3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Filter dryers.
� 5. Strainers.
�
6. Pressure-regulating valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and
R
fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangeinents and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil
w traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and eyuipinent connection details. Show
interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.
P 1. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design
,, actual piping layout, including oil traps,double risers, specialties,and pipe and tube sizes
to accommodate, as a miniinum, equipment provided, elevation difference between
,r compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and
� coinpliance with warranties of connected equipment.
� 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
irw.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in
�^ maintenance manuals.
�
� 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
� A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
�"" B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
�
«� REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 1
r
� �
CenturyLink VAIL �
232300—REFRIGERANT PII'ING HVAC UPGRADE ���
1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING "�
A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interiar
and exterior are clean when installed. *�
�
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs,equipment supports,and roof penetrations. �
PART2-PRODUCTS �
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS �
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280,Type ACR.
B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B 16.22. �
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony solder to join copper socket fittings �
on copper pipe.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
E. Flexible Connectors: ,�
1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced �
protective jacket.
2. End Connections: Socket ends.
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimuin 7-inch �
long assembly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
F. Flexible Connectors: �
1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, stainless-steel-wire-reinforced �
protective jacket �
2. End Connections: "'��
�.m
a. NPS 2 and Smaller: With threaded-end connections.
b. NPS 2-U2 and Larger: With flanged-end connections. a�i
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in ininimum 7-inch �
long asseinbly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. �
, �
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-2 �.
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
r 232300-REFRIGERANT PIPING HVAC UPGRADE
�' 2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
�.
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:
A
1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or
�' angle pattern.
2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.
'" 3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.
�, 4. Seat: Nylon.
5. End Connections: Socket,union,or flanged.
� 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
w
7. Maximum Operating Terilperature: 275 deg F.
� B. Packed-Angle Valves:
� 1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Packing: Molded stem,back seating,and replaceable under pressure.
" 3. Operator: Rising stem.
,� 4. Seat: Non-rotating, self-aligning PTFE.
5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.
. 6. End Connections: Socket,union,threaded,ar flanged.
�� 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
�`' 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
� C. Check Valves:
� 1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass,or cast bronze; globe pattern.
� 2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron,forged brass,or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.
� 3. Piston: Removable PTFE seat.
4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.
� 5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap,plated-steel stein,and graphite seal.
6. End Connections: Socket,union,threaded,or flanged.
� 7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.
8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
� 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
r
D. Service Valves:
�
� 1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.
2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.
�, 3. Seat: PTFE.
4. End Connections: Copper spring.
� 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
�""`� E. Solenoid Valves: Coinply with ARI 760 and UL 429;listed and labeled by an NRTL.
�
l. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.
� 2. Solenoid Tube,Plunger, Closing Spring,and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
� 3. Seat: PTFE.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
�
�
,� REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 -3
�
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
232300-REFRIGERANT PIPING HVAC UPGRADE
5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location "�
with conduit adapter, and 24-V ac coil. ,w,,
6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
7. Maximuin Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. �
8. Manual operator. �
F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled
by an NRTL. �
1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.
2. Piston,Closing Spring,and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. �
3. Seat Disc: PTFE. �
�
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. �
6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
�
G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.
1. Body,Bonnet,and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel. �
2. Diaphragin,Piston,Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. �
4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.
5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F. �
6. Superheat: Adjustable. ,�,
7. Reverse-flow option(for heat-puinp applications).
8. End Connections: Socket,flare, or threaded union. ''�
9. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig.
H. Straight-Type Strainers: �
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. �
2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.
3. End Connections: Socket or flare.
4. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. �
5. Maximum Operating Teinperature: 275 deg F.
� I. Angle-Type Strainers:
�
1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.
3. Screen: 100-mesh monel. .
4. End Connections: Socket or flare. �
5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
J. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: �
1. Body: Forged brass. ��+�t
2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by
filter screen.
3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.
�ril
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-4 �
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
i� 232300—REFRIGERANT PIPING HVAC UPGRADE
� 4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate inoisture above 60 ppm.
� 5. End Connections: Socket or flare.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
�,. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
� K. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.
' " 1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and
� neoprene gaskets.
2. Filter Media: 10 micron,pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.
A 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina.
4. Designed far reverse flow(for heat-pump applications).
p 5. End Connections: Socket.
�, 6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential
measurement.
4 7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.
8. Rated Flow: 30 tons.
"' 9. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
m. 10. Maximum Operating Teinperature: 240 deg F.
� L. Receivers: Comply with ARI 495.
� 1. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
2. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
� 3. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
� 4. Tappings: Inlet,outlet,liquid level indicator,and safety relief valve.
5. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
�' 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
�, 7. Maxiinum Operating Teinperature: 275 deg F.
�, M. Liquid Accumulatars: Coinply with ARI 495.
�° l. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
2. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
�" 3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
� 4. Maximuin Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
A�
� PART 3 -EXECUTION
� 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
W�
�' A. Suction, Liquid, and Hot-Gas Lines 1-1/2" and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper
� tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.
,� B. Suction Lines 2" to 3-1/2": Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper
�.
fittings with brazed joints.
�
,� REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 -5
�
I �
CenturyLink VAIL �
232300—REFRIGERANT PIl'ING HVAC UPGRADE
C. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 1" and Smaller: �
Copper,Type ACR,drawn-teinper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints
D. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping 2" and smaller: Copper, Type L, drawn-teinper tubing �
and wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints.
3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS �
A. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.
B. Install service valves far gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if �
they are not an integal part of valves and strainers.
C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accmnulator at the compressar �
suction connection.
D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter "�
dryers.
E. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install
solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
.il
F. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.
1. Install valve so diaphragm case is wanner than bulb. �
2. Secure bulb to clean, straight,horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do
not mount bulb in a trap ar at bottoin of the line. �
3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line
pressure at bulb location. �
G. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe �
safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15. °�
H. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thennostatic expansion valve ar �
at the inlet of the evaparatar coil capillary tube.
L Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an �
integral assembly for device being protected: �
1. Solenoid valves. -
�
2. Thermostatic expansion valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves. .r
4. Compressor.
J. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thennostatic expansion valve,and in �
the suction line at the compressor.
K. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge. �
L. Install flexible connectors at compressors.
�
�r
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300- 6 �
'
* CenturyLink VAIL
� 232300—REFRIGERANT PII'ING HVAC UPGRADE
+' 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
L
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
� systems; indicated locations and arrangeinents were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
�� expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
� deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.
" B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
r
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
p and service areas.
` D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipinent rooms and service areas at right
a
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
� otherwise.
r
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space far ceiling panel reinoval.
P
� F. Install piping adjacent to inachines to allow service and maintenance.
�, G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
� H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
" I. Select systein components with pressure rating equal to or greater than systein operating
b pressure.
� J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
w
fittings.
K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and
'� specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or
� panels as specified in other sections if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed
behind finished surfaces.
r
� L. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
�. 1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
� 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a unifonn slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
�" 4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
�
M. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve
� stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
� heat near expansion-valve bulb.
�, N. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation.
�.
O. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section "Mechanical Identification."
�
�-
r REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-7
Yr
� r
CenturyLink VAIL �
232300—REFRIGERANT PIPING HVAC UPGRADE
P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings,and floars. �
Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings,and floors. �
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION �
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris froin inside and, outside of pipe and fittings before �
assembly.
C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing ar welding, �
to prevent scale formation.
D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and �
Tube."
1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper �
pipe.
2. Use Type BAg,cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service �
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
�
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perfonn tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
�,
B. Tests and Inspections: �
1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. �
2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,
evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test
pressure. ,�
3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the
pressures indicated in Part 1 "Perfonnance Requirements"Article. ��
a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. '�""
b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of ,,,,�
test.
a Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount �
of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
�
�
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300- 8 �
�
r
CenturyLink VAIL
� 232300—REFRIGERANT PIPING HVAC UPGRADE
� 3.6 SYSTEM CHARGING
�
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
r
1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
�" 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant systein with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuuin
holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
� 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas,allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
�, 4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.
r
� 3.7 ADJUSTING
r
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaparator superheat.
� B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating
suction pressure.
�
` C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system
design temperature.
r
D. Perfonn the following adjustinents before operating the refrigeration system, according to
�"�' manufacturer's written instructions:
�`�� 1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.
�, 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
3. Open coinpressor suction and discharge valves.
� 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
' S. Check open coinpressor-inotor alignment and verify lubrication far motors and bearings.
r�
�, E. Replace care of replaceable filter dryer after systein has been adjusted and after design flow
rates and pressures are established.
�
� END OF SECTION 232300
1
1
1
1
�
� REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 -9
i�
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
232300—REFRIGERANT PIPING HVAC UPGRADE
�
,
'
. t
�
�
'
'
�
'
�
�
'
'
,
�
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 10 �
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
ir 233113—METAL DUCTWORK HVAC UPGRADE
r
I� SECTION 233ll3 -METAL DUCTWORK
, PART 1 -GENERAL
.
" 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
.
A. Extent of Metal Ductwork is indicated on the drawings, schedules, and by requirements of this
r SeCt1011.
� Ductwork Construction Table
, Service Type Pressure Insulation Seal
Class Class
i
Supply Air between Air Galvanized steel,round +3" Wrapped B
�° Handling Unit&Air Devices or rectangular
«. Return Air Galvanized steel,round -3" Wrapped B
or rectan ular
�
Air Handling Unit Exhaust Rectangular galvanized +3" Wrapped B
� and Outside Air steel
� Transfer Duct Rectangular galvanized +1" None C
� steel
�t
� 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Y
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of inetal ductwork
* products of types, materials, and sizes required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in
� similar service for not less than five(5)years.
�, B. Installer's Qualifications: Finn with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience
on projects with metal ductwark systems similar to that required for project.
r.
C. References to SMACNA,ASHRAE and NFPA are miniinuin requirements,the Contractor shall
�" fabricate, construct, install, seal all ductwark as described in this specification and as shown on
�, the drawings,in addition to these minimum standard references.
r D. Codes and Standards:
� 1. SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards,Metal and Flexible".
2. SMACNA"HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual".
� 3. ASHRAE"Systems and Equipinent Handbook",Chapter 16, Duct Construction.
4. NFPA 90A"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systeins".
ka
� 1.3 SUBMITTALS
�
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions.
�
�
�, METAL DUCTWORK 233113 - 1
�
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
233113—METAL DUCTWORK HVAC UPGRADE
B. Shop Drawings: Submit 1/4-inch scale drawings of ductwork and fittings including, but not �
limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor
penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between ductwork and
equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to confonn to local shop �
practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not �
reduced.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, subinit record drawings of installed systems, in �
accordance with requirements of Divisions 1 and 23.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materials and �
products. Include maintenance data and shop drawings in maintenance manual.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING �
A. Protection: Protect ductwork and accessories from damage during shipping, storage, and
handling. Prevent dirt and inoisture from entering ducts and fittings. �
B. Storage: Where possible,store ductwork inside. Where necessary to store outside, enclose with
waterproof wrapping. �
�
PART2 -PRODUCTS
�
�
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the �
following:
1. Spin-In Fittings: �
a. Flexmaster
b. Thermaflex
c. Ominair
d. Hercules Industries �
2. Duct Sealants
a. Duct Mate Pro Seal
b. Foster 32-19/32-17 w�
a Childers CP-146/CP-148
3. Adhesives: Comply with ASTM C916 Type II
a. Foster 85-60 �„
b. DuroDyne SSG
c. McGill Air Seal Uni Grab ��
d. Childers CP-127
�
'
�
METAL DUCTWORK 233113 -2 �
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
�. 233ll 3—METAL DUCTWORK HVAC UPGRADE
'' 2.2 DUCTWORK MATERIALS
.
A. Exposed Ductwork: Where ductwark is exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide mill
� ,� phosphatized finish that is free from visual iinperfections, including pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, dents, discolorations, and other imperfections, including those that would impair
` painting.
`� B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized
� sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality; with G 90 zinc coating in
accordance with ASTM A 525.
N
` 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS
�
A. General: Provide inaterials of types and sizes required to comply with ductwork systein
� requirements.
" B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple secrions with maximum 15-degree
w change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45-degree laterals
and 45-degree elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90-degree branches are indicated,
� provide conical type tees.
�' C. Duct Sealant: UL l81 Listed, Class 1, flame spread 0, fuel contributed 0, smoke developed 0,
water-based sealant, non-toxic, non-combustible, and non-flammable. Non-hardening, non-
� migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as
w compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in
ductwork. Sealant shall meet LEED IEQ 4.1 (meeting VOC tables published by SCAQMD
" #1168 Criteria far Low Emitting Materials.
` 1. Service temperature-20°F to 200°F.
2. Mold and Mildew resistant
,. 3. VOC: Maximum SOg/1 (less water and exempt solvents).
w D. Adhesives: Water based; suitable for bonding fibrous duct wrap and duct liner insulation to
galvanized duct work. Install evenly and secure with mechanical fasteners in accordance with
" SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard for Metal and Flexible Duct. Adhesive shall
4. meet LEED EQ 4.1 (SCAQMD Rule#1]68 VOC tables)low emitting materials.
1. Non-Oxidizing
R 2. Meets FDA,USDA and EPA Standards
� 3. Meets Requirements of UL 723, ASTM E-84 NFPA 90A& 90B and ASTM G916 Type
II.
�
E. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized
�''"' steel fasteners,anchors,rods, straps,trim and angles for support of ductwork.
1. For exposed stainless steel ductwork,provide matching stainless steel support materials.
"" 2. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials except where materials are
�: electrolytically separated from ductwork.
� F. Spin-in Fittings: Provide spin-in fittings between flexible and round sheet metal duct takeoffs
�
and air devices froin main ducts. Spin-in fittings shall include bell inouth and butterfly type
manual volume damper with regulator and locking device.
�
�.
,� METAL DUCTWORK 233]13 -3
�r
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
233113—METAL DUCTWORK HVAC UPGRADE
G. Rectangular-to-Round Taps: Where the round branch take-off will not pennit a spin-in fitting, �
provide a rectangular to round tap. Include manual volume damper with locking devices. �,
H. All fasteners and hardware for stainless steel ductwork shall be made of stainless steel. a�
r�
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ductwark of gauges and reinfarcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct �
Construction Standards" and ASHRAE "Systems and Equipment Handbook", Chapter 16, Duct
Construction. �
B. Elbows—Rectangular
1. For low pressure systeins use 1.0 radius smooth elbows. (From focal point to centerline �
of duct).
2. For medium pressure systems use 1.5 radius smooth elbows. (From focal point to
centerline of duct).
3. If radius elbows cannot fit,use mitered elbows with turning vanes. �
C. Limit angular tapers to 30 degree for contracting tapers and 20 degree for expanding tapers.
D. Refer to Division 23, Section 233300 "Ductwork Accessories"for accessory requireinents. �
PART 3 -EXECUTION �
3.1 INSPECTION �
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to a_
Installer. �
3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK �
A. General: Asseinble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices that
will achieve airtight and noiseless (no objectionable noise) ,systems. Install each run with �
minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8-inch
inisalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable
ties, braces, hangers, and anchors of type that will hold ducts true-to-shape and prevent
buckling,popping or compressing. Suppart vertical ducts at every floor.
wr
B. Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork, as
required to avoid delays in work. �
C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever
possible. Locate runs as indicated by drawings, details and notations or, if not otherwise �
indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct useable space or block access ��
for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, "°
columns, and other structural and pennanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to
1/2-inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts,but allow for insulation "�
�
METAL DUCTWORK 233113 -4 �
I
,
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 233113—METAL DUCTWORK HVAC UPGRADE
�' thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1-inch clearance outside of
� insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces,conceal ductwork froin view,by
locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not
,. encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with
suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished wark.
�
D. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transfonner vaults and electrical
'� equipment spaces and enclosures.
4
E. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed
� to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet
� metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on all four (4) sides by at least 1-U2
inch. Fasten to duct only.
.�
F. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dainpers, coil
� frames,equipment,controls and other associated work of ductwork system.
" G. Installation: Install metal ductwark in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
�, Standards and Industrial Construction Standards.
� H. Temparary Closure: At ends of ducts that are not connected to equipment or air distribution
devices at time of ductwork installation, provide teinporary closure of polyethylene film or
` other covering that will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be
w
completed.
� L Install prefabricated grease ductwork in accordance with manufacturer requirements and NFPA
96.
�
�
3.3 LEAKAGE TESTS
�.
A. Ductwork systems in 4-inch W.G. pressure class and higher shall be tested in their entirety for
� leaks.
° B. Conduct duct leakage test in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
i Manual". Repair leaks and repeat tests until tota] leakage is less than tbe maximum permissible
leakage as specified below.
r
r�
C. Architect/Engineer shall observe ductwork pressure tests prior to installation of insulation.
�
D. Testing pressure shall be 125 percent of designed duct operating pressure.
Iw� E. Maximum Permissible Leakage: Two percent of total system.
'
'
�
a.
� METAL DUCTWORK 233113 -5
�,
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
233113—METAL DUCTWORK HVAC UPGRADE
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING �
A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external
surfaces of foreign substances. Where ductwork is to be painted, clean and prepare surface for �
painting.
rrl
B. Balancing: Seal any leaks in ductwork that become apparent in balancing process.
�
END OF SECTION 233113
�
'
,
�
'
,
'
'
'
'
�
'
�
METAL DUCTWORK 233113 -6 �
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
�, 233119—HVAC CASINGS HVAC UPGRADE
A
�-
SECTION 2331 l9 -HVAC CASINGS
�
� PART 1 -GENERAL
M
,. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
,. A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
� and Division 1 Specification sections,apply to work of this section.
1.2 � DESCRIPTION OF WORK
.
A. Extent of HVAC Casings Work is indicated on drawings and by requirements of this section.
� Low pressure casings are hereby defined as casings subjected to operating pressures of 2-inch
�
w.g. or less,positive ar negative.
� B. Types of HVAC Casings required for project include the following:
1. Low Pressure Casings to house outside air intake section.
�
C. Refer to Division 26 sections far lighting within HVAC Casings; not work of this section.
r
�,
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
N
A. Installer: A finn with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects
` with HVAC Casings Work similar to that required for project.
" B. Codes and Standards:
� 1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Construction
Standards" for fabrication and installation of low pressure HVAC casings.
A 2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, 1983 Equipment Volume,
� Chapter 1 "Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of low pressure HVAC
casings.
�, 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air
� Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of
�' Wann Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems".
4. SMACNA Standards: For duct liner applied to inside of HVAC casings, comply with
'�� SMACNA "Duct Liner Application Standard".
w-
M 1.4 SUBMITTALS
�" A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications on manufactured products and factory-
�
fabricated HVAC casings,used for work of this section.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layouts of HVAC casings showing both accurately scaled
casings and their relation to space enclosure. Show modifications of indicated requirements,
r.
�. HVAC CASINGS 233119- 1
�
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
233119—HVAC CASINGS HVAC UPGRADE �
�
made to confonn to loca] shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area,
clearances,materials, and rigidity are not reduced.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products,in
� accordance with requirements of Division 1. "�
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork inaterials and �
products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in maintenance
manual; in accardance with requirements of Division 1.
�
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING '�
�.
A. Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated casings, accessories and purchased products from
damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and '�
moisture froin entering ducts and fittings.
B. Where possible, store casings inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store ,�
outside,store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART2-PRODUCTS �
2.1 MANUFACTURERS �
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the �
following:
1. Factory-Fabricated Casings:
a. Air Enterprises,Inc.
b. Tempmaster Corp. �
c. United Sheet Metal Division; United McGill Corp.
d. Rink
e. International Acoustics Company �
£ SEMCO
g. Commercial Acoustics
�
2.2 HVAC CASING MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. General: Comply with Division 23 sections for applicable product requirements of ductwork
materials. For each HVAC casing, provide metal type, gauge, thickness, weight, construction �
and reinforcing as required by size limitations or as shown, including fittings, hangers, supports
and accessories. �
B. Shop fabricate casings to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field fabrication and
assembly. Disassemble only to extent necessary far shipping and handling. Match-mark �
sections for assembly at project.
�
HVAC CASINGS 233119-2 �
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
233119—HVAC CASINGS HVAC UPGRADE
P
� C. Fabricate casings with standing seam construction, and angle reinforcing. Install close-off
sheets froin casing sides,top and bottoin to sound attenuator.
�
�^ 2.3 FACTORY-FABRICATED CASINGS
�"� A. General: Provide factory-fabricated, double-wall, insulated, pressurized plenuin casings as
�. indicated.
� B. Panel Construction: Construct panels with solid galvanized steel exterior shell, and perforated
galvanized steel interior shell,2-inch thick. �
�'� 1. Tack or spot weld exteriar and interior shells to perimeter and interior longitudinal steel
�
channels and box-end internal closures.
2. Instruct exterior shell of 20 gauge minimum galvanized steel. �
�� 3. Construct interior shell of 22 gauge minimum galvanized steel.
a. Provide 3/32-inch holes on 3/16-inch staggered spacing for 23 percent open area.
'" 4. Construct perimeter and interior longitudinal channel meinbers of ASTM A 446 l 8 gauge
�, structural quality galvanized steel.
5. Provide galvanized steel for panel surfaces,internal channels, and triin items,confonning
� to ASTM A 526, and having minimum of G-90 coating conforming to ASTM A 525.
6. Fill each panel assembly with acoustical/thermal insulating inaterial that is
` noncombustible,inert,mildew-resistant,and vennin proof,and conforms to NFPA 90A.
^ 7. Fabricate panels with tongue and groove construction,with continuous self-locking joints
effective on both inside and outside of each panel joint interface.
+� 8. Construct septum panels of ininimum 20 gauge galvanized sheet sandwiched between
layers of insulating material and minimum 22 gauge perforated galvanized exterior
'" sheets.
�
C. Trim Items: Fabricate froin minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel, furnished in standard lengths
r far field-cutting.
� D. Sealer: Furnish duct sealer for all mechanical joints and exterior trim items, conforming to
�
NFPA 90A.
k E. Access Doors: Construct personnel access doors of ininiinum 24-inch x 60-inch size, other
access doors of size indicated. Construct doors of same thickness as panels, with minimum 18
* gauge solid interior and exterior galvanized steel shell. Provide minimum of three (3) ball-
� bearing hinges and three (3) wedge-lever type latches, operable froin both inside and outside.
Install doors to open against air pressure differential. Provide neoprene-type gasket around
�, entire perimeter of doar frame.
�" F. 5tructural Performance: Design entire plenum installation to be self-supporting, and capable of
withstanding internal static pressures of fan when operating in a "no flow" situation, obtain fan
�" curve from fan manufacturer to obtain maximum, potential system pressure, without exceeding
k deflection of any panel joint of L/200 where "L" is unsupported span length within completed
casing structure.
'►
� G. Acoustical Performance: Provide certified testing data from independent acoustical laboratory
listing sound absorption and transinission loss characteristics of panel asseinbly.
�<
�.
,, HVAC CASINGS 233119- 3
W.
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
233119—HVAC CASINGS HVAC UPGRADE
1. Test data must show sound absorption coefficients in each octave band less than those �
scheduled,when tested in accordance with ASTM C 423. �
2. Test data must show airborne sound transinission losses less than those scheduled, when �
tested in accordance with ASTM E 90.
H. Thermal Perfonnance: When measured at mean teinperature of 75 degree F, thermal
conductivity shall not exceed 0.06 BTU/hour-square foot-degree F for 4-inch thick panels, and �
O.12 BTU/hour-square foot-degree F for 2-inch thick panels.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS HVAC CASING MATERIALS �
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where �
not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with HVAC casing system
requireinents including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.
B. Duct Liner: Fibrous glass, complying with Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association �
(TIMA) AHG101; of thickness indicated. Aluminum foil facing reinforced with fiberglass
scrim laminated to UL rated Kraff Paper Composite 25/50 flame-spread/smoke developed
rating. �-
�i
C. Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with Adhesive and Sealant Council, Ina (ASC)ASC-A-7001.
D. Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA MF-1. �
E. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liyuid elastic sealant (type applicable
for fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and recommended by manufacturer '�
specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork. s�
F. Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement (type �
applicable for fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and recommended by manufacturer �
specifically for cementing fitting components,or seams in HVAC casings.
PART 3 -EXECUTION �
*�I
3.1 iNSTALLATION OF HVAC CASINGS
A. General: Comply with applicable requirements of other Division 23 sections for installation of
HVAC casings. Assemble and install casings in accordance with recognized industry practices
which will achieve air-tight and noiseless casings, capable of perfonning each indicated service. �
Install each casing with minimum of joints. Align casings accurately at connections,within 1/8-
inch misaligmnent tolerance and with interior surfaces smooth. Support components rigidly �
with suitable ties, braces, brackets and anchors of rypes which will maintain housings true-to-
shape and prevent buckling.
�R
B. Support casings from building structure in manner indicated and, if not otherwise indicated, by
either direct mounting on floor ar foundation system or overhead suspension with hangers. '�"`
�
+�
HVAC CASINGS 233119-4 �
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 233119—HVAC CASINGS HVAC UPGRADE
�
,, C. Maintain ductwork seal integrity throughout casing.
P
3.2 INSTALLATION OF FACTORY-FABRICATED CASINGS
r
�
A. General: Install casings in accordance with manufacturer's installation drawings and
instructions. Pay special attention to recommended spacing of sheet metal screws, duct sealer
� placement, and trim positioning requirements.
^ B. Sealer: Apply sufficient sealer to allow extrusion of surplus sealer to give visual indication of
� complete coverage within all external joints.
� C. Openings: Field-cut openings for pipe and conduit penetrations, insulate and seal in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
i�
" 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
�
A. Clean dust and debris froin each section of casing as it is installed. Clean external surfaces of
� foreign substances which might cause deterioration of inetal or interface with painting or
�.
insulating of casings.
,.
B. Maintain teinporary closure of openings into housings until permanently closed by duct
connections, equipinent installation, and completion of siinilar work. Cover openings with
� polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of moisture,dust or debris.
r
� 3.4 TESTING
� A. Check installed casings for leakage during system's operational test. Repair seams or replace
faulty casings, as required for leakproof performance.
�
� END OF SECTION 233119
k
'
'
'
'
�
� HVAC CASINGS 233119-5
r
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
w 233300—DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES HVAC UPGRADE
�
� SECTION 233300- DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
r
PART1 -GENERAL
r
��' 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
�
A. Types of Ductwork Accessories required for project include the following:
� 1. Manual Volume Dampers
� 2. Control Dainpers
3. Combination Fire/Smoke Dainpers
4. Turning Vanes
� 5. Duct Hardware
�- 6. Duct Access Doors
7. Flexible Connections
�
e
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Finns regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork
� accessaries, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than five(5)years.
r
�, B. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recoinmendations pertaining to construction of
ductwork accessories,except as otherwise indicated.
�
C. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555
y "Fire Dainpers and Ceiling Dampers" and UL Standard SSSS "Motor-Driven Fire/Smoke
�
Dampers".
w D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems",pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.
!""
� E. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with "Fire Dainper and Heat Stop Guide" for the installation
of fire,smoke, and fire/smoke dampers.
�
F. All fire dampers, smoke dampers, fire/smoke dampers and radiation dampers shall meet the
� latest local building code requirements.
�
�, 1.3 SUBMITTALS
� A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork
� accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction, and installation
instructions.
� B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of
�� ductwork accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or
support, and methods of assembly of components. Include details of construction equipment
�° and accessories being provided.
r
,, DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300- 1
`
i�
CenturyLink VAIL �
233300—DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES HVAC UPGRADE
C. Subinittals for all damper types specified in this section shall include a schedule for each �
dainper indicating net free area, actual face velociry and pressure drop (at sea level) based on „�
net free area and the maximum air quantity which will be passing through the damper.
Submittals without this infonnation will be rejected. �r
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products,in �
accordance with requirements of Division 1.
E. Maintenance Data: Subinit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type �
of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in inaintenance manual;
in accordance with requirements of Division 1. �
PART2 - PRODUCTS �
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requireinents, provide products by one of the ,�
following:
1. Dampers:
a. Ainerican Warming and Ventilating �
b. Air Balance,Inc.
c. Arrow Louver&Damper; Division of Arrow United Industries, Inc.
d. Louvers& Dampers, Inc. �
e. Penn Ventilator Co.
£ Dowco Corp.
g. Air Stream �
h. Cesco-Advanced Air ,�,�
i. Ruskin
j. Vent Products Inc. �
k. Greenheck �
1. Pottorff
2. Control Dampers:
a. Ruskin �
b. Greenheck
c. T.A. Morrison
3. Smoke, Static/Dynamic Fire, and Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers: "'�
a. Ruskin
b. Greenheck
4. Turning Vanes: �»
a. Aero Dyne Ca
b. Airsan Corp. '"'�
c. Barb-Aire
d. Duro Dyne Corp. �
e. Environmental Elements Corp.; Subs. Koppers Co.,Inc.
f. Hart& Cooley Mfg. Co.
g. Hercules '�
5. Duct Hardware: ,�;
a. Ventfabrics,Inc.
b. Young Regulator Co. �
�
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 -2 �
r
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 233300—DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES HVAC UPGRADE
� 6. Duct Access Doors:
�,,,. a. Flexmaster(Inspector Series)
b. Cesco-Advanced Air
� c. Duro Dyne Corp.
� d. Ventfabrics,Inc.
7. Flexible Connections:
�,, a. Duro Dyne Corp.
b. Ventfabrics,Inc.
� c. General Rubber Corp. (Process and Exhaust Only)
A
�, 2.2 DAMPERS
,� A. Low Pressure Rectangular Dampers (Less than 2,000 FPM and Under 4-Inch W.C. S.P.
Differential):
` 1. Far 12-inch in height or larger, use multiple opposed blade type and close fitted to ducts.
16 Gauge galvanized steel frame and blades with carbon steel shaft mounted with
'� stainless steel bearings, stainless steel jainb seals and silicone blade edge seals. Linkage
+� shall be in jainb fixed type located outside the airstream made of plated steel tie bar and
crank plates, with stainless steel pivots. Maximum damper panel width is 48-inch.
�'� Provide jack shafting when duct size required is greater than 48-inch wide. Provide
� notched shaft end indicating damper position, locking quadrant to fix dainper position
and handle. For flat oval and round ductwork,provide Type C housing.
� 2. For ducts less than 12-inch in height,use 16 gauge frame and 20 gauge blade galvanized
� steel, steel axle with nylon bearings, locking quadrant handle and notched shaft end
�`' indicating damper position.
� B. Low Pressure Round Dampers (Less than 1,500 FPM and Under 1-Inch W.C. S.P. Differential):
�r L For Dampers 4-inch diameter through 18-inch diameter use 18 gauge galvanized steel
frame and the following blade construction:
�
4-Inch thru 12-inch diameter 22 gauge galvanized steel
� 13-Inch thru 18-inch diameter 20 gauge galvanized steel
�,. 2. Carbon steel axle shaft with retainers mounted on stainless steel bearings with notched
� end shaft indicating dainper position,locking quadrant and handle.
C. Medium High Pressure Rectangular Dampers (Less than 4,000 FPM and Under 6-Inch W.C.
"'� (4&Inch Wide or Less) S.P. or 8-Inch W.C. S.P. (36-Inch Wide ar Less)):
1. Use opposed blade dainpers for volume control and parallel blade for isolation/shutoff
service.
2. 16 Gauge galvanized steel frame with welded corners. Double skin galvanized steel
� blades with single-lock seam,airfoil shape. Double durometer vinyl blade edge seals and
metallic compression seals at the jambs. Solid carbon steel axles mounted on stainless
�, steel bearings. In jamb type linkage located outside the air stream. 48-Inch wide and 60-
� inch high maximum damper size. For fixed position balancing damper, delete blades to
maintain 30 percent free area with all other damper blades are 100 percent closed. For
isolation or shutoff dury, damper leakage shall not exceed 9.5 CFM/square foot at 4-inch
�"' W.C. S.P. differential. Provide extended shaft with notched end indicating damper
position, locking quadrant and handle.
W
� DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300-3
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
233300—DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES I�VAC UPGRADE
Air Balance Model AG515/AG516 (Steel) �
D. Medium/High Pressure Round and Flat Oval Dampers (Less than 3,000 FPM and Under 4-Inch
W.C. S.P. Differential): �
1. Galvanized steel damper frame construction as follows:
ROUND
Under 6-inch diameter 12 gauge '�
6-Inch to 18-inch diameter 14 gauge
20-Inch to 30-inch diameter 2 x 1/2 x 1/8 channel
32-Inch to 42-inch diameter 2 x 1 x 1/8 channel
2. Galvanized steel damper blades as follows: �
ROUND �
4-Inch to 12-inch diameter 14 gauge
14-Inch to 18-inch diameter 12 gauge
20-Inch to 42-inch diameter 10 gauge
�
3. 1/2-Inch diameter galvanized steel axles up to 18-inch diaineter and 18-inch wide flat �
oval, and 3/4-inch diameter plated steel sleeve pressed in to the frame with stainless steel
thrust washers with stainless steel bearings.
4. Provide notched end shaft to indicate damper position,locking quadrant and lever handle. ,,,�
5. For fixed position balancing damper, provide reduced blade area to provide 30 percent
free area with damper 100 percent closed. �
6. For isolation or shutoff service, dampers shall be provided with EPT edge seals with a
leakage rate not to exceed 7 CFM/square foot at 1-inch W.C. S.P. differential (based on
18-inch diameter).
�
2.3 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Provide opposed blade dampers for volume control and parallel blade for isolation/shutoff �
service. 12 Gauge galvanized steel frame with welded corners. Double skin galvanized steel
blades with single-lock seain,airfoil shape with a strength greater than 14 gauge. �
AWV Model VG422
B. Double durometer vinyl blade edge seals and metallic compression seals at the jambs. Leakage
shall not exceed 11.5 CFM/square foot at 4-inch W.C. S.P. '"�
C. Solid carbon steel axles mounted on stainless steel bearings. In jainb linkage located outside
the airstream.
D. For isolation and automatic volume control dampers, provide factory supplied electric motor �"�
operators with quantities, voltage and sizes suitable for proper operation at the velociry and
pressures the dampers will be operating at. �
2.4 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS �
A. General: Fire/Smoke dampers with airfoil blades meeting the requirements of UL Standard 555 �
6'�Edition and SSSS 4`"Edirion. ,„�,
�
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 -4 �
,
�
CenturyLink VAIL
r 233300—DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES HVAC UPGRADE
"" B. Rating: UL 555 fire resistance rating of 1-1/2 hours.
�
C. Operating Temperature: UL SSSS elevated temperature rating of 250 degree F.
.
D. Leakage: UL SSSS Class II Leakage Rating.
�
E. Differential Pressure: Minimum UL SSSS differential pressure rating of 4-inch w.g.
N
� F. Velocity: Minimum UL SSSS velocity rating of 2000 fpm.
� G. Frame: Structural galvanized steel hat channel. Top and bottom frame inembers on dampers
less than 7-inch high shall be low profile design to maximize the free area of these smaller
` dampers. Four-piece construction with 1-1/2 inch minimum integal overlapping gusset �
�
reinforcements in each corner to assure square corners and provide maximum resistance to
racking.
w
H. Blades: 16 Gauge galvanized steel with full-length structural reinforcement and a double skin
'' airfoil shape.. Each blade shall be symmetrical relative to its axle pivot point, presenting
� identical perfonnance characteristics with air flowing in either direction through the dainper.
Provide symmetrical blades of varying size as reyuired to completely fill the damper opening.
w
L Blade Stops: Blade stops at top and bottoin of damper frame shall occupy no more than
�' 1/2-inch of the damper opening area to allow for maximuin free area and to minimize pressure
�
loss across the damper.
�r. J. Linkage: Concealed in jamb.
� K. Seals: Extruded silicone rubber permanently bonded to the appropriate blade edges.
L. Jamb: Flexible stainless steel compression type.
� M. AYles: Minimum 1/2-inch diameterplated steel.
�.
N. Bearings: Stainless steel sleeve type rotating in polished extruded holes in the damper frame.
�
� O. Actuator: Normally closed, 120V, 60 Hz electric motor mounted outside the air stream that
meets UBC 15-second operation requirement and is tested for minimum of one (1) year of
�,. holding with no evidence of spring return failure.
1. Actuators shall return to fully open (normal)position when reset.
�'` 2. Provide actuators as manufactured by Belimo,or equal.
�" P. Sleeve: Factory supplied as a single assembly with an integral factory sleeve.
w.
Q. Retaining Angles: Factory supplied and sized to provide installation overlap in accordance with
r the manufacturer's UL listing.
�
R. Duct Transition Connection: The Contractor is responsible for selecting and installing the
�, appropriate duct transition.
�� S. For grilles mounted in rated walls,provide front access dainpers.
�.
�
, DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300-5
t
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
233300—DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES HVAC UPGRADE
T. Heat-Activated Teinperature Release Device: Control close and lock damper during test, smoke '"�
detection, power failure, ar fire condirions through actuator closure spring. At no tiine shall
actuator disengage from damper blades. Allow damper to be automatically reset reinotely ar
manually reset locally after test, sinoke detection, ar power failure. 165 Degee F release ���
teinperature. �
�
2.5 TURNING VANES �
A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated 22 gauge, single blade 4-1/2 inch radius, 3-1/4
inch spacing turning vanes and Type 2,4-1/2 inch wide runners,constructed in accordance with �
SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards" Fig 2.3. �
B. Do not use trailing edge turning vanes.
�
�
2.6 DUCT HARDWARE
A. General: Provide duct hardware,manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project,for �
the following:
1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct �
test holes,consisting of slot and cover,for instrument tests.
2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each inanual volume damper, quadrant lock device on one
(1) end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12-inch.
Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated
ductwork. wr
2.7 DUCT ACCESS DOORS �
A. General: Provide access doors, whether shown or not, at all fire dampers, smoke dampers, ,,,,�
temperature control dampers, branch balancing dampers, outside air plenums, inlet of fans,
upstream of all duct smoke detectors and all other equipment requiring service and/or access.
B. Construction: Construct of same or greater gauge as ductwork served, provide insulated doors �
for insulated ductwork. Provide flush fraines for uninsulated ductwark, extended frames for ,r
externally insulated duct. All access doors shall have gasket and will be air-tight. Provide one
(1) side hinged, other side with one (1) handle-type latch for doors 12-inch high and smaller, �
two (2) handle-type latches for larger doors. For spiral ductwork, use United McGill
combination access section type ARF-SD for non-insulated duct systems and type ARF-ID
double wall insulated door for insulated ducted systems(all supply ductwork). �
2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated �
equipinent. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into
duct flanges for attachinent to duct and equipment. Make air-tight joint. Provide adequate joint �
flexibility to allow far thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional moveinent, and also capable of
absorbing vibrations of connected equipment. Shelf life shall be verified to not exceed six (6)
�
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300-6 �
�
�� �
CenturyLink VA1L
r 233300—DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES HVAC UPGRADE
"" months. Any sign of cracking on interiar or exterior shall be cause for replacement
� immediately.
�, B. Use the following product types for each application accordingly:
� 1. Indoor Equipment Non-Corrosive Air Systems: Heavy glass fabric, double-coated with
DuPont's NEOPRENE, non-combustible fabric, fire retardant coating with good
resistance to abrasion and flexing. Fabric shall be 30 ounce per syuare yard, capable of
� operating at—10 degree F to 200 degree F, waterproof, air tight, 6-inches wide, complies
with NFPA 90 and UL Standard #214. "Ventglas" Model as inanufactured by
VentFabric, Inc.
,�
� PART 3 -EXECUTION
r
� 3.1 INSPECTION
�" A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not
� proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
the Engineer.
�^
� 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
�'� A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with �nanufacturer's installation instructions, with
�. applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.
�
� B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in supply, return and exhaust air
systems,and elsewhere as indicated.
rn
C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side,
� except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.
^ D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of
�, ductwork accessories properly with other work.
� E. Provide duct access doors whether shown or not for inspection and cleaning befare and after all
� filters, coils, fans, autoinatic dainpers, at fire dainpers (minimuin 16-inch x 24-inch in ducts
�` larger than 18-inch), fire/smoke dainpers, upstream of duct sinoke detectors and elsewhere as �
indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication. Provide multiple access doors for large
p+ ductwork to provide adequate reach to equipment.
W
F. Provide fire dampers and sinoke dainpers at locations shown, where ducts and outlets pass
�"" through fire rated components,and where required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
Y.�
G. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where
� branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing.
w H. Provide balancing dampers on high pressure systems where indicated. Use splitter dampers
,.
only where indicated on Drawings.
�
, DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 -7
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
233300—DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES HVAC UPGRADE
L Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans �
and equipinent subject to forced vibration. Provide matching flanged backing frame with
Iflexible connector where flanged fan connections are provided.
J. Where fire and sinoke dampers are installed in fire and sinoke rated construction, provide ��
firestopping between fire and fire smoke damper sleeve and substrate.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL �
A. Operate installed ductwark accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test far �
air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories,as required to obtain
proper operation and leakproof performance.
B. Test every fire and fire/sinoke dainper for proper operation, provide letter to the Architect/ �
Engineer certifying this work is complete and all dampers are functioning properly.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ,�
A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dainpers ��
and adjust for proper action.
B. Label access doors in accordance with Division 23 Section"Mechanical Identification".
C. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, �
and Balancing".
D. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with 1�
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
�
3.5 EXTRA STOCK ��
A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one (1) link for every ten (10) installed of each '�""°
temperature range; obtain receipt. �
END OF SECTION 233300 �
'
'
'
�
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300- 8 »�-
�
. __ .
�
r
��� CenturyLinl� VAIL
� 233413—AIR HANDLING FANS HVAC UPGRADE
p„
� SECTION 233413 -AIR HANDLING FANS
r
PART l -GENERAL
i�
" ].1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
W
A. Extent of Air Handling Equipment Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
� schedules,and by requirements of this section.
� B. This Section includes the following types of Air-Handling Equipment:
1. Centrifugal Plug Fans
• C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for vibration control; control system; sequence of
operation; testing,adjusting and balancing.
M
� D. Refer to Division 26 section for the following work; not work of this section.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connections at air handling units.
r
E. Refer to Division 23 section "Mechanical/Electrical Requirements far Mechanical Equipment".
r.
" 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air handling
p equipment of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in siinilar
service for not less than three (3)years.
Y
B. Codes and Standards:
� 1. Fans Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power air density, speed of
� rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard
210/ASHRAE Standard 51 -Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
!" 2. UL Compliance: Provide air handling equipment which are listed by UL and have UL
� label affixed.
3. UL Compliance: Provide air handling equipment which are designed, manufactured, and
� tested in accordance with UL 805 "Power Ventilatars".
4. NEMA Coinpliance: Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with NEMA
'' Standards.
5. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for
� Calculating Fan Sound Ratings froin Laboratory Test Data". Test fans in accordance
�� with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating". Fans shall be licensed to bear
the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal.
"' 6. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and
r components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be defined in
OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
,� 7. Electrical Component Standards: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA
70 "National Electrical Code".
�
�
�
a AIR HANDLING FANS 233413 - 1
9
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
233413—AIR HANDLING FANS HVAC UPGRADE
1.3 SUBMITTALS �
A. Product Data: Subinit manufacturer's technical data for air handling equipinent including
specifications, capacity ratings, sound data, diinensions, weights, materials, operating and +�
service/access clearance accessories furnisbed, and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction ,
details,methods of assembly of components, and field connection details.
�
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to
air-handling units. Subinit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control �
wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer-installed and
portions to be field-installed.
D. Recard Drawings: At project closeout, subinit record drawings of installed systeins products; �
in accordance with requirements of Division 1. "
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of power and graviry �
ventilator, accessory, and controL Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring
diagrams in maintenance manuals in accordance with requireinents of Division 1.
� 1.4 DELNERY STORAGE AND HANDLING '�
, �
A. Lift and suppart units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. �
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following
manufacturer's written instructions. �
C. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitarions,
with protective crating and covering. �
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad. �
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports,and roof penetrations. ��
C. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support ineinbers.
�
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS ,,�,,
A. Furnish one(1) additional complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan. �+
�
PART2-PRODUCTS
�
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Centrifugal Plug/Plenum Fans: �
AIR HANDLING FANS 233413 -2 ��
��
'
r
CenturyLink VAIL
� 233413—AIR HANDLING FANS HVAC UPGRADE
�' a. Twin Ciry Fan Co.
�,,,, b. New York Blower
c. Huntair
�
�` 2.2 FANS,GENERAL
` A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory
� finished,with indicated capacities and characteristics.
� B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at
the maximuin rated fan speed and inotor horsepower.
►
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70
� percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.
'�� C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted,with final aligmnent and belt adjustment made after installation.
,..
1. Service Factor: 1.4.
� D. Belts: Oil-resistant,non-sparking, and non-static.
. E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 30 HP; fixed
pitch for use with motors larger than 30 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjusrinent is at the
` middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide premium energy efficient
F motor.
1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan
� cabinet.
+"` F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" AFBMA L10 of
j�, 100,000 hrs, 200,000 calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 far ball bearings and
AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.
N•
G. Factory Finish: The following finishes are required:
�`" 1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coaring priar to final assembly.
2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
r=
i� H. Vibration: Provide vibration isolators as scheduled and specified in other Division 23 sections.
N
� 2.3 CENTRIFUGAL PLUG FAN
� A. Provide housed fan assembly complete with motor, non-overloading centrifugal fan wheel,
flanged mounting panel,screw type motor adjustinent.
Y
B. Belt�uard shall be provided at fan motor and belt to meet OSHA requirements.
p�
� C. Construction of fan shall be completely welded.
� D. Fan shall be painted witb enamel paint.
;
�i"' E. Ceramic felt seal element between fan panel and metal retaining disc.
�
4
� AIR HANDLING FANS 233413 -3
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
233413—AIR HANDLING FANS HVAC UPGRADE
F. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated, self-ali�ning pillow-block type; tapered roller bearings with �
double-locking collars and two-piece, cast iron housing.
G. Fan Wheel: Single width, single-inlet, welded to cast iron or cast steel hub and spun steel inlet �
cone,with hub keyed to the shaft.
H. Accessories: The following accessories are required where indicated. �
l. Inlet Vanes: Radial vanes with linkage for automatic operation.
2. Shaft Seals: Air tight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single width fans.
PART 3 -EXECUTION �
3.1 EXAMINATION �
�i
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances,housekeeping pads,and other conditions affecting performance of fans. �
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
��,
3.2 1NSTALLATION,GENERAL '�
A. Install fans level and plumb, in accardance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support �
units using vibration control devices as indicated. Vibration control devices are specified in
Division 23 Section "Vibration Controls".
1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using housed spring isolators. "�
Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete equipinent base.
2. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadinium-plated hardware.
a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7. „�,,,
3. Suspended Units: Suspend units froin structural steel support frame using threaded steel
rods and vibration isolation springs. '"�
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and �
maintenance.
.�
3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Construct concrete equipment pads as follows: �
1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4-
inches larger in both directions than the overall dimensions of the supported unit. �+
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels confonning to ASTM A 36, size and location as
indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor slab. °�
� 3. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with fonn release.compounds. Chamfer top
edge and corners of pad.
4. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate q�
securing units. �
..,.
�
.r�
AIR HANDLING FANS 233413 -4 �
I
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 233413—AIR HANDLING FANS HVAC UPGRADE
�" 5. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Partland Cement
�,, confonning to ASTM C 150, 4,000 psi compressive strength, and nonnal weight
aggregate.
�r 6. Clean exposed steel form in accordance with SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP
�' 2 or SP 3 and apply two(2)coats of rust-preventive metal priiner.
�
r
3.4 CONNECTIONS
►.
A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 23 sections. Make final duct
^ connections on inlet and outlet duct connections with flexible connections.
.
B. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
� factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical
Installer.
' 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal
r
and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Ensure that rotation is in direction
indicated and intended for proper perfonnance. Do not proceed with centrifugal fan start-
�_ up until wiring installation is acceptable to Centrifugal Fan Installer.
2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring are specified in Division 23.
� 3. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National
� Electrical Code.
�
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
r.
A. Upon completion of installation of air handling equipment, and after motor has been energized
� with normal power source, test equipment to deinonstrate compliance with requirements.
� Where possible,field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
r
� B. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service
representative to perform the following:
� 1. lnspect the field assembly of components and installation of fans including ductwork and
electrical connections.
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.
r
� 3.6 ADJUSTING,CLEANING,AND PROTECTING
� A. Start-up, test and adjust air handling equipment in presence of manufacturer's authorized
representative.
Yw
B. Adjust damper linkages for proper dainper operation.
�
y� C. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum
clean fan wheel and cabinet.
�
�
w AIR HANDLING FANS 233413 -5
�
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
233413—AIR HANDLING FANS HVAC UPGRADE
3.7 SPARE PARTS �
A. General: Furnish to Owner with receipt one (1) spare set of belts for each belt driven air
handling equipment. �
i
3.8 PRE-STARTUP CHECK ,�
A. Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-up: "`
1. Remove shipping blocking and bracing.
2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for �
� piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thennal overload protection �rf�
is installed in motors, starters,and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. �
4. Disconnect fan drive froin inotor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align
belts, and install belt guards. �
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended �
u ncants.
�.-
6. Verify manual and automatic volume control and that fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in the full-open position. �
7. Disable automatic teinperature control operators. �
B. Starting Procedures for Fans: ��
l. Energize inotor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust
fan to indicated RPM.
2. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. „�
3. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.
D. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air- ,,,�}
handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION �
A. Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service representative to �
train Owner's maintenance personnel on the following:
1. Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing,
preventative maintenance, and how to obtain replacement parts. ��
2. Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in
Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" and Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical
Reyuirements". �
B. Schedule training with at least seven(7)days'advance notice.
END OF SECTION 233413 �
�
AIR HANDLING FANS 233413 -6 �
'
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 233600—AIR TERMINALS HVAC UPGRADE
�
,, SECTION 233600-AIR TERMINALS
a
PART1 -GENERAL
W
� 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
�
A. Extent of Air Terminals Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules,
� and by requireinents of this section.
� B. Types of Air Terminals specified in this section include the following: �
R
1. Variable Volume Air Tenninals
a. Shutoff Single Duct
� b. Reheat
�� C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for external insulation of air terminals; testing, adjusting and
,. balancing of air terminals; teinperature controls which are to be furnished by others but
installed as work of this section; not work of this section.
�
D. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following wark; not work of this section.
�"` 1. Power supply wiring froin power source to power connection on air tenninals. Include
starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished,
� or factory-installed,by manufacturer�. �
�,
E. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, coinplying with requirements of
�° Division 26 sections:
� 1. Control wiring between field-installed controls and air terminals.
a. Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic Temperature
�,R Controls is work of that section.
�
�.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
y; A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Finns regularly engaged in manufacturer of air tenninals with
characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
r� similar service for not less than five(5)years.
�' B. Codes and Standards:
1. ADC Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in accordance
� with ADC standards,and bear ADC Seal.
� 2. ARI Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in accordance
with ARI 880 "Industry Standard for Air Terminals" and bear ARI certification seal.
�"` 3. NFPA Compliance: Construct air terminals using acoustical and thennal insulations
j� complying with NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
� 1.3 SUBMITTALS
�,
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including performance and sound
�" data far each size and type of air terminal furnished; schedule showing drawing designation,
�
m AIR TERMINALS 233600- 1
�
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
233600—AIR TERMINALS HVAC UPGRADE ��
room location, number furnished, model nuinber, size, and accessories furnished; and '"�
installation and start-up instructions. r�
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions, �
weight loadings,required clearances,and inethods of assembly of components.
�
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder-type wiring diagrams for electric power and control �
coinponents,clearly indicating required field electrical connections.
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout,submit record drawings of installed systems products,in
accordance with requirements of Division 23. �
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of air tenninal;
� including"trouble-shooting"maintenance guide. Include this data,product data, shop drawings, �
and maintenance data in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 23.
1.4 DELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING �
A. Deliver air terminals wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on �
outside of container type of air tenninal and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending �-�
and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in boxes. �
B. Store air terminals in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffia �
Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose
with waterproof wrapping.
��
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
..r
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following: �
1. Supply Air Terminals:
a. Titus Products Division
b. Price ��
c. Krueger
2.2 SUPPLY AIR TERMINALS !�
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and tested air terminals as indicated, selected with
performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on schedule. �
B. Air terminal units shall be low pressure drop, single duct throttling type pressure independent
and suitable for use in pressure medium variable volume air distribution systems. �
C. Casing shall be 22 gauge galvanized steel construction with intemal acoustical coated 1-inch
thick, 1-1/2 lb. density fiberglass insulation, inlet and outlet duct connection and discharge
sound attenuator,where scheduled. �
AIR TERMINALS 233600-2 �
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 233600—A1R TERMINALS HVAC UPGRADE
" D. Internal damper blade shall be extruded aluininum or 18 gauge steel with keyed fit shaft and
�, nylon bushing. Damper shall seal against gasketed stops maximum 2 percent leakage at
3.0-inch S.P. All mechanical parts shall be galvanized or non-ferrous.
O
k.
E. Electric heating coils shall be constructed of electric resistance heating elements in galvanized
steel casing with control box and factory wiring. Provide over-temperature protection and UL
listing as duct heater.
� F. Provide label on each air tenninal unit, indicating plan designation, unit size, CFM range and
settings and calibration curve.
.
G. Controls shall include wall mounted thermostat, modulating damper, dainper operator furnished
by the Teinperature Control Contractor, and factory installed by the equipment manufacturer,
pressure independent pneuinatic cross-shaped flow sensor with amplifying total pressure pickup
points connected in parallel to a central averaging chamber(an inlet velocity sensor with pickup
�` points connected in series shall not be accepted), for measuring inlet volume. The sensor shall
e
amplify duct velocity pressure by a factar of 1.�5 and shall maintain control accuracy with the
same size inlet duct in any configuration. Specific control component requirements are
+� specified in Division 23 Section Direct Digital Control Systems.
�
� PART 3 -EXECUTION
� 3.1 INSPECTION
ir
A. Exainine areas and conditions under which air terminals are to be installed. Do not proceed
'" with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in inanner acceptable to Installer.
`
� 3.2 INSTALLATION OF AIR TERMINALS
�` A. GeneraL• Install air terminals as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
�
�, B. Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other wark;
and maintain sufficient clearance for nonnal service and maintenance, but in no case less than
M that recoinmended by manufacturer.
�
C. Duct Connections: Connect ductwork to air tenninals in accordance with Division 23 ductwork
�, sections.
i�
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
�
� A. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air
terminals,and duct connections to air terminals,are leak-tight.
P�
B. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and retest to
�'' demonstrate compliance.
�
r.
� AIR TERMINALS 233600-3
1r
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
233600—AIR TERMINALS HVAC UPGRADE
3.4 CLEANING �
� �
A. Clean exposed factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturers touch-up paint. �
�
END OF SECTION 233600
�
'
,
,
'
'
'
'
'
�
,
,
,
�
AIR TERMINALS 233600-4 �
,
r
CenturyLink VAIL
� 233650—SOUND ATTENUATORS HVAC UPGRADE
r
� SECTION 233650 - SOUND ATTENUATORS
�
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
�' 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
i
A. Sound Attenuators required by this section are indicated on drawings and schedules, and are not
� necessarily limited to this section.
� B. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwark; external insulation of sound attenuators; not
�
work of this section. �
r
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
r
� A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Finns regularly engaged in manufacturer of sound attenuators
with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
�, in similar service for not less than five(5)years.
� B. Codes and Standards:
1. NFPA Compliance: Construct sound attenuators using acoustical fill complying with
�° NFPA 90A, "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
�, 2. ASTM Compliances: Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM E90 and E477.
�
� 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including perfonnance data for
� each size and type of sound attenuator furnished; schedule showing drawing designation, room
r� location,number furnished,model number, size,and accessories furnished; and installation and
start-up instructions.
s
� B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions,
weight loadings,required clearances, and methods of asse�nbly of components.
�
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products, in
�° accordance with requirements of Division 1.
"� D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of sound attenuator;
�, including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, and shop
drawings in maintenance manual;in accardance with requireinents of Division 1.
e
�" 1.4 DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
"� A. Deliver sound attenuators with identification on outside of casings indicating type of sound
i�a attenuator and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending, and prevent dirt and debris
from entering and settling in sound attenuators.
r
r
� SOUND ATTENUATORS 233650- 1
L
i �
CenturyLink VAIL �
233650—SOUND ATTENUATORS HVAC UPGRADE
B. Store sound attenuators so as to protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where �
possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, stare above grade and enclose with �
waterproof wrapping.
�
PART 2- PRODUCTS "�
2.1 MANUFACTURERS �
A. Manufacturers: Subject to coinpliance with requirements, provide products by one of the �
following:
B. Duct Silencers: �
L Kinetics
2. Vibro Acoustics
3. Price Industries
�
2.2 DUCT SILENCERS
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and tested duct silencers as indicated, select with �
perfonnance characteristics whicb match, or exceed those indicated on schedule.
B. Casings: Construct of galvanized sheet metal with gauge and seam construction equal or �
greater than that recommended by SMACNA Duct Construction Standards for ductwork of
same size and pressure class; but not less than 22 gauge for outer casing and 22 gauge for inner
casing. All seams shall be lock fonned and mastic filled. "'�
C. Acoustic Fill: Provide inorganic mineral or glass fiber filler inaterial, inert, vermin and
moisture proof, of sufficient density to obtain specified acoustic perfonnance. Pack under not
less than 5 percent compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and settling. �
D. Acoustic Performance: Provide silencer ratings that have been determined in duct at
reverberative room test facility. Test silencer with air flow in both directions through silencer, �
in accordance with ASTM E477, "Methods of Testing Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated
Silencers for Acoustical and Airflow Performance".
�
E. For acoustic ratings, include dynamic insertion loss and self-generated noise power levels for
both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and reverse flow (air and noise in opposite
directions)with airflow at the design FPM face velocity.
F. Aerodynamic Perfonnance: Provide silencers with static pressure loss equal to ar less than that �""�
scheduled.
G. Certification: Provide certified test data on dynamic insertion loss, self-noise power levels, and �
aerodynamic perfonnance. Conduct all rating tests at same facility. Open testing facility for
inspection by Architect/Engineer if requested. �
�
SOUND ATTENUATORS 233650-2 �
1
�n CenturyLink VAIL
�' 233650—SOUND ATTENUATORS HVAC UPGRADE
"' PART 3 -EXECUTION
�...
� 3.1 EXAMINATION
�'� A. Examine areas and conditions under which sound attenuators are to be installed. Do not
r
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
�
� 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SOUND ATTENUATORS
Y
A. GeneraL• Install sound attenuators as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's
�, installation instructions.
'� B. Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other work;
and maintain sufficient clearance for nonnal service and maintenance, but in no case less than
'" that recommended by manufacturer.
r
C. Duct Connections: Connect ductwark to sound attenuators in accordance with Division 23
� ductwork sections.
�.
r�
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
i1�. A. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that sound
attenuators,and duct connections to sound attenuators,are leak tight.
�
w
B. Repair or replace sound attenuators and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and
retest to demonstrate compliance.
�
� 3.4 CLEANING
!" A. Clean exposed factory finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
�, inanufacturer's touch-up paint.
�
END OF SECTION 233650
4
'
'
'
�
� SOUND ATTENUATORS 233650-3
�
'
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
w 233713—AIR OUTLETS&INLETS HVAC UPGRADE
r
m SECTION 233713 -AIR OUTLETS & INLETS
�
�
PART 1 -GENERAL
'� 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
`
A. Extent of Air Outlets and Inlets Work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by
� requirements of this section.
� B. Types of Air Outlets and Inlets required for project include the following:
,„ 1. Diffusers
2. Registers and Grilles
� 3. Louvers
� C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwork, duct accessories; testing and balancing; not
� work of this section.
�
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
4.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Finns regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets
� of types and capacities reyuired, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
� for not less than five(5)years.
� B. Codes and Standards:
� 1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650
"Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets".
�, 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accardance with ASHRAE
�� 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets".
�' 3. ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under
requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification,Rating and Test Manual".
�" 4. ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal.
� 5. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA SOOL-99
"Laboratory Method of Testing Louvers for Rating".
� 6. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
7. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A
"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
� 1.3 SUBMITTALS
�° A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including
�, the following:
1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, number
�a furnished,model number, size, and accessories furnished.
2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating
�`� construction, finish,and mounting details.
�"'
r
�+ AIR OUTLETS &INLETS 233713 - 1
�.
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
233713—AIR OUTLETS&INLETS HVAC UPGRADE
3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration �
ability, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings.
Indicate selections on data. �
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air outlet �
and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products, in �
accordance with requirements of Division 1.
D. Maintenance Data: Subinit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and �
� spare parts lists. Include this data,product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in
accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING �
A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify �
on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or �-
� bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
�
B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work �
traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and
enclose with waterproof wrapping. �
PART2-PRODUCTS
�
2.1 MANUFACTURERS '
I �
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the �
following:
]. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles:
a. Krueger; Division of Philips Industries,Inc. �
b. Titus Products Division; Philips Industries,Inc.
c. E.H. Price.
d. Air Concepts "�
2. Louvers:
a. Ruskin
b. Greenheck
�
2.2 AIR DIFFUSERS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard air diffusers where �
shown; of size, shape,capacity and rype indicated; constructed of inaterials and components as
indicated, and as required for complete installation. �
�
AIR OUTLETS& INLETS 233713 -2 �
1
�..
CenturyLink VAIL
k 233713—AIR OUTLETS&INLETS HVAC UPGRADE
'' B. Perfonnance: Provide air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses,
� throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current
data.
�
C. Surface (Wall or Ceiling) compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are
� compatible with adjacent systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into surface with
�, accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications far
types of systems which will contain each type of air diffuser.
�
D. Types: Provide diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on Air
�'� Device Schedule.
4
,, 2.3 REGISTERS AND GRILLES
� A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard registers and grilles
where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of inaterials and
� components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
4
B. Perfonnance: Provide registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity
� traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in
�
manufacturer's current data.
� C. Wall Coinpatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with
� adjacent wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with
4 accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for
types of wall construction which will contain each type of wall register and grille.
�
�, D. Types: Provide registers and grilles of type,capacity,and with accessories and finishes as listed
on air device schedule.
M
�`' 2.4 LOUVERS
� A. General: Provide stationary extruded aluminuin louvers in sizes and locations indicated on the
� Drawings.
�� B. Perfonnance: Provide beginning of water penetration(0.01 oz.per sq.ft.) at a free area velocity
k of no less than 900 fpm at standard air conditions based on mill finish, 48-inch x 48-inch test
size per AMCA Standard 511.
� C. Frame: 6-Inch deep channel, 0.81-inch thick 6063-TS extruded aluminum alloy. Coordinate
� with wall construction shown on the Architectural Drawings and provide frame and sill sryle
necessary to provide a weatherproof installation.
P
�, D. Blades: Drainable blade design 0.81-inch thick, 6063-TS extruded aluminum alloy.
�. E. Mullions: Provide exposed vertical mullions along horizontal dimension of louver opening
�,
when louver exceeds manufacturer recommended single section size.
�
� AIR OUTLETS & INLETS 233713 -3
6
I �
CenturyLink VAIL �
233713—AIR OUTLETS&INLETS HVAC UPGRADE
F. Louver Screens: On inside face of exhaust air louvers and outside face of outside air louvers, �
provide removable 1/2-inch expanded mesh framed aluminum bird screen. �
G. Finish: Mill EnameL �
�
PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not �
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION �
A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accardance with manufacturer's written instructions and �
in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended
functions.
B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface �
installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.
C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction �
"Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical
ceiling modules.
�
33 SPARE PARTS �
�.
A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, three (3) operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that
require them. �
END OF SECTION 233713 �
�
'
'
'
�
AIR OUTLETS & INLETS 233713 -4 �
,
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 234100—AIR CLEANING DEVICES HVAC UPGRADE
�
�, SECTION 234100 -AIR CLEANING DEVICES �
�
�
PART1 -GENERAL
! 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
,
A. Extent of Air Cleaning Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules,
p and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of Air Cleaning Equipment specified in this section include tbe following:
1. Air Filters:
a. Replaceable(Throwaway).
" b. Extended Surface, Self-supporting.
,,
2. Filter Gauges.
, C. Filter sections of packaged air handling units are work of this section.
�
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Finns regularly engaged in manufacture of air cleaning
" equipment of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
� service for not less than five (5)years.
r• B. Codes and Standards:
1. NFPA Compliance: Coinply with applicable portions of NFPA 90A and 90B, and NEC
�� pertaining to installation of air filters and associated electric wiring and equipment.
�, 2. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Standards pertaining to safety and perfonnance of air
� filter units.
3. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE Standard 52.2 MERV and
MERV-A for method of testing,and for recording and calcularing air flow rates.
� 4. AHRI Compliance: Comply with provisions of AHRI Standard 850 pertaining to test and
performance of air filter units.
r
�
1.3 SUBMITTALS
� A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data including, dimensions, weights,
required clearances and access, flow capacity including initial and final pressure drop at rated
+� air flow,efficiency and test method,fire classification,and installation instructions.
" B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for filter rack assemblies
� indicating dimensions,materials, and inethods of asseinbly of components.
�. C. Samples: Submit one (1) sample filter cartridge for each type of filter required; in accordance
with requirements of Division l.
�..
D. Wiring Diagrams: Subinit manufacturer's electrical requireinents for power supply wiring to air
�� filter units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagram for control wiring. Clearly
r
• AIR CLEANING DEVICES 234100- 1
M
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
234100—AIR CLEANING DEVICES HVAC UPGRADE
differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field- �
installed. irm
E. As-Built Drawings: At project closeout, submit As-Built drawings of installed systeins �!
products in accordance with requirements of Division 1. �
� F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of filter and �
rack required. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
�
PART2 -PRODUCTS
�
�
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
�
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following: �
1. Air Filters and Housings:
a. Cam-Farr Corp.
b. Flanders Filters, Inc. �
2.2 AIR FILTERS �
A. Replaceable (Throwaway) Panel Pre Filters: Provide factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat
panel type replaceable air filters with holding frames; as indicated, in sizes indicated, with 2-
inch thick UL Class 1 throwaway media inaterial; construct inedia of interlaced glass fibers, �
spray with non-flammable adhesive, frame in throwaway fiberboard casings, and sandwich
between perforated metal grills. Provide filters with rated face velocity of 500 fpin, initial
resistance of not greater than 0.15-inch w.g., final rated resistance of 0.50-inch w.g. MERV-A �
8.
B. Extended Surface Self-Supporting Filters: Provide factory-fabricated, dry, extended surface
self-supporting filters with�holding frames; where indicated, in sizes indicated. Equip with UL �
Class 1 fibrous inedia material constructed so that individual pleats are maintained in tapered
form by flexible internal supports under rated air flow conditions. Construct holding frames of
16 gauge galvanized steel and provide suitable fasteners and gasketing to hold filter units and to ""�
prevent unfiltered air passing between media frames and holding devices. Design holding
frames which are suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. Provide filters with
rated face velocity of 500 fpm, initial resistance of 0.25-inch w.g. with 60-65 percent dustspot
efficiency, 0.40-inch w.g. with 80-85 percent efficiency, and 0.70-inch w.g. with 90-95 percent
efficiency,and final rated resistance of 1.0-inch w.g. MERV-A 13. '�
2.3 FILTER HOLDING SYSTEMS �
A. Front and Rear Access Filter Frames: Provide filter bank fraining system, constructed of 16 "�1
gauge galvanized steel. Design system for either upstream (front) or downstream (rear) filter
servicing. Cut to size and pre-punch members for easy assembly into modules of size and
capacity as scheduled or noted on drawings. Provide permanently gasketed framing members to
�
AIR CLEANING DEVICES 234100-2 ��
1
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 234100—AIR CLEANING DEVICES HVAC UPGRADE
" prevent bypass of unfiltered air. If vertical support ineinbers are required to prevent deflection
� of horizontal members, install so as not to interfere with either installation or operation of
filters. Incorporate common gasketed prefilters and final filters, filter frame with four filter
� retainer clips for each filter frame, removable from back. Provide factory-installed positive
sealing device for each row of filters, to insure seal between gasketed filter elements. Provide
�' hardware necessary for field assembly.
r �
B. Side Servicing Housings: Provide factory-asseinbled side servicing housings with flanges for
a insertion into ductwork system as indicated. Construct of 16 gauge galvanized steel. Provide
integral pre-filter tracks to accommodate 2-inch throw-away or cleanable filters. Provide access
" doors with continuous gasketing on periineter and positive locking devices. Incorporate
� positive-sealing gasket material on channels to seal top and bottom of filter cartridge frames to
prevent bypass. Arrange so filter cartridges can be loaded from either access door.
r 1. Leak-test housing by pressurizing to 3-inch w.g. and soap-bubble test housing joints,
door seals, and filter sealing edges. Provide crank-operated spring-loaded filter-sealing
� mechanism with limit stop, so geared that total pressure of 600 pounds will be exerted on
,,
each filter. Design cla�nping frame to provide continuous knife-edge seal for all four(4)
edges of each individual filter.
�
►' 2.4 FILTER GAUGES
4
A. Provide diaphragm-type filter gauge for each filter bank, with dial and pointer, graduated to
� read from 0 to 2-inch w.g.
l. Provide pressure taps,tubing,gauge connections,and mounting bracket.
�
'" PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
p 3.1 INSPECTION
�' A. Examine areas and conditions under which air filters and filter housings will be installed. Do
�
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable
to Installer.
Y
�° 3.2 1NSTALLATION
�`� A. General: Coinply with installation requirements as specified elsewhere in these specifications
�, pertaining to air filters housing/casings, and associated supporting devices.
� B. Install air filters and holding frame devices of types indicated, and where shown; in accordance
with air filter manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices; to
'"` ensure that filters comply with requireinents and serve intended purposes.
�.
C. Locate each filter unit accurately in position indicated, in relation to other work. Position unit
�,. with sufficient clearance for nonnal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames
securely to substrate.
�:
�
�- AIR CLEANING DEVICES 234100- 3
�-
i �
CenturyLink VAIL �
234100—AIR CLEANING DEVICES HVAC UPGRADE
D. Coordinate with other work including ductwork and air handling unit work, as necessary to �
interface installation of filters properly with other wark.
E. Install filters in proper position to prevent passage of unfiltered air. Seal between each filter �
frame and filter frame and plenum housing airtight. �
F. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-inounted.
Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. �
l. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with nlanufacturer's submittal
and installation requireinents of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment
start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer. �
G. Install air filter gauge pressure tips upstream and downstreain of filters to indicate air pressure
drop through air filter. Mount filter gauges on outside of filter housing or filter plenuin, in �
accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gauges if any,for proper readings.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL �
A. Operate installed air filters to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage
of unfiltered air while systein is operating. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to �
demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units, and proceed with
retesting.
3.4 EXTRA STOCK �
A. Provide one (1) complete extra set of filters for each air handling systein. If systein is designed "'�
to include pre-filters and after-filters, provide both types of filters. Install new filters at
completion of air handling system work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
Obtain receipt from Owner that new �lters have been installed. Store extra set at
Owner's designated location. �
END OF SECTION 234100 �
'
'
'
'
�
AIR CLEANING DEVICES 234100 -4 ��
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
I� 236200—CONDENSING LTNITS HVAC UPGRADE
�.
� SECTION 236200 -CONDENSING UNITS
�
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
" 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS �
Y
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
� and Divisions 1 and 23 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
�
�
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
r A. Section includes:
1. Air-cooled condensing units.
�
� B. Manufacturers shall be responsible to provide any information to the Contractar priar to bidding
which may impact the installed cost for the Contractor including,but not limited to:
�. 1. Power wiring sizing,quantity and type of conductors and tenninations requirements.
2. Control Power.
�' 3. Auxiliary piping connections.
�` C. Refer to Division 26 section for the following work; not work of this section.
�, 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on tenninal units.
2. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with
r requirements of Division 26 sections:
� a. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and tenninal
unit control panels.
� 1) Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic Temperature
Controls is work of that section.
r,
D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for Automatic Temperature Controls not factory installed
" required in conjunction with condensing units; not work of this section.
�
,� 1.3 REFRIGERANTS
�" A. All refrigerants used for each condensing unit shall be on the latest EPA list of approved
refrigerants and environmentally friendly.
�
�,� B. No CFC based refrigerants shall be used.
�°
1��
1.4 SUBMITTALS
�, A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of
selected inodel clearly indicated, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), dimensions,
� required clearances, and inethods of asseinbly of components, furnished specialties and
accessories;and installation and startup instructions.
�"
�
� CONDENSING UNITS 236200- 1
i�
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
236200—CONDENSING UNITS HVAC UPGRADE
B. Wiring Diagrams: Subinit ladder-type wiring diagrams for power and control wiring required �
for final installation of condensing units and controls. Clearly differentiate between portions of �
wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
�
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products in �
accardance with requirements of Division 1.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each condensing �
unit, control, and accessory; including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide; plus servicing,
and preventative maintenance procedures and schedule. Include this data and product data in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requireinents of Division 23. "'�
�
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE „�
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of condensing units, of "�
types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than five(5)years. �
B. Codes and Standards:
1. Capacity ratings for condensing units shall be in accordance with ARI Standard 360 �
"Standard for Coinmercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment" and all
other ARI standards applicable to the specific equipment as applicable.
2. Refrigeration system of condensing units shall be constructed in accordance with �
ASHRAE Standard ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
3. Condensing units shall meet or exceed the minimum COP/Efficiency levels as prescribed
in the current edition of ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Standard for Buildings".
4. Condensing units shall be listed by UL and have UL Label affixed. �
5. Unit construction shall comply with ANSI Safety Codes.
6. Unit construcrion shall coinply with the Nationa] Electrical Code.
I 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING �
A. Handle condensing units and components carefully to prevent damage. Follow manufacturer's �
written instructions for rigging. Replace damaged condensing units or components.
B. Store condensing units and components in clean dry place off the ground. Protect from �"�
weather,water,and physical damage.
1.7 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY
�
A. Warranty on Motor/Compressor: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer,agreeing to
replace/repair, within warranty period, inotors/compressors with inadeyuate or defective �
materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to
perfonn as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting,
and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranry period. Replacement is limited to �1
component replacement only,and does not include labor for removal and reinstallation.
1. Extended Warranty Period: Five(5)years from date of substantial completion. �
�.
�i
CONDENSING UNITS 236200-2 �
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
�. 236200—CONDENSING UNITS HVAC UPGRADE
�" PART 2 -PRODUCTS
i�
� 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
� A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
" 1. Air-Cooled Condensing Units:
� a. Carrier Air Conditioning
b. McQuay
F
�' 2.2 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
� A. General: Factory-asseinbled and tested air-cooled condensing units, consisting of casing,
� compressors, condensers, coils, condensing coil hail guard, condenser fans and inotors, and unit
controls.
r
� B. Unit Casings: Designed for outdoar installation and complete with weather protection for
components and controls, and complete with removable panels for reyuired access to
P compressors, controls,condenser fans,motars,and drives. Additional features include:
l. Steel, galvanized or zino-coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated and finished with
�`` manufacturer's standard paint coating;
2. Lifting lugs to facilitate rigging of units;
� 3. � Facto installed metal illes for rotection of condenser coil durin shi m
rY- �' � P g PP ��
+� installation, and operation;
4. Hinged and gasketed control panel door.
r
� C. Compressor: Scroll compressor, vibration isolated, designed for air-cooled condensing,
complete with crankcase heater, and service access valves on suction and discharge ports.
�, Additional features include:
1. Crankcase heater;
�' 2. Capacity steps for turn down to less than 20% for capacity control.
3. Hot gas bypass
� 4. Compressor shall be located in a section separated from condenser fans and coils.
i.
D. Controls: Operating and safety controls shall include high and low pressure cutouts, oil
r pressure cutout, compressor winding thermostat cutout, 3-leg compressor overload protection,
� and condenser fan motors with thermal and overload cutouts. Control transformer if required
shall be 115 volts. Provide magnetic contactors for coinpressor and condenser fan inotors.
w, Additional features include:
1. Reset relay circuit for manual resetting of cutouts from remote thermostat location;
�'` 2. Automatic non-recycling pumpdown, and timing device to prevent excessive compressor
cycling;
" 3. Un-fused disconnect switch, factory-mounted and wired, for single external electrical
�. power connection.
4. Compressor shall be a digital compressor for capacity control.
�►� 5. Extended five (5) year compressar warranry: Five (5) years from date of substantial
� completion.
�
�
� CONDENSING UNITS 236200-3
r
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
236200—CONDENSING UNITS HVAC UPGRADE
E. Condensing Section: Condenser coil shall be seamless copper tubing inechanically bonded to �
heavy-duty, aluminum fins, with separate and independent refi-igeration circuit for each �
compressor. Units shall include liquid accuinulator and sub-cooling circuit, and liquid line
service access valve. Condenser coils shall be factory-tested at 450 psig, vacuum dehydrate, "�
and filled with a holding charge of nitrogen or refrigerant. Accessories to include hail guard. �
F. Condenser fans and drives: Propeller-type condenser fans for vertical air discharge; either �
direct drive or belt drive. Additiona] features include:
1. Permanent lubricated ball bearing condenser fan motors;
2. Separate motor for each condenser fan;
3. Constant speed condenser fan motors; '�
� 4. Each fan assembly shall be dynamically and statically balanced. .w
G. Low sound package,including low sound fans and compressors. �r
H. Unit mounted factory digital panel.
rli1
I. Use R410A refrigerant. �
PART 3 -EXECUTION � �
3.1 EXAMINATION �
A. Verify roof structure, mounting supports, and ineinbrane installations are completed to the � �"�
proper point to allow installation of roof-mounted units. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactary conditions have been corrected. '�
3.2 INSTALLATION �
A. General: Install condensing units in accordance with inanufacturer's installation instructions.
Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances.
1. Provide flexible connections on all piping connecrions.] �
B. Install ground-mounted units on 4-inch thick reinforced concrete pad,4-inch larger on each side �
than condensing unit. Concrete is specified in Division 3. Coordinate installation of anchoring
devices.
C. Install roof-mounted units on equipment supparts on roof curbs with waterproof flashing. �
Anchor unit to supports with removable fasteners.
D. Air-Cooled Condensing Units: Connect refrigerant piping to unit; maintain required access to �
unit.
1. Install furnished field-mounted accessories.
�
�
CONDENSING LTNITS 236200-4 �
'
I CenturyLink VAIL
�` 236200—CONDENSING UNITS HVAC UPGRADE
� 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
L
A. Testing: Test unit when field piping is completed through all phases of operation after pressure
�' tests have been completed in compliance with Division 23 specification.
� B. Charge systems will full charge of refrigerant and oil, and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
�, replace lost refrigerant and oil. �
� 1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test,but before evacuation.
�' 2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until 35 degree F is indicated on vacuum
dehydration gauge.
M
�
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
r
A. Provide services of manufacturer's authorized service representative to provide factory start-up
�` service and to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and inaintenance of condensing units.
r
B. Start-up condensing units,in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls
� and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace dainaged or malfunctioning controls
and equipinent.
R
w C. Train Owner's personnel on start-up and shutdown procedures, troubleshooting procedures,
servicing, and preventative maintenance schedule and procedures. Review with the Owner's
�, personnel, the data contained in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division
1.
�
"`` 3.5 TRAINING
i�
A. Schedule a minimum of four (4) hours of training with Owner. The manufacturer's
A representative, and the Division 23 Contractar shall be present. The training shall be
� coordinated by the Division 23 Contractor and the Owner in conjunction with the other
mechanica] equipment on the project.
� B. Training:
� 1. Train the Owner's �naintenance personnel on start-up and shutdown procedures,
troubleshooting procedures, and servicing and preventative maintenance schedules and
!" procedures. Review with the Owner's personnel, the contents of the Operating and
� Maintenance Data specified in Division 1 and Section 230000.
2. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect/ Engineer with at least seven (7)
�. days prior notice.
r.
END OF SECTION 236200
��
�
'
�
* CONDENSING i1NITS 236200- 5
w
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
237313—AIR HANDLING LJNITS HVAC UPGRADE
�
�
PART1 -GENERAL
F
` 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
�" A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
�, Specification sections,apply to work of this section.
f
�
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
r
A. Extent of Air Handling Unit Work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements
of this section.
�
B. Types of Packaged Air Handling Units specified in this section include the following:
" 1. Indoor Air Handling Units �
`
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for vibration control units used in conjunction with air
,, handling units; field-applied insulation to air handling units; piping required in conjunction
with packaged air handling units; not wark of this section.
`
D. Electrical Work: Refer to Division 23 section "Electrical Provisions of Mechanical Work" for
A
� reyuirements.
�
E. Provide the following electrical work as wark of this section, complying with requirements of
r�� Division 26 sections:
� 1. Contro] wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control
panels.
a. Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic Temperature
� Controls is work of that section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Finns regularly engaged in manufacture of packaged air
� handling units with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in
�r,
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five(5)years.
B. Codes and Standards:
* 1. AMCA Coinpliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with AMCA
i� standards.
2. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with ARI 430 "Standard
�" for Central-Station Air Handling Units", display certification symbol on units of certified
� models.
3. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install refrigerant coils in accordance with
�: ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
� 4. NFPA Compliance: Provide air handling unit internal insulation having flame spread
rating not over twenry-five (25) and smoke developed rating no higher than fifty (50);
�
i�
� AIR HANDLING LTNITS 237313 - 1
Ir.
'
CenturyLink VA1L �
237313—AIR HANDLING iTNITS HVAC UPGRADE
and coinplying with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and �
Ventilating Systems".
5. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical coinponents required as part of air
handling units, which have been listed and labeled by UL and coinply with NEMA �
Standards.
6. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to
installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical coinponents of air handling �
units.
1.4 SUBMITTALS �
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air handling units showing
dimensions,weights, capacities,ratings,fan performance with operating point clearly indicated,
motor electrical characteristics,gauges and finishes of materials,and installation instructions. ��
B. Shop Drawings: Submit asseinbly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, weight �
loadings,required clearances,construction details,and field connection details.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit inanufacturer's electrical requirements far power supply wiring to air
handling units. Submit inanufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagams for interlock and control �
wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions ,,� :
to be field-installed.
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products in �
accordance with requirements of Division 1.
E. Maintenance Data: Subinit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication, "�
filter replacement,motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data,product ��.
data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals.
F. Manufacturer shall guarantee that dimensions in subinittals match actua] equipment diinensions �
with 1/8". Any costs incurred because of deviation from submittal shall be the sole
responsibility of the manufacturer,including replacement of the unit. �
1.5 DELNERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver air handling units with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; pack �
components in factory-fabricated protective containers.
B. Handle air handling units carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. Do �
not install damaged coinponents; replace and return damaged components to air handling unit
manufacturer.
C. Store air handling units in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. �
D. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading air handling �
units, and moving them to final location.
'
AIR HANDLING iJNITS 237313 -2 �
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL
4 237313—AIR HANDLING UNITS HVAC UPGRADE
�" E. Air handling units shall be broken down and shipped in components as field conditions require.
� A factory authorized representative shall inspect the final installation to certify that the unit has
been reassembled per factory recoinmendations and specifications.
�
` PART2 -PRODUCTS
�
4 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
�° A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air handling units of one of
,;
the following:
1. Packaged Indoor Air Handling Units:
, a. Haakon
b. Huntair
,
� " 2.2 AIR HANDLING LJNITS (Packaged Indoor Type)
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and factory-tested air handling units as indicated, of sizes
and capacities as scheduled,and as specified herein.
" B. Casings: Construct casings of 16 gauge minimum satin galvanized steel, designed to withstand
specific operating pressures. Provide casing access doors that are easily and quickly operational
A
for inspection and access to internal parts. (See additional requirements below)
� 1. Provide variable air volume units consisting of fan section, coil section, filter section
inixing section, adjustable fan inotor inounting,and drain pan.
�' 2. Provide double sloped stainless steel drain pan, located under 12 ga. Type 304 stainless
� steel cooling coil section. Pan shall extend enough to catch condensate leaving coil at
highest catalogued face velocity. Provide at least one(1) drain connection at low point in
� drain pan. Drain pan shall be constructed of 16 ga.Type 304 stainless steel.
3. Unit Base:
�' a. Each unit base shall be constructed of structural iron channel within intermediate
supports. The base cross inember is sized to keep structural integrity of the base
� frame during rigging and handling. Provide with lifting brackets.
�w 4. Housing:
a. The unit shall consist of panelized construction. The walls and roof shall be
�" constructed with 16 gauge galvanized steeL The panels are to be joined in such a
manner to prevent water and air leakage. The inner liner shall be constructed of 22
gauge perforated sheet metal with 22 gauge solid galvaneal sheet metal in the
cooling coil sections. A thermal break shall be provided between the inner liner
and the return flanges of the casing.
�' b. The housing panel deflections are limited to 1/200"' of the span dimension while
under positive and negative pressure.
� 5. lnsulation:
� a. The walls and roof of the unit shall be insulated with 2-inch insulation with a
density of 3 lb/cu ft. The insulation is covered with 1/2—inch thick duct liner when
�"'" the section of the air handler has 22 gauge perforated sheet metaL The insulation
� meets the NFPA-90A smoke and flaine spread requirements.
�
� AIR HANDLING LJNITS 237313 -3
i.
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
237313—AIR HANDLING UNITS HVAC UPGRADE
6. Floor:
a. The unit floor shall be constructed of 10 gauge aluminum checker plate except for �
the cooling sections which have 304L stainless steel drain pans. All floor seams
shall be continuously welded. No screws or bolts shall be used to attach floor to �
base.
7. Cover casing and fraine with protective finish on both sides. �
8. Provide lights in accessible sections with wire guards, factory wired to switch mounted ,�
on casing exterior.All wiring shall be in EMT conduit.
9. Units shall be provided with double wall construction throughout. The interiar section
shall be constructed of 22 gauge, perforated sheetmetal. The walls shall be 2-inch. The
panels shall be fully insulated.
10. The access doors shall be of double wall construction. Three (3) heavy duty cast alloy +�
lever type handles shall be provided on each access door. The doors shall be fully
gasketed with neoprene inaterial. Doors shall be constructed of 16 gauge satin coated �
galvanized steel (outerppanel). Doors are insulated with 2" .4.0 lb/cu.ft rigid mi��eral
wool. A 22 gauge galvanized steel liner for interior door panel. Doors shall include
double glazed tempered glass viewing parts. ,�
11. Casing shall be painted with enamel paint. �
�.
C. Coils shall be constructed with a minimum of two rows.
� �
� D. Coils: Provide heating and cooling coils of scheduled capaciry, inounted in unit in inanner r�
permitting removal.
l. Construct coils with copper tubin� primary surface and aluminum secondary surface �
bonded to tubes by method approved by specified manufacturer. Provide chilled water
coils with drain and vent connections.
E. Coil Sections: Provide common or individual casing for heating and cooling coils as required. �
Design internal structure of coil section of 16 gauge type 304 stainless steel to allow for
removal of coils, and provide suitable coil rack blank-off made of 16 gauge type 304 stainless
steel to assure no air bypass around coils. Provide 16 gauge 304 stainless steel main and ��
intermediate condensate pans and drain connections to cooling coil sections of sufficient size to .,,,�
contain and remove coil condensate. Insulate coil section casings and drain pans as specified in
earlier paragraph. �
F. Fan Sections: Provide„ plug fans, fans specifically designed and suitable for class of service
indicated. Provide adjustable motor base, adjusted with mounting bolts, to provide variation in
center distance. Provide locking nuts, or similar devices, to secure base in proper position. �
Provide belt-driven fans with adjustable pitch pulley permitting fan speed to be varied. Select
pulley for mid-point of adjustable range. Design fan shafts to be sized for first critical speed of
at lease 1.43 times the maxiinum speed for a Class III fan. Provide grease-lubricated fan pillow �
� block bearings with externally accessible fittings for lubrication. Statically and dynamically
balance fan assemblies in fan housing after final assembly.
1. Discharge dampers shall not be an acceptable means to control fan capacity for variable -�
air volume applications.
2. Fans shall be internally isolated on (4) four open space spring isolators. Flexible
connectors shall be provided at all fan connections. Fan and motor to be mounted on
heavy duty angle isolation bases.
3. Fan bearings shall be rated for a minimum of LSf�6life 200,000 hours. �+r
4. Fan shall be protected with OSHA belt guard and cage around plug fan.
�
AIR HANDLING iJNITS 237313 -4 �
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 237313—AIR I3ANDLING LTNITS HVAC UPGRADE
�""" 5. Supply fan shall be equipped with fan inlet flow measuring station and remote digital
�, readout.
6. Provide inotor removal rails.
,� 7. Provide convenience outlet in fan section.
� G. Filter Boxes: Provide filter boxes with hinged access doors Provide racks to receive filters in
� either flat or angle type pattern.
+� H. Mixing Boxes: Provide mixing boxes of physical size to match basic unit, and include equal-
sized flanged openings capable of handling full air flow. Arrange openings as indicated.
" Provide dual action parallel dainpers with blade seals and edge seals. Provide dainpers of
balanced construction,rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings.
1. Provide dampers with leakage limited to 10 cfin/square foot at 1-inch w.g.
2. Dampers shall be 0.081"extruded 3aluminuin,air foil type dainpers.
3. Frame to be constructed of minimum 0.081"extruded aluminum.
�.
M
I. Air Filters: Refer to Division 23 section "Air Cleaning" for air filters required for air bandling
units.
�
J. Air Filters: Provide air filters to fit in filter box,of tbe following type:
�r�� 1. Disposable Type: Provide pleated type air filters (60-65°/o, MERV I� 4-inch deep V
� shaped pleats, consisting of viscous coated fibers with filtering media encased in
fiberboard cell sides having perforated inetal grids on each side to provide media support.
� a. Provide filters with clean resistance not exceeding 0.45-inch w.g. at face velocity
� of 500 fpm, and ASHRAE weight arrestance efficiency of 90-95 percent, based on
�°� final operating resistance of 1.0-inch w.g.
�.
b. Provide magnehelic pressure gauge across filter section.
�„ K. Variable Frequency Drive: Provide unit with VFD as specified in Division 230515.
� L. Provide Air Flow Measuring Station: Coordinate interface with T.C. Contractor.
�' M. Electrical wiring shall be inside unit. Single point power shall have quick connects for both
�
l20/1 and 3 phase power at each shipping split.Wiring shall be in ran in EMT conduit.
� N. Factory mount VFDs, disconnect switches and lights.
r.
� PART 3 -EXECUTION
� 3.1 1NSPECTION
�
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air handling units are to be installed. Do not
�'` proceed with wark until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
� Installer.
�
�
� AIR HANDLING LJNITS 237313 -5
ir.
i =
CenturyLink VAIL �
237313—AIR HANDLING UNITS HVAC UPGRADE
3.2 1NSTALLATION OF AIR HANDLING UNITS �
A. General: Install air handling units where indicated, in accordance with equipment
inanufacturer's published installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to �
ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B. Coordination: Coordinate with other wark, including ductwork, floor construction, roof
decking,and piping, as necessary to interface installation of air handling units with other work. �
C. Access: Provide access space around air handling units for service as indicated,but in no case
less than that recommended by manufacturer. �
D. Support: Install floor-mounted air handling units on 4"-inch high reinforced concrete pad,
4-inch]arger on each side than unit base. �
E. Mounting: Mount air handling units on vibration isolatars, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
�II
F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory-mounted. Fumish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical
Installer. °�
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's subinittal �
and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment
start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to Equipment Installer. �
G. Piping Connections: Refer to Division 23 HVAC sections. Provide piping, valves, accessories,
gauges, supports,and as indicated.
1. Provide flexible connectors shutoff valves, balancing valves, unions, thermoineters '�
(supply and return),P and T types (supply and return) and other accessories on all piping e,.
connections.
H. Duct Connections: Refer to Division 23 Air Distribution sections. Provide ductwark, �
accessories as indicated.
1. Provide flexible connections,manual volume dampers with lock and quadrant on all duct �
connections.
I. Grounding: Provide positive equipment ground for air handling unit components.
�
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Upon completion of installation of air handling units, start-up and operate equipment ��
to demonstrate capabiliry and compliance with requireinents. Field correct malfunctioning °`�
units,then retest to demonstrate compliance.
�
3.4 EXTRA STOCK
'�
A. Provide one (1) complete extra set of filters far each air handling unit. Install new filters at
completion of air handling system work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing work. �'
Obtain receipt froin Owner that new filters have been installed. ,,�
�
AIR HANDLING LINITS 237313 -6 �
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
�'" 237313—AIR HANDLING UNITS HVAC UPGRADE
I� B. Provide one (1) spare set of belts for each belt-driven air handling unit, obtain receipt from
� Owner that belts have been received.
�
� 3.5 TRAINING
� A. Schedule a minimum of two (2) hours of training with Owner. The manufacturer's
representative, and the Division 23 Contractor shall be present. The training shall be
� coordinated by the Division 23 Contractor and the Owner in conjunction with the other
mechanical equipment on the project.
�
� B. Training:
1. Train the Owner's maintenance personnel on start-up and shutdown procedures,
� troubleshooting procedures, and servicing and preventative maintenance schedules and
procedures. Review with the Owner's personnel, the contents of the Operating and
�' Maintenance Data.
F
2. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect/Engineer with at least seven (7) days
prior notice.
W
� END OF SECTION 237313
�
'
,
'
�
�
'
'
1
�
�
* AIR HANDLING LJNITS 237313 -7
i�
,
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 260500—BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
�
�
PART1 -GENERAL
�
� 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
`" A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Suppleinentary
,� Conditions and Division O1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
A
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Description: Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies, and inaterials,
unless otherwise specified, necessary for the installation of complete electrical systems as
w required by the specifications and as shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions
of the contract. The Work shall also include the completion of those details of electrical work
�` not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical
� systeins.
r B. Certain labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished under other Sections of these
specifications, by Utiliry Companies or by the Owner. When this is the case, the extent, source
and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings or as described in the
specifications.
w
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
�
'' A. Coinply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where inore
4 stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Docuinents. A
.�
listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.
� B. Latest editions of the following:
1. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (as adopted and amended by the Denver
� �" Building Code).
� 2. ANSUIEEE C2 -National Electrical Safety Code.
3. NECA- Standard of Installation.
�.� 4. Other references as listed elsewhere in these specifications.
�
1.4 DEFINITIONS
�
�, A. "Furnish" or "Provide": To supply, install and connect up complete and ready far safe and
regular operation of particular wark unless specifically otherwise noted.
�
� B. "Install": To erect,mount and connect complete with related accessories.
� C. "Supply": To purchase,procure, acquire and deliver complete with related accessories.
� D. "Wark": Labor,materials, equipinent,apparatus, controls, accessories,and other items required
for proper and complete installation.
�
iw
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500- 1
�
1�.
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
260500—BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
E. "Wiring": Raceway,fittings,wire,boxes and related items. �
F. "Concealed": Embedded in masonry, concrete or other construction, installed in furred spaces,
within double partitions ar hung ceilings, in trenches,in crawl spaces, or in enclosures. �«
G. "Exposed": Not installed underground ar"concealed" as defined above. �
H. "Indicated," "Shown" or"Noted": As indicated, shown or noted on drawings or specificarions. �
L "Similar" or "Equal": Equal in materials, weight, size, design, construction, capacity,
performance,and efficiency of specified product. �
J. "Reviewed," "Satisfactory," "Accepted," or "Directed": As reviewed, satisfactory, accepted, or
directed by or to Engineer. �
K. Related Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, mentioned work associated with, or
affected by,the work specified.
!
L. Refer to Article 100 of the currently adopted National Electrical Code for other definitions as
applicable to this project.
1.5 WORK SEQUENCE '�
A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1 where applicable. �
1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ,
A. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches, �
panelboards and other work. Information shown on the drawings is schematic, however, �,
recircuiting will not be permitted without specific acceptance. Drawings and specifications are
complementary each to the other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for �
by both. Data presented on these drawings is as accurate as planning can determine, but
accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, locations,levels, etc., to suit �
field conditions is directed. Review all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and
Specifications; adjust all work to conform to all conditions shown therein. The Architectural
drawings shall take precedence over all other drawings. �
B. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of the job and ascertain all conditions affecting the � �""�
proposed installation and adjust all work accordingly. Make provisions for these costs. �,
C. Discrepancies between different plans, between plans and specifications, between �►
specifications, or regulations and codes governing this installation shall be brought to the
attention of the Engineer in writing before the date of bid opening. In the event such �
discrepancies exist, and the Engineer is not so notified, the adjudication of responsibility shall
be solely at the discretion of the Engineer.
,
, �
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-2
�
�
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
�+ 260500—BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
1.7 COORDINATION
�
A. Prior to fabrication or installation of any electrical work, participate in detailed coordination
�, planning meetings with all other building utilities systein trades, under the direction of the
' General Contractor, so as to coinpletely establish routings, elevations, space requirements, and
'" coordination of access, layout, and suspension requirements in relationship to the building
fi
structure and the work of all other trades.
�
1.8 SUBMITTALS
�.
�
A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions below.
B. Prior to submission, shop drawings, inaterial lists and catalog cuts or manufacturer's printed
� data shall be thoroughly checked for compliance with contract requirements, coinpatibiliry with
� equipinent being furnished by the Contractor or Owner, accuracy of dimensions, coordination
with work of other trades, and conformance with sound and safe practice as to erection of
" installation. Each submittal shall bear Contractor's signed stateinent evidencing such checking.
k
C. Clearly mark each shop drawing as follows for purposes of identification:
� 1. Shop Drawing
2. Equipment Identification Used on Contract Drawings
" 3. Date
4. Name of Proj ect
� 5. Branch of Work
�. 6. Engineer's Name
7. Contractor's Name
A
� D. Clearly mark printed material, catalog cuts, painphlets or specification sheets, and shop
drawings with the same designation shown on the contract document schedules. Identify
� specific item proposed, showing catalog number, recess openings, diinensions, capacities,
electrical characteristics, eta Submittals which are incomplete will be returned to the
� Contractor without review.
� E. Contractor agrees that submittals processed by the Engineer are not change orders; that the
c; purpose of submittals is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the
design concept; and that the Contractar demonstrates this understanding by indicating which
� equipment and inaterial he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and
� installation methods he intends to use.
� F. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions (which he shall confirm and correlate at the job
� site), fabrication processes and techniyues of construction, and coordination of his wark with
� that of other trades. The Contractor shall check and verify all measurements and review shop
drawings before submitting them. If any deviations from the specified requirements for any
'" item of material or equipment exist, such deviation shall be expressly stated in writing and
�, incorparated with the submittal.
� G. Maintain one copy of shop drawings at the project field office until completion of the project,
r-
and make this copy available,upon reyuest,to representatives of the Engineer and Owner.
�
�,
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQLl1REMENTS 260500-3
r
�
1
CenturyLink VAIL �
260500—BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
H. No equipment or materials shall be installed or stared at the jobsite until submittals for such �
equipment or materials have been given review action pennitting their use.
I. Shop drawings and manufacturer's published data shall be submitted for: �
1. All switchboards,panelboards
2. Transformers
3. Lighting fixtures(catalog cuts) � �
4. Motor control centers �
1.9 RECORD DOCUMENTS +w
A. Maintain a contract set of electrical drawings at the site. Neatly mark all changes, discoveries
and deviations from the original drawings. Use a color which contrasts with the prints. This
shall be a separate set of drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be kept up to
date as the job progresses and shall be made available for inspection by the Engineer at all �
times. Upon completion of the contract, this set of record drawings shall be delivered to the
Engineer. Record documents to be provided by the Contractor shall clearly and accurately �
show the following: '
1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of
control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker �
size and arrangements.
2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building
lines. �
3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and inaterials �
installed. '�
1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS �
A. Conform to those editions of the following as currently adopted by the local code enforcement �
authority:
1. ANSI/NFPA 70.
2. ANSUIEEE C2.
3. Denver Building Code, and applicable requireinents of the Fire Prevention Bureau.
4. Comply with requirements of the utility and telephone companies furnishing service to �
this installation.
5. Other requirements as listed elsewhere in these specifications. �
B. Obtain electrical pennits,plan review,and inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
C. The drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, �
statutes, ar ordinances in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take `"
precedence when they are more stringent than,or conflict with the drawings and specifications.
�»
.r
,
�
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-4
�
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 260500—BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
' PART2 -PRODUCTS
k
M 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
' A. Materials and Equipment: Acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the use
intended,except where more stringent requirements are indicated by the Contract Documents.
, B. Compatibility with Available Space: Equipment layouts shown are based on use of equipment
as specified. If the Contractor chooses equipment available from any other manufacturer listed
� as an acceptable manufacturer, or offers equipment under the provision for substitutions, the
Contractor shall be solely responsible for first ascertaining that the offered equipinent can be
installed in the space available with ample clearances for maintenance. Include coordination
, drawings,as specified herein,when required.
� C. All equipment and inaterials installed shall be new,unless otherwise specified.
' D. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a
�, inanner acceptable to the Engineer or Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner.
� E. All electrical materials shall be acceptable for installation only if labeled or listed by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities.
F. All major equipment components shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model number,
and serial nuinber permanently attached in a conspicuous location.
E:
R 2.2 PRODUCT OPTIONS
` A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those
� standards.
� B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
Submit a request for substitution far any manufacturer not specifically named.
n
�„ C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers without a Provision for
Substitutions: Products of named manufacturers ineeting specifications; no options, no
� substitutions allowed.
�r.
23 GUARANTEE
�"'"
�� A. The entire electrical system installed under this Contract shall be left in proper working order.
Replace, at no additional cost to the Owner,any wark,materials,or equipinent which evidences
?�� defects in design, construction, or workmanship within two years, or as specifically noted
� elsewhere in these specifications, from date of final acceptance.
�
�
�,
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-5
�
i�r
,
�
CenturyLink VAIL ;
260500—BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE �
PART 3 -EXECUTION �
..�
3.l WORKMANSHIP �
A. Install wark using procedures defined in NECA Standard of Installation. �"�
B. Workmanship shall conform to highest industry standards for each trade involved in erection of �
the work.
C. Contractor's personnel and subcontractors selected to perfortn the work shall be well versed and �
skilled in the trades involved. .
D. Any changes or deviations from the drawings and specifications must be accepted in writing by �
the Engineer. All errors in installation shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. All
specialties shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Where details ar specific installation
requirements are not provided,manufacturer's recominendations shall be followed.
��
E. Upon completion of work, all equipment and inaterials shall be installed complete, thoroughly
checked, correctly adjusted, and left ready for intended use or operation. All wark shall be
thoroughly cleaned and all residue shall be removed from surfaces. Exterior surfaces of all �
material and equipment shall be delivered in a perfect,unblemished condition. �
F. Contractor shall provide a complete installation, including all required labor, material, cartage, �
insurance,permits, and taxes.
3.2 CHASES, OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING '"�
A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to eliminate where possible, cutting, channeling,
chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roofs. Any damage to the building, _
structure, piping, ducts, equipment or any defaced finish shall be repaired by skilled mechanics
of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the �"'�
Architect/Engineer. Any necessary cutting, channeling, drilling or welding as required for the
proper support, concealment, installation or ancharing of raceways, outlets, ar other electrical �
equipment shall be perfonned in a careful manner, and as approved by the Engineer.
B. All openings made in fire-rated walls, floars, or ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a �
manner to conform to the fire rating for the surface penetrated.
C. All penetrations required through completed concrete construction shall be care drilled at �
minimum size required. Precautions shall be taken when drilling to prevent damage to
structural concrete. The Contractor shall obtain permission from the Engineer before
proceeding with drilling.
�
'
�
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-6
�
�
r°
� CenturyLink VAIL
�"� 260500—BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC UPGRADE
� 3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
4
A. Coordinate electrical systems, equipinent, and materials installation with other building
�° co�nponents. If equipment of a different size is furnished by the Contractor,the Contractor shall
furnish and install the proper motor starter, fuses, circuit breaker, disconnect switch, wire and
� conduit required for the equipinent furnished, at no additional cost to the Owner and shall be
�
approved by the Owner. �
i
_ �
3.4 PROGRESS OF WORK
A
�
A. Order the progress of electrical work to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades.
Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will pennit. Any cost
�, resulting from defective or ill-timed work performed under this Section shall be borne by this
Contractor.
r.
" END OF SECTION 260500
a
�
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
�
�
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500-7
�
�r
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 260510—ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS HVAC UPGRADE
.�
�
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
� 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES �
�n A. Electrical remodeling.
�
� 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
`" A. Division 1: Alteration project procedures.
� B. Division 1: Minor demolition for remodeling.
�,
� PART2 -PRODUCTS
w
,, 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
� A. Materials and Equipinent for Patching and Extending Work: As specified in individual
Sections.
Y`
4.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
'` 3.1 EXAMINATION
`" A. Field verify measurements and circuiting arrangements.
�
B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. Maintain
� electrical continuity to remaining wiring and equipment.
� C. Removal Drawings are based on casual field observation and/or existing record documents.
��
Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing exisring installation.
+� D. The Electrical Contractor shall field check all existing conditions prior to bidding and shall
include in his bid an allowance for the reinoval and relocation of existing conduits, wires,
" devices, fixtures, or other equipment as indicated on the plans or as required to coordinate and
��.
adapt new and existing electrical systems to all other work required on this project.
,.� E. Beginning of removal means installer accepts existing conditions.
�
3.2 PREPARATION
�
�, A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls,floors,and ceilings scheduled for reinoval.
� B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company.
ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS 260510- 1
I �
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
260510—ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS � HVAC UPGRADE
C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during �
construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel
experienced in such operations.
D. Existing Electrical Service, Fire Alarm System and Telephone System: Maintain existing �
systems in service until new systems are accepted or as otherwise indicated. Disable systems
only to inake switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner at least 36 hours befare partially �
or completely disabling system. Miniinize outage duration. Make temporary connections to
maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
�
3.3 REMOVAL AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK �
A. Remove and extend existing electrical work under provisions of this Section. �,
B. Remove,relocate,and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. '�
C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. �
D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling
finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. �
E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit
servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which
are not removed.
r�
F. Disconnect and reinove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipinent.
G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has �
been removed.
H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaries. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other �
accessories.
�
I. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. "�'
Provide inodifications to assure that circuits or systems wiring shall not pass through outlet or �
junction boxes which may be rendered inaccessible by changes inade to the building.
J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or �
provide access panel as appropriate.
K. Extend existing installations using materials and inethods as specified. �
L. Where the reuse of existing conduits, outlets,junction boxes, etc. is permissible, make certain
that the wiring for them is continuous from outlet to outlet. `�"�
,.r
M. Connect new work to existing work in a manner that will assure proper raceway grounding
throughout in conformance with the National Electrical Code. �
N. Existing conduits,wire,dev�ces,fixtures, etc. which shall be removed shall become the property
of the Contractor unless otherwise noted.
�
ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS 260510-2
�
■
'
�
�� CenturyLink VAIL
� 260510—ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS HVAC UPGRADE
" 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which reinain or are to be reused.
B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace
`` damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit
� directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
� 3.5 INSTALLATION
.�
A. The Contractor shall perform all cutting, channeling, chasing, drilling, etc. as required to install
or remove electrical equipment in areas of remodeling. This work shall be perfonned so as to
minimize damage to portions of wall finishes,surfaces,plastering, or the structures which are to
be reused,resurfaced,plastered,or painted under another division of these specifications.
M
B. Carefully coordinate with the required remodeling work, cutting and patching, etc. perfonned
"�� by other trades. Remove or relocate existing electrical conduits, wires, devices, fixtures, and
, other equipment as necessaty.
,
END OF SECTION 260510
�
�
'
,
'
'
'
'
�
W
ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS 260510-3
�
�
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 260519—BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE HVAC UPGRADE
�.
4
PART1 -GENERAL
*
�'"" 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
" A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
�� Conditions and Division�01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
r
�
1.2 SUMMARY
� A. Building Wire and Cable.
� B. Metal Clad Cable.
�" C. Wiring Connections and Terminations
�
P 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
�' A. Section 260532 -Conduit
"� B. Section 260534—Electrical Boxes and Fittings.
r..
C. Section 260529- Supporting Devices and Seals
��
� D. Section 260553-Electrical Identification
" 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
r
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
�° stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A
� listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division l.
�, B. NEMA WC 70 — Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of
� Electrical Energy.
�
C. NEMA WC 70 — Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
�" Distribution of Electrical Energy.
�
� 1.5 SUBMITTALS
�' A. Submit shop drawings and product data under the provisions of Section 260500.
�
� 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
r A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
�
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLES 260519- 1
�
�
I �
CenturyLink VAIL �
260519—BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE HVAC UPGRADE
B. Conductor sizes are based on copper. �
C. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is appropriate unless diinensioned. Route wire and
cable as required to meet project conditions. � �
D. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact
routing and lengths required. �
�.
1.7 COORDINATION
�
A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 260500. �
B. Determine required separation between wiring and other work. �
C. Detennine routing to avoid interference with other work.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS ,�
2.1 BUILDING WIRE �
A. Thermoplastic-Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 70.
B. Rubber-Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 70. �
C. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt, insulation, THHN/THWN, u11
or XHHW.
D. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600 volt insulation,THHN/THWN,or XHHW. ,
.�i
2.2 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE
A. Control Cable for Class l Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 600 volt �
insulation,rated 60 degree C,individual conductors twisted together, shielded,and covered with
a PVC jacket. �
B. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor,
300 volt insulation, rated 60 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and
covered with a PVC jacket;UL listed. �
C. Plenum Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor,
300 volt insulation, rated 60 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and �
covered with a non-metallic jacket; UL listed far use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used
as ducts,and plenums.
D. Install all reinote control and signal cables in cable tray, raceways, or supported every 4'-0" on �
bridal rings.
�
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLES 260519-2
�
'
�"
CenturyLink VAIL
�- 260519—BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE HVAC UPGRADE
�" PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
� 3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS
�"� A. Use no wire smaller than No. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than No.
16 AWG far control wiring.
A
� B. Use No. 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120-volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75
feet,and for 20 ampere,277-volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet.
�
` C. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable.
� D. Splice only in accessible junction or outlet boxes.
� E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipinent, and panelboards. Make temporary
connections to panelboard devices with sufficient slack conductor to facilitate reconnections
" reyuired for balancing loads between phases.
�
F. Dainaged conductors during installation shall be replaced.
r
�
G. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
p 3.2 WIRING 1NSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS
�
A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant for
� pulling No.4 AWG and larger wires.
� B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather
r and all inechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed.
4 C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
I"°
�, 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION
�, A. When approved install in interior partitions only and for flexible connection to lighting fixtures.
(Flexible connection not to exceed 6'-0".)
�-
�
B. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
f� C. Cable shall not be installed below windows in exterior walls.
►° D. Cable shall not be used for branch circuit homeruns. Branch circuit homeruns shall be building
� wire in raceway.
E. Run concealed cable parallel and perpendicular to building elements at right angles. Parallel
� cable runs shall be run together. Run high and tight to structure. Coordinate cable runs with
other trades.
�
BLTILDING WIRE AND CABLES 260519-3
�
`
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
260519—BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE HVAC UPGRADE
F. Support cable every four feet and within 12 inches of every outlet box,junction box, cabinet, or �
fitting.
G. Cable shall not be used in einergency circuits. �
H. Cable shall not be used as flexible connection to inotors, transfonners or other vibrating
equipment. �
I. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring inetal clips to support cables from �
structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
�-
J. Provide protecrion for exposed cables where subject to damage. � �
3.4 WIRING CONNECTION AND TERMINATIONS �
A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes.
+�
B. For No. 8 AWG and smaller,use insulated spring wire connectars with plastic caps.
C. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps, No. 6 AWG and larger. Tape un-
insulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of �
conductor.
D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. �
E. Make splices, taps and tenninations to carry full ampaciry of conductors without perceptible
teinperature rise. �1
F. Terminate up to #10 AWG spare conductors with wire nuts. Use electrical tape for spare
conductor#8 AWG and larger.
G. Use solderless pressure connectars with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, ""�
8 AWG and smaller.
H. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 �
AWG and smaller.
�
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL °'
�
A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
�r
B. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values.
C. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper �
phasing connections.
3.6 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE �
A. Concealed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways or cable as approved herein. �
BLJILDING WIRE AND CABLES 260519-4
�
'
�°
�� CenturyLink VAIL
i 260519—BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE HVAC UPGRADE
� L If specified, cables may be used for lighting fixture connections and in interior partitions
�. for branch circuits.
�� B. Exposed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
r
C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Building wire in raceways or cable as approved herein.
�
D. Wet or Damp Interiar Locations: Building wire in raceway.
�r
�,""
E. Exterior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
�, F. Underground Locations: Building wire in raceways.
�
3.7 WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODING
Y
A. Wires No. 6 AWG and smaller shall be factory color coded. Wire No. 4 AWG and larger shall
� be color-coded with color tape 6-inch length of exposed ends, and at every accessible junction
,, box on the branch circuit ar feeder.
r 120/208 Volts 277/480 Volts
A = Black A = Brown
�` B = Red B = Orange
� C = Blue C = Yellow
Neutral=White Neutral=Gray
� Ground =Green Ground =Green
"' B. Maintain the color coding throughout the system from panel to the last device on the branch
�, circuit.
�
� END OF SECTION 260519
,
'
'
'
'
�
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLES 260519-5
r
�
'
�.
CenturyLink VAIL
� 260526—GROUNDING AND BONDING HVAC UPGRADE
�
�
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
'' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
`" A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
�, Conditions,apply to this Section.
r
L
1.2 SUMMARY
�
A. Power System Grounding
� B. Cominunication System Grounding
!� C. Electrical Equipment and Raceway Grounding and Bonding
�
�, 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
� A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where inore
stringent requirements are listed herein ar otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
�
� B. NFPA Coinpliance: NFPA 70 "National Electrica] Code(NEC).
„ C. UL Compliance: Applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos.467 "Electrical Grounding and
Bonding Equipment," and 869, "Electrical Service Equipinent," pertaining to grounding and
� bonding of systems,circuits and equipment. In addition,require compliance with UL Std 486A,
*
"Wire Connectors". Grounding and bonding products which are to be UL-listed and labeled for
their intended usage.
�
D. IEEE Compliance: Applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of IEEE
� Standards 80, 81, 141 and 142 pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and
� equipment.
�
�� 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
�
A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to metallic cold
�' water service, building steel and to supplementary grounding electrodes, as indicated on
�, drawings.
,� B. Ground each separately-derived system neutral to nearest metallic cold water pipe 2-inch
1�
diameter or larger, building steel and where present to the referenced ground bar as shown on
drawings.
� C. Provide communications system grounding conductor at point of service entrance and connect
i� to nearest referenced ground bar as shown on drawings.
�
�.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526- 1
�
�
i �
CenturyLink VAIL �
260526—GROLTNDING AND BONDING HVAC UPGRADE
D. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying �
inetal parts of electrical equipinent, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways .+-
and cables,receptacle ground connectors,and plumbing systems.
�
1.5 SUBMITTALS
�
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 260500. �
B. Indicate layout of ground ring, location of system grounding electrode connections, and routing
of grounding electrode conductors. �
C. Submit all field test reports. ���
�
PART 2 -PRODUCTS '�
2.1 MATERIALS ,�
A. Ground Rods: Copper or copper-clad steel, 3/4-inch diameter,minimum length 10 feet. �
B. Mechanical Groundin�Connectors: For all grounding connections above grade.
1. Manufacturer: Burndy Electrical
2. Material: Copper. �
3. Compression Type: Irreversible.
4. UL listed under Standard UL467.
C. Wire: �
1. MateriaL• Copper.
2. Size: As indicated on the drawings. When size is not indicated, size per Article 250 of �
NEC requirements.
D. Grounding Connection Accessories:
1. Electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding �
straps,as recommended by accessories manufacturers far type service required.
.wA
2.2 Field Welding: Exothermic welded connections are required where grounding conductors
connect to underground grounding conductors and to underground grounding electrodes,and for
bonding to steel. All underground connection shall be exothermic welded. �,
.ri
PART 3 -EXECUTION �
3.1 INSTALLATION �
A. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder and branch circuits. """'
Tenninate each ground conductor to the bushing and ground lug.
�
�
GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526-2
�
'
�..
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 260526—GROUNDING AND BONDING HVAC UPGRADE
` B. Use ininiinum No. 6 AWG copper conductor for cominunications service grounding conductor.
� Leave 10-feet slack conductar at tenninal board or cabinet.
r� C. Provide isolated grounds far all microprocessor and data processing equipment,where indicated
�,
on drawings.
, D. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in
� accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts.
� Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, connections are to be tightened
to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective
"' grounding.
4
E. Provide code-sized ground cable bonding juinpers, installed with ground clamps, across all
r conduit expansion couplings and fittings.
'" F. Route grounding connections, conductors to ground, and grounding conductors to protective
r
devices in the shortest and straightest paths possible to minimize transient voltage rises.
�� G. Provide an equipment grounding conductor in all flexible metallic conduits.
�^ H. Grounding conductor in feeders and branch circuits extend ground conductor to switches,
w receptacle, equipment enclosures, eyuipment, and panels etc. and ground as required.
r
END OF SECTION 260526
�
�
,
'
,
'
'
'
,
GROLTNDING AND BONDING 260526-3
a
�
'
r.
CenturyLink VAIL
+� 260529—SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS HVAC UPGRADE
r
W
PART ] -GENERAL
�
�' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
r A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
�, Conditions,apply to this Section.
�
�
1.2 SUMMARY
� A. Conduit and equipment supports.
� B. Fastening hardware.
�" C. Wall and floor seals.
4
p 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
�- A. A.Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
stringent requireinents are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
r
r
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
��
A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipinent and conduit, including wiring,
'" which they carry.
�
,, PART 2-PRODUCTS
r •
� 2.1 MATERIAL
�
A. Support Channel: Galvanized or painted steel for non-corrosive environment.
i� B. Hardware: Corrosion-resistant.
r�
� PART 3 -EXECUTION
� 3.1 INSTALLATION
�w
A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using
�" precast insert system, expansion anchors, preset inserts, or beam clamps. Do not use spring
�,,. steel clips and clamps;however, caddy fasteners are accepted.
�
4�
SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS 260529- 1
�
�
, '
CenturyLink VAIL �
260529—SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS HVAC UPGRADE
B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry,plaster, or gypsuin board partitions �
and walls; expansion anchars or preset inserts in solid inasonry walls; self-drilling anchors or
expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood
screws in wood construction. �
C. Do not fasten supports to piping,ductwork,mechanical equipment,or conduit.
D. Do not drill structural steel meinbers. �
E. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a
neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. �
F. Install surface-inounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
G. Bridge studs top and bottoin with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards �
in stud walls.
H. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls, concrete and/or masonry walls and floors, it shall be �
sleeved. Seal opening around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer compound.
I. Where conduit penetrates waterproofed floors or exterior walls subject to entry of moisture, �
provide pipe sleeves two sizes larger than conduit, suitably flashed or sealed where appropriate.
Seal annular space around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. �
�
J. No suspended conduit or box supports shall be less than 1/4-inch diameter steel rod. Rod used
as pedestal support is not acceptable. The contractor shall not use tie wire or wire of any type to �
support conduits,junction boxes or pull boxes.
K. No more than five (5) 1/2-inch conduits, three (3) 3/4-inch conduits or two (2) 1-inch conduits „�
shall be supported on a single 1/4-inch diameter steel rod.
�11
L. All conduits shall be supported by approved hangers. Supports installed and used by other
trades such as duct hangers, pipe hangers, ceiling hangers, etc. shall not be used far conduit
support. No conduit shall be hung from air handling duct of any type. Electrical conduit
systems "shall stand alone."
�
M. All light fixtures shall be independently supported at opposite corners from structural steel or
from trapeze supported from structural steel by electrical contractor. �
N. Wall-inounted fixtures shall be supported froin building structure with approved backing
support to prevent any damage to the wall. �
O. Concrete anchors shall not be used to suspend heavy electrical loads such as electrical switch
panels or four-inch and larger conduits. Anchors shall be designed to support conduits and
cable tray when fiill fitted to maximum capaciry with cables.
�
END OF SECTION 260529 �
�
SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS 260529-2
�
�
�
�.
CenturyLink VAIL
� 260532—CONDUIT HVAC UPGRADE
A
4
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
�' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
" A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Suppleinentary
� Conditions, apply to this Section.
r
�
1.2 SECTION 1NCLUDES
r
A. Metal Conduit
e B. Flexible Metal Conduit
�' C. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit
u
D. Electrical Metallic Tubing
�
� E. Nonmetallic Conduit
F. Fittings and Conduit Bodies
r
�
�
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
�
� A. Division 1 -Cutting and Patching.
w
B. Division 2-Trenching: Excavation and backfill for conduit and utilities on site.
r�
6 C. Division 3-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Protective envelope for underground conduit installations.
� D. Division 7- Sheet Metal Flashing and Triin
� E. Section 260526-Grounding and Bonding
� F. Section 260529- Supporting Devices and Seals
i�
G. Section 260534-Electrical Boxes and Fittings
�
� H. Secrion 260553 -Electrical Idenrification
r�
1.4 REFERENCES
��
A. ANSI C80.1 -Rigid Steel Conduit,Zinc Coated.
�
�, B. ANSI C80.3 -Electrical Metallic Tubing,Zinc Coated.
�'
�
CONDUIT 260532- 1
r
�r
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
260532—CONDUIT HVAC UPGRADE
C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable �
Assemblies. rr
D. ANSI/NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code. �
rW
E. NECA- "Standard of Installation".
F. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit �
and Intennediate Metal Conduit.
G. NEMA TC 2-Electrical Plastic Tubing(EPT)and Conduit(EPC-40 and EPC-80). �A
H. NEMA TC 3—PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS �
A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.
�
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS �
A. Submit under provisions of Section 260500.
B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than two (2) inches or larger, regardless of �
location(i.e.,above ceiling,below slab,etc.). Diinension from building columns.
C. Accurately record actual routing of all conduits installed in and under the slab. Dimension froin �
the building columns.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING �
A. Deliver,store,protect,and handle products under provisions of Section 260500.
B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. �
C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide �
appropriate covering.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS �
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify routing and tennination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. �
C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as
required to complete wiring system and to coordinate with the wark of other trades. �
�
CONDUIT 260532-2
�
�
P
CenturyLink VAIL
w 260532—CONDUIT HVAC UPGRADE
� PART 2 -PRODUCTS
6
+� 2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
� A. Minimum Size, unless otherwise specified:
r
1. Homeruns:
� a. 1/2-Inch above accessible ceilings.
� b. 3/4-Inch above unaccessible ceilings and in concrete slab.
c. 1-Inch below grade and below slab on grade.
r
� B. Branch Circuits after the first junction point: 1/2-Inch C unless otherwise specified.
� C. Dry Locations:
� 1. Concealed: Use electrical metallic tubing.
�'� 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit if subject to damage below 8-feet, otherwise use
r
electrical metallic tubing.
a
2.2 METAL CONDUIT
r
�
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
p B. Intennediate Metal Conduit(IMC): Rigid steel.
W C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1;material to inatch conduit.
r
� 2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
� A. Description: Interlocked steel construction.
� B. Fittings: ANSUNEMA FB 1.
r
� 2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
�. A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
�" B. Fittings: ANSUNEMA FB 1.
�
�, 2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING(EMT)
� A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
�" B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSUNEMA FB 1; steel,compression.
�
�
�
CONDLTIT 260532-3
�
�r.
i �
CenturyLink VAIL �
260532—CONDUIT HVAC UPGRADE
2.6 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT �
,�,
� A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
�
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. �
PART 3 -EXECUTION �
3.1 INSTALLATION �
A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation".
B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. �
C. Arrange supports to prevent misaligmnent during wiring installation.
�
D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis
hangers, and split hangers.
E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel, provide �
space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 260529. �
G. Do not support conduit with wire or perfarated pipe straps. Remove wire used for teinporary
supports �
�
H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
r�
I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
r�
J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to building �
elements and walls.
�
L. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. �
M. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104
degrees F.
�
N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. �
P. Install no more than equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to
make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate �
or factory elbows for bends in inetal conduit larger than 2-inch size. �'"
Q. Avoid moisture traps;provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. "�
�
CONDUIT 260532-4
�
'
r
CenturyLink VAIL
�' 260532—CONDUIT HVAC UPGRADE
.
R. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses,
� control and expansion joints.
�` S. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
r.
T. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
.. '
U. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Secrion 260526.
r
V. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 260553.
r
�
3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
�
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,using approved
�' inaterials and inethods.
�.
�. END OF SECTION 260532
�
'
�
'
�, .
'
'
t
'
�
CONDUIT 260532-5
r
`
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 260534—ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS HVAC REPLACEMENT
�
�
PART1 -GENERAL
.
� 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
�'� A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
�, Conditions,apply to this Section.
�
1.2 SUMMARY
4
r
A. Wall and Ceiling Outlet Boxes
L, B. Floor Boxes
�° C. Pull and Junction Boxes
�
�, 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
4 A. Division 7-Firestopping.
�" B. Division 8 -Access Doors: Wall and ceiling access doors.
�
C. Section 262726 -Wiring Devices: Service fittings and fire-rated poke-through fittings for floar
�, boxes.
�` D. Section 260580—Equipment Wiring Systems.
r
r 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
� A. Comply with the requireinents of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
� stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
B. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 -Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
R'
�w C. ANSUNEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes,Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supparts.
� D. ANSI/NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code.
� E. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum).
�
�� 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
�' A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
�
B. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets prior to rough-in.
�
�.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 260534- 1
r
�
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
260534—ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS HVAC REPLACEMENT
� C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at
location required far box to serve intended purpose. Include installation within 10-feet of �
location shown. Refer to Architectural Drawings.
. �
PART2 -PRODUCTS �
�
2.1 OUTLET BOXES rIY
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, with 2-inch male fixture studs �
where required.
B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB l, Type FD, cast ferroalloy. Provide gasketed cover by box �
manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.
�t
2.2 FLOOR BOXES ""'
�
A. Floor Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1 or NEMA FB 1,fully adjustable.
2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES �
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel. �
B. Sheet Metal Boxes Larger than 12-Inches in Any Dimension: Hinged enclosure in accordance
with Section 260535. ����
�
C. Surface-Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6; flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction
box.
1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. �
2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange,neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
PART 3 -EXECUTION �
3.1 1NSTALLATION �
A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,
equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. '"A
B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance.
C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. �
D. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling
access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. �
I �
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 260534-2
�
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 260534—ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS HVAC REPLACEMENT
� E. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, usin�materials
�, and methods under the provisions of Division 7.
r F. Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices with
�.
each other.
r
G. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas.
� H. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6-inch separation.
Provide miniinum 12-inch separation between back-to-back boxes in acoustic-rated walls.
r
� L Secure flush inounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for
surface finish thickness.
�
J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
r
K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
r
� L. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
r M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
�' N. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two(2)rigid inetal
�
conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.
d O. Use gang box where inore than one(1)device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
�' P. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
� Q. Minimum junction and pull box size 4-11/16" x 4-11/16"x 2-1/4".
F
R. Minimum outlet box size 4" x 4" x 1-1/2".
L
S. Minimum telephone outletbox size 4-11/16" x 4-11/16" x 2-1/4".
�
V
3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
�-
A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for products fumished under other sections.
�
B. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches and
� backsplashes.
�
C. Position outlet boxes to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
�
�
'
�
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 260534-3
�
�
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
260534—ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FTTTINGS HVAC REPLACEMENT
3.3 ADJUSTING �
A. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material.
B. Adjust flush-inounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. �
� C. Install knockout closure in unused box openings.
�
END OF SECTION 260534
�
'
,
,
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
�
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 260534-4
�
'
r
CenturyLink VAIL
�� 260553—ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION HVAC REPLACEMENT
�
�
PART 1 -GENERAL
p
'` 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
� A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
� Conditions,apply to this Section.
�
►�
1.2 SUMMARY
� A. Electrical Power,Control and Communication Conductors and Conduit
� B. Operational Instructions and Warnings
�" C. Danger Signs
w
D. Equipment/System Identification Signs
�
�' 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
� A. Comply with the requireinents of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
�, stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Docuinents. A
listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.
r
` 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
� A. ANSI Coinpliance: Applicable requirements of ANSI A13.1, "Piping and Piping Systems".
e
B. FS Compliance: Applicable requireinents of FS L-P-387 "Plastic Sheet, Laininated,
� Thermosetting(for designation plates)". �
�
C. UL Compliance: Applicable requirements of UL Standard 969, "Marking and Labeling
�„ Systems," pertaining to electrical identification systeins.
�'- D. NEMA Compliance: Applicable requirements of NEMA Standard Nos. WC-1 and WG2
pertaining to identification of power and control conductors.
�`
�, E. Comply with"OSHA" sign standards for danger,caution,warning, etc.
1
'
�
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 - 1
A'
�
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
260553—ELECTRICAL 1DENTIFICATION HVAC REPLACEMENT
PART2 -PRODUCTS �
2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS �
A. General: The manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required are to be used ��
for each application.
B. Color-Coded Emergency Power Conduit Markers: �
1. Manufacturer's standard self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick. Tape 1-1/8-
inch wide by 4-1/2-inch long marker for 2-inch and smaller conduit. Tape 2-1/4-inch �
wide by 9-inch long marker for 2-1/2-inch and larger conduit. Black lettering is to
indicate highest voltage of cable(s) in conduit.
2. Colors: Red tape. �
C. Cable/Conductor ldentification Bands:
1. For cables smaller than No. 2/0 manufacturer's standard vinyl-cloth self-adhesive
cable/conductor markers of wrap-around type,either pre-numbered plastic coated type, or �
write-on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap are to be used and numbered to
show circuit identification.
2. Far cables No. 2/0 AWG and larger, heat shrink sleeving is to be used far phase color �
coding.
D. Plasticized Tags: �
1. Manufacturer's standard preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention and
operational tags, on plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing,
approximately 3-1/4-inch x 5-5/8-inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with
appropriate preprinted wording including large-size priinary wording, e.g., DANGER, �
CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE.
E. Baked Enamel Danger Signs: �
L Manufacturer's standard "DANGER" signs of baked enamel finish on 20-gauge steel; of
standard Red, Black and White graphics; 14-inch x 10-inch size except where 10-inch x
7-inch is the largest size which can be applied where needed; with recognized standard �
explanation warding, e.g., XXXX VOLTS, KEEP AWAY, BURIED CABLE, DO NOT
TOUCH SWITCH,etc.
F. Engraved Plastic-Laininate Signs: �
1. Engraved stock melamine plastic laminate, Eomplying with FS L-P-387, in sizes and
thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter sryle of sizes and wording
indicated, White face and Black core (Black letters on a White background) except as �+�
otherwise required (emergency power and fire alarm shall be Red with White letters),
punched for mechanical fastening with a minimuin of two (2)screws.
2. Thickness: 1/16-Inch, for units up to 20 square inches or 8-inch length; 1/8-inch for . ,
larger units.
3. Fasteners: A minimuin of two (2)self-tapping stainless steel screws. �
4. Minimuin letter height shall be as follows:
a. 1/4-Inch: �
1) Panelboard name.
2) Switchboard name.
3) Transfonner name. �
�
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553-2
�r
�
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 260553—ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION HVAC REPLACEMENT
�'� 4) Transformer switch name.
j,7 5) System control panel name.
6) Voltage rating.
� 7) Ampere rating.
8) Source circuit("Fed from Normal or Generator").
�`� 9) Individual circuit breaker number and load name.
�
10) Individual switch circuit number and load name.
11) Individual inotor starter circuit number and load name.
� 12) Individual indicating light function.
13) Individual pushbutton function.
� 14) Individual selector switch functions.
w
G. Lettering and Graphics:
p 1. Names,abbreviations and other designations used in electric identification work are to be
coordinated with corresponding designation shown, specified or scheduled. Numbers,
�`" lettering and wording as required or as recommended by inanufacturer or as required for
� proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment.
� H. Adhesive Marking Tape far Device Cover Plates:
l. Avery-type or equal with 3/16-inch minimum height letters. Labels shall have black
" letters on clear labels for normal and red letters on clear labels for emergency. Embossed
w Dymo-Tape labels are not acceptable.
�
PART 3 -EXECUTION
r
� 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
�
A. General Installation Requirements:
r 1. Regulations: Governing regulations and requests of governing authorities are to be
complied with for identification of electrical work.
L
B. Underground Conduit and Ductbank Identification:
� 1. During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground conduit and ductbank, a
� continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over conduit ar
ductbank at 12-inches below finished grade or 4-inches below paving, shall be provided.
�
� C. Cable/Conductor ldentification:
1. The application of cable/conductor identification, with circuit number, on each
�, cable/conductor in each box/enclosure/cabinet where wires of more than one circuit or
coinmunication/signal system are present is required. The identification is to match the
�' marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and siinilar
previously established identification for project's electrical work.
�^
I� D. Junction Box and Pull Box Identification:
1. On the Cover of each junction box and pull box: The circuit number(s) of the enclosed
I� conductors are to be legibly written with a Black permanent ink broad tip marking pen
� and the system identified for FA (Fire Alann) EM (Emergency) PA (Public Address), S
(Security)TC(Temperature Control).
r�
�
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 -3
�
�.
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
260553—ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION HVAC REPLACEMENT
2. Covers for emergency system junction boxes and pull boxes shall be painted Red. �
3. Covers for the Fire Alarm System junction boxes and pull boxes shall be painted Red. �w
E. Operational Identification and Warnings: �
1. Wherever required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical �
systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and
equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized �
personnel, self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or
warnings on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical
enclosures shall be provided. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed,
provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended purposes. �
�
F. Equipment/Systein Identification:
1. An engraved plastic-laininated sign is to be provided on each inajor unit of electrical �
equipment in the building; including central or inaster unit of each electrical system �
including communication/control/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is specified with its
own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otberwise indicated,
provide single line of text, letter height as specified, black lettering on white field. �
Provide text inatching tenninology and nuinbering of the contract documents and shop
drawings. The sign shall include unit designation, source circuit number, circuit voltage,
and other data specifically indicated. Also, the sign shall indicate nonnal source circuit �
number ("Fed from . . .") and emergency source circuit number when the equipment is a
transfer switch or fed directly from a transfer switch. Include signs for each unit of the
following categories of electrical wark: �
a. Switchboards,panelboards (include main bus ampacity on sign), electrical cabinets
and enclosures.
b. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities.
c. Disconnect switch. �
d. Push buttons, selector switches, indicating lights. (Circuit number and voltage not
required on sign).
G. For panelboards, provide frained, typed circuit schedules (label all spares and spaces in pencil) �
with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker.
H. Provide tape labels for identification of individual receptacles and switches. Locate tape on �
front of plate and indicate associated source panelboard and circuit number.
*�
END OF SECTION 260553
�
1
'
�
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 -4
�
'
r
CenturyLink VAIL
4 260580—EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS HVAC REPLACEMENT
r
L
PART 1 -GENERAL
r
" ].1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
"' A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requireinents and other
i applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
r
r
12 SUMMARY
r
A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other Sections ar furnished by Owner.
�
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
�
� A. Divisions 22 &23 -Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment.
F, B. Division 22-Plumbing Pumps.
� C. Division 22 -Water Heaters.
" D. Division 23 -HVAC pumps.
�
E. Division 23-Air Handling Units.
�
F. Section 260532 -Conduit.
�
G. Section 260519—Building Wire and Cable.
r
d H. Section 260534-Electrical Boxes and Fittings.
r
� 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where inore
� stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A
��� listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Divisionsl.
!'' B. NEMA WD 1 -General-Purpose Wiring Devices.
�
C. NEMA WD 5 - Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices.
�"'
� PART2 -PRODUCTS
M
y, 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-CORDS AND CAPS
r A. Hubbell
�.
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 260580- 1
a
Ir�
,
CenturyLink VAIL f
260580—EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS I�VAC REPLACEMENT '�f
B. General Electric �
C. Pass& Seymour
D. Arrow, Hart&Hegeinan �
2.2 CORDS AND CAPS �
A. Straight-Blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 1.
B. Locking-Blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 5. �
C. Attachment Plug Configuration: Match receptacle configuration at outlet provided far �
equipment.
D. Cord Construction: Oil-resistant thermoset insulated Type SO inulti-conductor flexible cord
with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for hard usage in damp locations. �
E. Cord Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment and rating of branch circuit overcurrent
protection.
�
PART 3 - EXECUTION
�
3.1 INSPECTION
�
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection,wiring,and energization.
�
3.2 PREPARATION
ai'
A. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough-in. Verify location, size,
and type of connections. Coordinate details of equipment connections with supplier and '�
installer.
3.3 INSTALLATION �
A. Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat-producing
equipment. "��
.r
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid-tight flexible
conduit in damp or wet locations. �
C. Install pre-finished cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or specified, or
use attachinent plug with suitable strain-relief clamps.
D. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to outlet boxes and equipment �
connection boxes.
.�
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 260580-2
�
,
�»
CenturyLink VAIL
� 260580—EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS HVAC REPLACEMENT
�' E. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of pre-wired equipment in
�i,,� accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated.
� F. lnstall disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices such as limit
� switches and temperature switches as indicated. Connect with conduit and wiring as indicated.
� 3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION SCHEDULE
Y
A. Furnish, set in place, and wire,except as may be otherwise indicated,all heating,ventilating, air
� conditioning, plumbing, fire protection, and other motors and controls in accordance with the
following schedule. Carefully coordinate with work performed under the Mechanical and other
w Divisions of these specifications.
,�
B. Symbols:
� SD = Section in which driven equipment is specified.
E = Electrical Contractor.
" M = Mechanical Contractor.
e C = Controls Contractor
FA= Fire Alarm Contractor
n Furnished By Set in Place Control
Item � W irin�
w
Equipment Motors, Controls and Integral Disconnect
" Switches
r
1. Automatically controlled, with or without HOA SD E GM
r switches except as otherwise specified (including
integral disconnect if specified).
r
2. Automatically controlled with or without HOA SD SD C/M
� switches&which are furnished as part of factory-wired
r equipment(including integral disconnect if specified).
r� 3. Manually controlled (including integral disconnect SD E E
if specified).
i
r
4. Manually controlled and which are furnished as part SD SD GM
of factory-wired equipment (including integral
i� disconnect if specified).
�^ 5. Special duty types (part winding, etc.) (including SD E C/M
� integral disconnect if specified).
� Variable frequency drives SD E C/M
s
� Time clocks,remote bulb thermo- M M M
stats,motor valves,float
�' controls,etc.,which are an
w integra]part of or directly
attached to ducts,pipes,etc.
w
L
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 260580-3
�
�r.
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
260580—EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS HVAC REPLACEMENT ���
Environmental control panels C/M GM C/M �
Motor valves,dampers, solenoid valves SD M GM
Control circuit power supply E E �
C/M GM C/M
Low voltage controls, thennostats, valves, actuators, �
damper motors,EP and PE switches,etc.
FA FA FA,C
Duct-mounted fire and smoke �
detectors,relays for fan shutdown
Stand alone disconnect switches, E E
thennal overload switches, �
manual operating switches �
C. Notes to the Schedule: �
1. Not all equipment indicated in the schedule is used in this project. Apply as required.
2. Complete wiring diagrams for installation purposes shall be furnished under the
� Mechanical or other Divisions, as applicable. „
3. All line and low voltage wiring shall be installed utilizing materials and methods as �
specified in the Electrical Division of the specifications.
4. Provide NEMA-rated motors and equipment suitable for operation on the voltage systems
as designated below with tolerances for the allowable voltage variations above and below �
the nominal:
Rated Motor Volta�e �
Service Volta�e '/z-HP and Smaller '/-HP and Lar�er �
And Phase 1-Phase 3-Phase �.
120/208V, 3ph 115V 200V
� 277/480V,3ph 460V "�
�
END OF SECTION 260580
�
�
,
,
�
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 260580-4
�
I
'
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
'" 262416—PANELBOARDS HVAC UPGRADE
N
�, SECTION 262416-PANELBOARDS
r
PART 1 -GENERAL
�
� 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
M
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
F Conditions and Division O1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
�
� 1.02 SUMMARY
� A. This Section includes the following:
� 1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
P
1.03 DEFINITIONS
�
A. EML• Electromagnetic interference.
�
w B. GFCL• Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
� C. RFL• Radio-frequency interference.
` D. RMS: Root mean square.
� E. SPDT: Single pole,double throw.
1.
� 1.04 SUBMITTALS
� �
�' A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient
� voltage suppression device,accessary, and component indicated. Include dimensions and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
� and finishes.
"" B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
�
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
�,_ installed devices,equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
' a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250,Type 1.
�''" b. Bus configuration,current,and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective
� devices.
d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices.
� e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
I�'" overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
!"
�
� PANELBOARDS 262416- 1
w.
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
262416—PANELBOARDS HVAC UPGRADE
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring. �
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
D. Field quality-control test reports including the following: �
1. Test procedures used. �
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that �-
comply with requirements.
E. Panelboard Schedules: Far installation in panelboards. � �
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in �
emergency, operation, and inaintenance inanuals. In addition to items specified in
Division O1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions far testing and adjusting overcurrent �
protective devices. �:
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device. +�
�
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and �
capability to conduct the testing indicated,that is a member coinpany of the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as �
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having �,
jurisdiction.
�
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the �
InterNational Electrical Tesring Associarion or the National Institute for
Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in
Part 3. �
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized tesring °�
laboratory(NRTL)as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, coinponents,
and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.
�r
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
panelboards and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division O1 Section �
"Product Requirements."
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in �
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and inarked for intended use.
�
PANELBOARDS 262416-2 �
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
�'� 262416—PANELBOARDS HVAC UPGRADE
�"' F. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
�
G. Comply with NFPA 70.
r�
�' 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
�' A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the
� following conditions,unless otherwise indicated:
. 1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet(2000 m).
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1,usual service conditions,as follows:
� 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet(2000 m).
�
�.
1.07 COORDINATION
r
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other
��° construction that penetrates walls or is supparted by them, including electrical and other
types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to warkspace clearance
�"' requirements.
�
B. Coardinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
r Concrete,reinforcement,and fonnwork reyuirements are specified in Division 03.
r
�
l.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
i�_ A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
L Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
�r
� PART2 -PRODUCTS
�'
� 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
�. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
i.,
1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and
� Accessories:
�. a. Eaton Corporation
b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution&Protection Div.
!�° c. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc.
r
a PANELBOARDS 262416-3
�
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
2624]6—PANELBOARDS HVAC UPGRADE
d. Square D. '�
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS .
A. Enclosures: Flush-and surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB l,Type 1. "�
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. �
a. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 3R.
b. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250,Type 4X, stainless steel.
c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 4. �
d. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250,Type 7C.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, �
match box dimensions; far flush-mounted fronts,overlap box.
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door ""�
within hinged trim cover.
4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; �
integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment
or primer coat. �
6. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal fraine,
inside panelboard door.
B. Phase and Ground Buses: �
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment �
ground conductors;bonded to box.
C. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material. �
1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
2. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Tenninators: Compression type.
3. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. �
Locate at opposite end of bus from incoining lugs or main device.
D. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled far use as service equipment for panelboards with �
main service disconnect switches.
E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances .
required for future installation of devices.
�ri
2.03 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING '�
A. Fully rated to interrupt s}nnmetrical short-circuit current available at tenninals.
�
�
PANELBOARDS 262416-4 �
_ -
'
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
�` 262416—PANELBOARDS HVAC UPGRADE
'� 2.04 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
L�
A. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tuinbler lock; keyed alike. Omit far fused-
�. switch panelboards.
�' B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker.
� C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices:
�
1. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Sinaller: bolt on circuit breakers.
� 2. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers;
plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires
mechanical release for removal.
�., 3. Fused switches.
r
2.05 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
�
�, A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without
disturbing adjacent units.
�
� B. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock;keyed alike.
�
�� 2.06 OVERCURRENT PROTECTNE DEVICES �
Y
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
� currents.
� l. Thennal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
�, overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
� magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
� 2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5-mA trip
sensitivity.
�"
�, B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard fra�ne sizes, trip
ratings, and number of poles.
�
1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
�w
materials.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
� fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and
I� refrigerating equipment.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
�"� pickup and time-delay settings,push-to-test feature,and ground-fault indicator.
�, 4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75
percent of rated voltage.
�- 5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-
adjustable 0.1-to 0.6-second time delay.
�'` 6. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory-assembled to operate as a
r�
single unit.
�
� PANELBOARDS 262416- 5
w
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
262416—PANELBOARDS HVAC UPGRADE
PART 3 - EXECUTION �
3.01 1NSTALLATION �
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Mount top of triin 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor,unless otherwise indicated. �
C. Mount pluinb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with
fronts uniformly flush with wall finish. �
D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers.
1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. �
E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
�
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide �
warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systeins."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. �
Obtain approval befare installing. Use a computer ar typewriter to create directory;
handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic �
nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
�
3.03 CONNECTIONS �.i+
A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for �
Electrical Systems." �
B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section"Building Wire and Cable." �
1. Certify coinpliance with test parameters.
2. Correct inalfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise,replace with new units and retest. ""�
3.04 CLEANING
A. On completion of installarion,inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Reinove paint "�
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. �
END OF SECTION 262416 +�
�
PANELBOARDS 262416-6 +�
�
'
�°
CenturyLink VAIL
� 262726—WIRING DEVICES HVAC REPLACEMENT
�
�
PART 1 -GENERAL
r
�" 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
° A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
►� Conditions,apply to this Section.
�
�
].2 SUMMARY
�, A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles,receptacles with integal GFCI,and associated device plates.
� 2. Twist-locking receptacles.
3. Receptacles with integral surge suppression units.
'' 4. Wall-box inotion sensors.
�, 5. Isolated-ground receptacles.
6. Hospital-grade receptacles.
,• 7. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
8. Solid-state fan speed controls.
� 9. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
�
10. Coimnunications outlets.
11. Pendant cord-connector devices.
� 12. Cord and plug sets.
13. Floor service outlets,poke-through assemblies, service poles,and multioutlet assemblies.
�
Y�
1.3 DEFINITIONS
r
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
r
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
R
y, C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
�r D. RFL• Radio-frequency interference.
i
�` E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
� F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
�
� 1.4 SUBMITTALS
�
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
'.,
ir►
�
b
WIRING DEVICES 262726- 1
�
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
262726—WIRING DEVICES HVAC REPLACEMENT
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE �
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one
source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and
� associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. �
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for �
intended use.
C. Coinply with NFPA 70. �
1.6 COORDINATION ,�.
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipinent: Match plug configurations. '�
1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
�
PART2-PRODUCTS
�
2.1 MANUFACTURERS "�`�
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following �
manufacturers'names are used in other Part 2 articles: orll
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated;Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). �
3. Leviton Mfg. Coinpany Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass& Seymour/Legrand;Wiring Devices&Accessories (Pass& Se}nnour).
'�
2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 "�"�
configuration 5-20R,and UL 498. ,�
1. Available Products: Subject to coinpliance with requireinents, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: �
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single),CR5352 (duplex).
a Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). �
d. Pass& Seyinour; 5381 (single),5352(duplex). ����
B. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, �
NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R,and UL 498.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that inay be
incorparated into the Work include,but are not liinited to,the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following � �
a. Hubbell; CR 5253IG.
b. Leviton; 5362-IG.
.�
WIRING DEVICES 262726-2
�
'
w
CenturyLink VAIL
+� 262726—WIRING DEVICES HVAC REPLACEMENT
" c. Pass& Seymour; IG6300.
�, 3. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the
green grounding screw tenninal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from
� mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent
r
on removable parts.
�
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
�.
A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Coinply with NEMA WD 1,
" NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when
device is tripped.
� B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
� �
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
� incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
� a. Cooper; GF20.
� b. Pass& Seymour; 2084.
M
r
2.4 TVSS RECEPTACLES
�, A. Isolated-Ground,Duplex Convenience Receptacles:
� 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
� incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
'' a. Cooper; IG5362BLS.
�, b. Hubbell; IG5362SA.
c. Leviton; 5380-IG.
� 3. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R.
Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw
tenninal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounring strap.
Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable
� parts.
�` 2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES
�
A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
�,- configuration LS-20R, and UL 498.
� 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requireinents, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
� a. Cooper; L520R.
� b. Hubbell; HBL2310.
a Leviton; 2310.
�" d. Pass& Seymour; L520-R.
�
B. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
M
�
WIRING DEVICES 262726-3
r
�
,
CenturyLinl� VAIL �
262726—WIRING DEVICES HVAC REPLACEMENT
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be �
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: �
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell;IG2310. ��
b. Leviton; 2310-IG. �
3. Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration LS-20R, and
UL 498. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the geen grounding
screw tenninal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. �
Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable
parts.
�
2.6 SNAP SWITCHES
�.
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. �
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that inay be �
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole),2223 (three way), 2224(four way). �
b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 „�
(four way).
c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four �,
way). �
d. Pass & Se}nnour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),
20AC4(four way).
C. Pilot Light Switches,20 A:
�
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not liinited to,the following: �
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: �
a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V. � �
c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V.
d. Pass& Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V. "�
3. Description: Single pole,with neon-lighted handle,illuminated when switch is "ON."
�
2.7 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
`,�
A. Wall-Switch Sensors:
l. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Wark include,but are not limited to,the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 611 l for 120 V, 6117 for 277 V. �
b. Hubbell;W S 1277.
c. Leviton; ODS 10-ID. �
d. Pass& Seymour; WS3000.
e. W att Stopper(The);W S-200.
�
WIRING DEVICES 262726-4
�
I
'
�
� CenturyLink VAIL
u 262726—WIRING DEVICES HVAC REPLACEMENT
° 3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 ininutes,
�,. 180-degree field of view,with a miniinum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq.m).
�
2.8 WALL PLATES
k
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
� 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
+� 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch-(1-imn-)thick, satin-finished stainless steel.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
�
w
PART 3 -EXECUTION
�
w 3.1 INSTALLATION
�" A. Coinply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
� noted.
F B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
�' inaterials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by
riding against outside of the boxes.
� 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster,drywall joint compound,mortar, cement,concrete,dust,
� paint, and other inaterial that may contaminate the raceway system, conductars, and
cables.
�' 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
� unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation,including painting,is complete.
r^
C. Conductors:
�' 1. Do not strip insulation from conductars until just before they are spliced ar terminated on
devices.
� 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
+� scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
� • Article 300,without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail,or replace all damaged conductors.
�, b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
' c. Pigtailing existing conductors is pennitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
�
D. Device Installation:
�" 1. Replace all devices that have been in teinporary use during construction or that show
I� signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
�'` conductors.
� 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic fihn and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
e
�
WIRING DEVICES 262726-5
r
�
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
262726—WIRING DEVICES HVAC REPLACEMENT
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 inm) �
in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw tenninals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise,2/3 to 3/4 of the way around tenninal screw. �
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
7. When conductars larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. �
8. Tighten unused tenninal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into inetal boxes,remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes,allowing metal-to-metal contact.
10. Install wall switches 42 inches above floor,OFF position down. �
11. Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above floor, 2 inches above counters or rr
backsplash,grounding pole on bottom.
�
E. Receptacle Orientation: �
l. Install ground pin of vertically inounted receptacles down, and on horizontally inounted
receptacles to the left. �
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
�
G. Dimmers:
�
1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
2. Verify that diinmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. �
3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers accarding to �
inanufacturers'device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, inount flush, with long dimension �
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single,multigang wall plates.
�
L Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and �
furnishings.
�
3.2 IDENTIFICATION �
A. Comply with Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systems." �
1. Receptacles and Switches: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. .
END OF SECTION 262726 �
�
'
�
WIRING DEVICES 262726-6
�a
�
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
d 262816—ENCLOSED SWITCHES HVAC REPLACEMENT
�•
k
PART 1 -GENERAL
M
'' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
" A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
� Conditions,apply to this Section.
�
�.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
��
A. Fusible Switches
�- B. Nonfusible Switches
�-
� 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
,. A. Section 262813-Fuses.
4
1.4 REFERENCES
A
� A. NECA- Standard of lnstallation(published by the National Electrical Contractors Association).
�, B. NEMA FU 1 -Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
�' C. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
s
Maximum).
,� D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment
and Systems (published by the International Electrical Testing Association).
�
� E. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code.
� 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
i�
A. Section 260500: Procedures for submittals.
�
� B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
� 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
�
A. Record actual locations of enclosed switches in project record documents.
�'
�r
1F'
Y•:
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262816- 1
�
�
1
CenturyLink VAIL �
262816—ENCLOSED SWITCHES HVAC REPLACEMENT
PART2-PRODUCTS �
r�s
2.1 MANUFACTURERS �,
A. Acceptable Manufacturers '�
1. Eaton Corporationr
2. General Electric �
3. Square-D
4. Siemens
5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 260500. �
2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES �;
A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type GD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent ''�
opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle
lockable in OFF position. � �
B. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1,Class R fuses.
2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES �
A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type GD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent �
opening front cover with switch in ON position enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle
lockable in OFF position.
2.4 ENCLOSURES �
A. Fabrication: NEMA KS 1. �
1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
PART 3 -EXECUTION �
3.1 INSTALLATION �
A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".
�
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. ,,,�
C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size �
installed.
END OF SECTION 262816 �
rw
�
�
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262816-2
�
I
'
r
CenturyLink VAIL
� 265100—INTERIOR LIGHTING HVAC REPLACEMENT
n
� PART1 -GENERAL
r
" 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
`' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Suppleinentary
�, Condirions,apply to this Section.
��
�,
1.2 SUMMARY
�
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior lighting fixtures,lamps, and ballasts.
+. 2. Emergency lighting units.
3. Exit signs.
P 4. Lighting fixture supports.
� 5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.
,� B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting,
including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting
relays and contactors.
2. Division 26 Section " Modular Dimming Controls "for architectural dimming systeins.
� 3. Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls" for manual ar prograinmable control
systems with low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.
A 4. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent
� lamps.
�
1.3 DEFINITIONS
L
A. BF: Ballast factor.
r
�, B. CRI: Color-rendering index.
,� C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.
�' D. HID: High-intensity discharge.
� E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
�
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture,including ballast housing if provided.
�
� G. RCR: Room cavity ratio.
� 1.4 SUBMITTALS
�.
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
+� Include data on features,accessories,finishes,and the following:
�
r INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100- 1
i�
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
265100—INTERIOR LIGHTING HVAC REPLACEMENT ��
1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. �
2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. ,�;;�
3. Ballast.
4. Energy-efficiency data. w�
5. Life,output,and energy-efficiency data for lamps. �
6. Photoinetric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture
type, outfitted with lainps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the �
lighting fixture as applied in this Project.
a. Far indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified �
independent testing agency. Photoinetric data for reinaining fixtures shall be
certified by the manufacturer. �
b. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current
accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NVLAP)for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. �
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions,
weights,methods of field assembly,components,features,and accessaries. �
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power wiring.
r�c
1.5 COORDINATION �II�
�
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by thein, including HVAC equipment, fire- �
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS "�
�
2.1 MANUFACTURERS �.
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to �
product selection:
B. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that �
introduce lists,the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers '�
offering products that may be incorporated into the Wark include, but are not liinited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to coinpliance with requirements,provide products by one of the .�»�
manufacturers specified.
3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product ''r
named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a �
comparable product by one of the other inanufacturers specified. �
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS �
�z
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility far recessed fixtures.
�
�
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-2 �
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 265100—iNTERIOR LIGHTING HVAC REPLACEMENT
" B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
�, NEMA LE SA.
� C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
'' NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE SA as applicable.
Y
a
D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE SB.
�
E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
r
� F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise� indicated. Fonn and support to� prevent
warping and sagging.
r
G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
4 operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
" relamping and when secured in operating position.
�
H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows,unless otherwise indicated:
r 1. White Surfaces:.85 percent.
r
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
�, 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
� I. Plastic Diffusers,Covers,and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
�" yellowing and other changes due to aging,exposure to heat,and IJV radiation.
i a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimuin unless different
thickness is indicated.
� b. UV stabilized.
� 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass,unless otherwise indicated.
�, J. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic-
interference as required by MIL-STD-461 E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each
� ballast indicated to require a filter.
�
� 2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
� A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; programmed-start type, unless otherwise �
� indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for
� full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated.
1. Sound Rating: A.
� 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
�- 3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
4. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.
�' S. Lamp Current Crest Factar: 1.7 or less.
� 6. BF: 0.85 or higher.
7. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
�
�
� INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-3
�
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
265100—INTERIOR LIGHTING HVAC REPLACEMENT
8. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C 82.1 l and �
shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps
fail.
B. Electronic Progammed-Start Ballasts for TS Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the �
following:
1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for TS diameter lamps. �
2. Automatic la�np starting after lamp replacement.
3. Sound Rating: A.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41,Category A or better. �
6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
7. Lainp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 ar less. �
8. BF: 0.95 or higher,unless otherwise indicated. �
9. Power Factor: [0.95] 0.98 or higher.
C. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, �
Class P, and having automatio-reset thennal protection.
l. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
D. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory-wired with ballast arrangements and "��
bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in „�
the field.
2.4 EXIT SIGNS �
A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, �
comply with authorities having jurisdiction. �.
B. Internally Lighted Signs: ����
1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, 2 for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp �
life.
2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. �
3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained
power pack.
a. Battery: Sealed,maintenance-free,nickel-cadmium type.
b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state rype with sealed transfer relay. �
c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of noininal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored,
relay disconnects lainps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and
floated on charger.
�
d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, si�nulates loss of normal
power and demonstrates unit operability. �
e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge;bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit
initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared '�
receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its nonnal power supply,
providing visual confirmation of either proper ar failed emergency response.
.rr
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-4 "+A
ni
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 265100—INTERIOR LIGHTING HVAC REPLACEMENT
!" g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device autoinatically initiates code-
�, required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is
annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.
r
� 2.5 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
r
A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall
4 yield less than 0.2 mg of inercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.
r B. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximuin, noininal length of 48 inches (1220
r.
imn), 2800 initial luinens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and
average rated life 20,000 hours,unless otherwise indicated.
�
C. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, noininal length of 24 inches (610
` mm), 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and
average rated life of 20,000 hours,unless otherwise indicated.
r
W D. TS rapid-start low-inercury lamps, rated 28 W maximum, noininal length of 45.2 inches (1150
mm), 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (miniinum), color temperature 3500 K, and
r average rated life of 20,000 hours,unless otherwise indicated.
�` E. Compact Fluorescent Lainps: 4-Pin, low mercury,CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature
r
3500 K, average rated life of ]0,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start,unless otherwise
� indicated.
� 1. l3 W: T4, double or triple tube,rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).
2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube,rated 1200 initial lumens (minimuin).
� "'� 3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube,rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
�, 4. 32 W: T4,triple tube,rated 2400 initial lumens(minimum).
5. 42 W: T4,triple tube,rated 3200 initial lumens(minimum).
� 6. 55 W: T4,triple tube,rated 4300 initial lumens(minimum).
�
�^
2.6 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
4. A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel-
and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
�
� B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling
canopy. Finish same as fixture.
�
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch(13-inm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount
� a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
�"" D. W ires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M,Class 3, soft temper,zino-coated steel, 12 gage(2.68 min).
�
E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless
� steel, 12 gage(2.68 mm).
�`' F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch(5-min)miniinuin diameter,cadmium-plated,threaded steel rod.
��
�
r° INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-5
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
' 265100—INTERIOR LIGHTING HVAC REPLACEMENT
G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with �
threaded attachment,cord,and locking-type plug. .,�
�
2.7 RETROFIT KITS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES �
A. Coinply with UL 1598 listing requirements.
1. Reflector Kit: UL 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four-lamp, surface-mounted or �
recessed lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces.
2. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast,
lamps, and sockets. �
PART 3 -EXECUTION ,�
�
3.1 1NSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each �
fixture.
B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support �
element.
1. Install a minimum of two ceiling support system rods ar wires for each fixture. Locate �
not more than 6 inches (150 inm) from lighting fixture corners.
2. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans
or center in acoustical panel, and suppart fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-
inch(20-mm)metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. �
3. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting
fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor
of 3. �
C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Suppart:
� 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches(1200 min),brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stein hangers. ��
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis,including one at each end.
°,+�
D. Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dainpers closed and ready for adjustment. ,,,�
E. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. �,
F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section"Building Wire and Cable." ""�
END OF SECTION 265100 �
�
�
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100-6 �
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
� 283100—FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM HVAC REPALCEMENT
!�
�
PART1 -GENERAL
r
" 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
r A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
� Conditions and Division O1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
�_
i 1.2 SUMMARY
M A. This Section includes fire alarm systems.
w B. Related Sections include the following:
� 1. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door closers and holders with associated smoke
� detectors, electric door locks, and release devices that interface with the fire alann
systein.
p
w 1.3 DEFINITIONS
�� A. FACP: Fire alann control panel.
Y
B. LED: Light-emitting diode.
�
C. NICET: National Institute far Certification in Engineering Technologies.
Y
�
D. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.
r
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
r
� A. Existing System: Gainewell 7100 Series
� 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1�
A. Comply with NFPA 72.
r
�, B. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
�. l. Manual stations.
2. Heat detectors.
� 3. Flame detectors.
4. Smoke detectors.
� 5. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.
�w- 6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
7. Fire extinguishing system operation.
" 8. Fire standpipe system.
�
� FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100- 1
�
,
CenturyLink VAIL �
283100—FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM HVAC REPALCEMENT
C. Fire alann signal shall initiate the following actions: �
]. Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously.
2. Identify alann at the FACP. �
3. De-energize electromagnetic door holders.
4. Transmit an alarm signa] to the remote alann�receiving station.
5. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. �
6. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
7. Activate voice/alann communication system.
8. Switch heating,ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alann mode.
9. Close smoke dainpers in air ducts of systein serving zone where alarm was initiated. �
10. Record events in the system memory.
11. Record events by the system printer.
D. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or inore of the following devices or actions: �
1. Operation of a fire-protection system valve tamper. �
E. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions: N
1. Open circuits, sharts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and �`
notificarion-appliance circuits. �
2. Opening, tampering, or reinoval of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating
devices. �
3. Loss of primary power at the FACP.
4. Ground ar a single break in FACP internal circuits. �
5. Abnonnal ac voltage at the FACP.
6. A break in standby battery circuitry. �
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at the FACP or annunciator.
9. Fire-pump power failure,including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system. �
F. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble be11 and annunciate at the FACP. �
Record the event on system printer.
1.6 SUBMITTALS "'�
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
,.r
1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design. �
b. Fire alann certified by NICET,minimum Level III.
2. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including inethod of �
operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually
�
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-2 �
,
r
CenturyLink VAIL
� 283100—FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM HVAC REPALCEMENT
" and autoinatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard
�, descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
3. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programining.
� 4. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire types and
sizes.
° 5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment
�, and for system with all tenninals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color
code.
� 6. Batteries: Size calculations.
7. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each
" detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity,
� temperature,and huinidity possible when air-handling systein is operating.
8. Ductwork Coordination Drawings: Plans, sections, and elevations of ducts, drawn to
r scale and coordinating the installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show
critical diinensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, the detector
`' housing, and remote status and alann indicatars. Locate detectors according to
.
manufacturer's written recommendations.
9. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic,
� amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.
10. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device.
'' Show size and route of cable and conduits.
r
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
�
D. Field quality-control test reports.
4
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency, operation,
� and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A, recoinmendations for Owner's
W manuaL Include abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the FACP.
�� F. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for
submittals specified in Division O1 Section "Submittals," inake an identical submittal to
� authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract
�, Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications
or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments froin authorities having jurisdiction,
�' submit them to Architect for review.
�" G. Documentarion:
i�
1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to
�r NFPA 72 to Owner.
� 2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to
NFPA 72 to Owner. Fonnat of the written sequence of operation shall be the optional
�, input/output matrix.
� a. Hard copies on paper to Owner.
b. Electronic media may be provided to Architect.
�
�
r� FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-3
W
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
283100—FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM HVAC REPALCEMENT
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE �
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation
of units required for this Project.
rr
B. Installer Qualifications: Work of this Section be perfonned by a UL-listed company.
C. Installer Qualifications: Personnel certified by NICET as Fire Alann Level Il. �
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and inarked for �
intended use.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS �
A. Interruption of Existing Fire Alann Service: Do not interrupt fire alarm service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless pennitted under the following conditions and then only �
after arranging to provide temporary guard service accarding to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed �
interruption of fire alarm service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire alann service without Construction Manager's
Owner's written permission. �
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Existing Fire Alann Equipment: Maintain fully operational until new equipment has been �
tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is
accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label existing fire �
alann equipment"NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.
B. Equipinent Removal: After acceptance of the new fire alarm system, remove existing
disconnected fire alann equipment. �
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS �
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps far Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantiry eyual to 10 percent of amount �
installed,but not less than 1 unit.
2. Lainps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not less �
than 1 unit.
3. Smoke, Fire, and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of a-mount of each type
installed,but not less than 1 unit of each type. �
4. Detector Bases: Quantiry equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed,but not less �
than 1 unit of each type. �� �
5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components.
�
rW
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-4 �
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 283100—FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM HVAC REPALCEMENT
'� 6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.
� 7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.
�
�
PART2 -PRODUCTS
° 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
4
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
�° products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
� �� l. FACP and Equipinent:
" 2. Gamewell 7100 Series
�
a. Comtran Corparation.
� b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Coinpany.
c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Mannon Group Company.
" d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.
" 3. Audible and Visual Signals:
r.
a. Amseco; a division of Kobishi America, Inc.
� b. Commercial Products Group.
� c. Gentex Corporation.
d. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company.
�
� 2.2 EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
'' A. Compatibility with Existing Equipment: Fire alann systein and components shall operate as an
� extension of an existing system.
�.
2.3 FACP -Existing
�,
A. General Description: -Existing
�
�,
2.4 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
�'
A. Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in
4" contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted on recessed
� outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted,provide inanufacturer's surface back box.
� 1. Single-action mechanism,pull-lever type. With integral addressable module, arranged to
communicate manual-station status(normal,alarm,or trouble)to the FACP.
r
�
� FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-5
�
i �
CenturyLink VAIL �
283100—FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM HVAC REPALCEMENT `��
I 2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS �
A. General Description: �
.�
1. UL 268 listed,operating at 24-V dc,nominal. �
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to coinmunicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to the FACP.
3. Multipurpose type,containing tbe following: �
a. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alann,ar trouble)to the FACP. �
b. Piezoelectric sounder rated at 88 dBA at 10 feet(3 in) according to UL 464.
c. Heat sensar,coinbination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature.
4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted �
in a plug-in inodule that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for
connection of building wiring.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to �
restore them to normal operation.
6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-
on status. �
7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectars shall be analog-addressable type,
individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and
individually adjustable far sensitivity from the FACP. �
a. Rate-of-rise teinperature characteristic shall be selectable at the FACP for 15 or 20
deg F(8 or 11 deg C)per minute.
b. Fixed-teinperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be �
settable at the FACP to operate at 135 or 155 deg F(57 or 68 deg C). r�
c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitiviry for each sensor.
�
B. Photoelectric Sinoke Detectors: �
1. Sensor: LED ar infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. �
2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.011 percent/mm)
smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
C. Ionization Smoke Detector: "�I
1. Sensor: Responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion. Self-
compensating for changes in environmental conditions.
2. Detectar Sensitivity: Between 0.5 and 1.7 percent/foot (0.0016 and 0.0056 percent/min)
� smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A. ""�
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: �
1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
�
a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and OAll
percent/mm) smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
�
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-6 �
'
�
CenturyLink VAIL
+� 283100—FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM HVAC REPALCEMENT
''� 2. Ionization Smoke Detectors:
4
a. Sensor: Responsive to both visible and invisible products of coinbustion. Self-
A� coinpensating for changes in environmental conditions.
b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.5 and 1.7 percent/foot (0.0016 and 0.0056
� percent/mm) smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
� 3. UL 268A listed,operating at 24-V dc,nominal.
W 4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to cominunicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble)to the FACP.
�'� 5. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted
� in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be designed for
mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base far connection to
� building wiring.
�` a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied
r
detector. The enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4X.
� � 6. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore thein to normal operation.
* 7. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detectar has operated and power- ,
� on status. Provide remote status and alarm indicator and test station where indicated.
8. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,
�,_ individually monitored at the FACP far calibration, sensitivity, and alann condition, and
� individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.
�' 9. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensirivity.
10. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer far the
� specific duct size, air velocity,and installation conditions where applied.
r 11. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
�
` 2.6 HEAT DETECTORS
�.:
A. General: UL 521 listed.
� B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F (57
deg C) ar rate-of-rise of temperature that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) per ininute, unless
" otherwise indicated.
�.
1. Mounting: Plug-in base,interchangeable with sinoke-detector bases.
�. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alann,
� or trouble) to the FACP.
C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed
� temperature of 190 deg F(88 deg C).
�
1. Mounting: Plug-in base,interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
�*�� 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (nonnal, alarm,
� or trouble) to the FACP.
�, D. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System: Consists of detector cable and control unit.
�
� FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-7
Ww
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
283100—FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM HVAC REPALCEMENT
1. Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature 155 deg F (68 deg C). Listed for "regular" "�
service and a standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires twisted
together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished with PVC outer
sheath. Each actuatar wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that reacts with heat
to allow the cable twist pressure to short circuit wires at the location of elevated �
temperature.
2. Control Unit: Two-zone or multizone unit as indicated. Provides same system power� �
supply, supervision, and alann features as specified for the central FACP.
3. Signals to the Central FACP: Any type of local system trouble is reported to the central
FACP as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each detection zone are individually
reported to the central FACP as separately identified zones. �
4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alann,
or trouble)to the FACP.
2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES �
A. Description: Equipped for inounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system �
connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single- �
inounting assembly.
B. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-doine type; with provision for housing the operating �
mechanism behind the bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94 dBA,measured 10
feet (3 m) froin the bell. 10-inch (254-mm) size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are
weatherproof where indicated.
�
C. Chimes,Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output. �.
D. Chimes,High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output. �
ri
E. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating
inechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured �
10 feet(3 m) froin the horn.
F. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal white
polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in '�1
minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-)high letters on the lens. �,
1. Rated Light Output: Per engineered drawings. ,,,�
2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
:.�1
G. Voice/Tone Speakers:
1. UL 14801isted. �
2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.
3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W. �
� 4. Mounting: Flush,semirecessed,or surface mounted;bidirectional as indicated.
5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the speaker
location.
:�
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-8 �
I
'
�"
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 283100—FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM HVAC REPALCEMENT
� 2.8 FIREFIGHTERS'TWO-WAY TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SERVICE
k,
A. Dedicated, two-way, supervised, telephone voice communication links between the FACP,the
� Fire Command Center, and remote firefighters' telephone stations. Supervised telephone lines
� shall be connected to talk circuits by controls in a control module. Provide the following:
r
� 1. Common-talk type for firefighter use only. � �
2. Selective-talk type for use by firefighters and fire wardens.
� 3. Controls to disconnect phones from talk circuits if too many phones are in use
simultaneously.
" 4. Audible Pulse and Tone Generator, and High-Intensity Lamp: When a remote telephone
is activated,it causes audible signal to sound and high-intensity lamp to flash.
5. Selector panel controls simultaneous operation of telephones in selected zones and
permits up to six phones to be operated simultaneously. Indicate ground faults and open
or shorted telephone lines on the panel front by individual LEDs.
�`� 6. Provide liquid-crystal digital display to indicate location of caller.
� 7. Reinote Telephone Cabinet: Match existing.
� 8. Remote Telephone Jack Stations: Match existing.
�
�' 2.9 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REMOTE INDICATORS
i
A. Remote status and alarm indicator and test stations, with LED indicatin� lights. Light is
,, connected to flash when the associated device is in an alann or trouble mode. Lamp is flush
mounted in a single-gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the
` indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where
the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also
�� designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch.
w
+� 2.10 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
� A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are co�nplete with
� matching door plate.
�� 1. Electroinagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf(111-N)holding force.
2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted,unless otherwise indicated.
�" 3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.
� 4. Rating: 120-V ac.
�, B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
a:
2.11 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
�
y, A. Description: Existing.
�
�..
2.12 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
r
A. Description: Existing
�.
r FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-9
�
'
CenturyLink VAIL �
283100—FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM HVAC REPALCEMENT
2.13 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER �
A. Description: Existing �
�
2.14 SYSTEM PRINTER �
A. Description: Existing. �
2.15 WIRE AND CABLE �
A. Wire and cable far fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as coinplying with
NFPA 70, Article 760. �
B. Signalmg Line Circuits: Twisted,shielded pair, size as recommended by systein manufacturer.
1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70 Article 760, Classification CI, �
for power-limited fire alann signal service. UL listed as Type FPL, and complying with
requireinents in UL 1424 and in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
C. Non-Power-Liinited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded �
insulation.
1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG,minimum. �
2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG,minimuin.
3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70 Type MC, copper conductors, TFN/THHN
conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red ""�
identifier stripe, UL listed for fire alann and cable tray installarion, plenum rated, and
complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
PART 3 -EXECUTION "�
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION �
A. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire alarm systein is operational before �
I making changes or connections.
�
1. Connect new equipment to the existing control panel in the existing part of the building.
2. Connect new equipinent to the existing monitoring equipment at the Supervising Station.
3. Expand, modify, and supplement the existing control equipment as necessary to extend �+
the existing control functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of
merging with the existing configuration without degrading the perfonnance of either �
system.
B. Sinoke or Heat Detector Spacing: �
1. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed the rating of the detector. �`�
2. Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for
high ceiling areas, shall be detennined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72. "��
�
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100- 10 �
'
� CenturyLink VAIL
� 283100—FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM HVAC REPALCEMENT
�' 3. Spacing of heat detectors shall be detennined based on guidelines and recoinmendations
in NFPA 72.
�r C. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet (1 m) from air-supply diffuser or return-air
opening.
r
D. Duct Sinoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they
� extend the full width of the duct.
r
E. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler
� rating and location.
�
F. Single-Station Smoke Detectars: Where inore than one smoke alann is installed within a
,, dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any sinoke alann causes the
alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.
�
G. Remote Status and Alann Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-
�" flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from nonnal viewing position.
w
H. Audible Alann-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (I50 min) below the ceiling.
� Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism
� concealed behind a grille.
r
L Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least
� 6 inches(l 50 mm)below the ceiling.
�
J. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
r
� K. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the
finished floor.
�
L. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished
�' floor.
,�� M. Antenna for Radio Alann Transinitter: Mount to building structure where indicated. Use
� mounting arrangement and substrate connection that will resist ]00-mph (160-km/h) wind load
with a 1.3 gust factor without damage.
�"
�` 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
� A. Install wiring according to the following:
�
l. NECA 1.
�' 2. TIA/EIA 568-A.
�_
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section "Raceway
�� and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
� 1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm systein
shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This systein shall not be used for any
"' other wire or cable.
�-
f FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100- I 1
�
�
CenturyLink VAIL �
283100—FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM HVAC REPALCEMENT
C. Wiring Method: �
�
1. Cables and raceways used for fire alann circuits,and equipment control wiring associated
with the fire alann system,inay not contain any otber wire or cable. �
2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70 Types MI and �
CI,is not permitted.
3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables may be installed in the same �
cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.
D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recominended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and �
back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. �,,
Connect conductors that are tenninated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with
the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each tenninal according to the systein's wiring ���
diagrains. Make all connections with approved crimp-on tenninal spade lugs, pressure-type �
tenninal blocks, or plug connectors.
E. Cable Taps: Use nuinbered tenninal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boXes, cabinets, or �
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are inade.
F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alann conductors differently from the nonnal building power �
wiring. Use one color-code for alann circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory
circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alann-iniriating circuits.
Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes �
and covers red.
G. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alann system. Separate risers in
close proximity to each other with a ininimum 1-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does �
not prevent the receipt ar transmission of signals from other floors or zones. r�
H. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch(25-mm) conduit between the FACP and �
the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as �
needed to suit monitoring function.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION �
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and tenninals according to Division 26 Section "'�
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP. .�
C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM." ""�
3.4 GROUNDING �
A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; coinply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire froin ��
main service ground to the FACP.
�
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100- 12 �
'
r�
' CenturyLink VAIL
�' 283100—FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM HVAC REPALCEMENT
� 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
�
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
�^ inspect,test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
w
connections,and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
„ B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field
� tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
�
C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perfonn the following
"" field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
w
D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
�
1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement using the
` form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.
r 2. Perform each electrical test and visual and inechanical inspection listed in NFPA 72.
Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be conducted under the direct
w supervision of a NICET technician certified under the Fire Alann Systeins prograin at
Level III.
�'°
� a. Include the existing system in tests and inspections.
� 3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built drawings
and systein documentation for the inspection. ldentify iinproperly located, damaged, or
�� nonfunctional equipment,and correct before beginning tests.
4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in NFPA 72.
�,,, a. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.
� 5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA'72, including demonstration of
sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFPA 70.
� 3.6 ADJUSTING
�
A. Occupancy Adjustrnents: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
�"� provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to
� two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
� 3.7 DEMONSTRATION
�,
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
"y adjust, operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and devices. Refer to
ti. Division O1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
�.
END OF SECTION 283100
r
�
!�' FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100- 13
f